Import of readline 4.3.

Non-readline modified files:

src/gdb/ChangeLog src/gdb/defs.h src/gdb/cli/cli-cmds.c
src/gdb/cli/cli-setshow.c src/gdb/tui/ChangeLog
src/gdb/tui/tuiWin.c

In readline directory:

        * compat.c, mbutil.c, misc.c, rlmbutil.h, rltypedefs.h,
        text.c, doc/history.0, doc/history.3, support/wcwidth.c,
        examples/readlinebuf.h, examples/rlcat.c: New files.

        * CHANGELOG, CHANGES, INSTALL,  MANIFEST, Makefile.in, README,
        aclocal.m4, ansi_stdlib.h, bind.c, callback.c, chardefs.h,
        complete.c, config.h.in, configure, configure.in, display.c,
        emacs_keymap.c, funmap.c, histexpand.c, histfile.c, histlib.h,
        history.c, history.h, histsearch.c, input.c, isearch.c,
        keymaps.c, keymaps.h, kill.c, macro.c, nls.c, parens.c,
        posixdir.h, readline.c, readline.h, rlconf.h, rldefs.h,
        rlprivate.h, rlshell.h, rlstdc.h, rltty.c, savestring.c,
        search.c, shell.c, signals.c, terminal.c, tilde.c, tilde.h,
        undo.c, util.c, vi_keymap.c, vi_mode.c, xmalloc.c, xmalloc.h,
        doc/Makefile.in, doc/hist.texinfo, doc/hstech.texinfo,
        doc/hsuser.texinfo, doc/manvers.texinfo, doc/readline.3,
        doc/rlman.texinfo, doc/rltech.texinfo, doc/rluser.texinfo
        doc/rluserman.texinfo, doc/texi2dvi, doc/texi2html,
        shlib/Makefile.in, support/install.sh, support/mkdirs,
        support/mkdist, support/shlib-install, support/shobj-conf,
        examples/Inputrc, examples/Makefile.in, examples/fileman.c,
        examples/histexamp.c, examples/manexamp.c, examples/rl.c,
        examples/rlfe.c, examples/rltest.c, examples/rlversion.c:
        Modified files.

14 files changed, 7359 insertions, 1772 deletions

diff --git a/readline/doc/Makefile.in b/readline/doc/Makefile.in
index 4a38563..8a85ae1 100644
--- a/readline/doc/Makefile.in
+++ b/readline/doc/Makefile.in
@@ -27,10 +27,16 @@ infodir = @infodir@
 mandir = @mandir@
 manpfx = man
 
-man1ext = 1
-man1dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)$(man1ext)
-man3ext = 3
-man3dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)$(man3ext)
+man1ext = .1
+man1dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)1
+man3ext = .3
+man3dir = $(mandir)/$(manpfx)3
+
+# set this to a value to have the HTML documentation installed
+htmldir =
+
+# Support an alternate destination root directory for package building
+DESTDIR =
 
 SHELL = @MAKE_SHELL@
 RM = rm -f
@@ -63,13 +69,13 @@ GROFF       = groff
 
 DVIOBJ = readline.dvi history.dvi rluserman.dvi
 INFOOBJ = readline.info history.info rluserman.info
-PSOBJ = readline.ps history.ps rluserman.ps
+PSOBJ = readline.ps history.ps rluserman.ps readline_3.ps history_3.ps
 HTMLOBJ = readline.html history.html rluserman.html
-TEXTOBJ = readline.0
+TEXTOBJ = readline.0 history.0
 
 INTERMEDIATE_OBJ = rlman.dvi hist.dvi rluserman.dvi
 
-CREATED_DOCS = $(DVIOBJ) $(INFOOBJ) $(PSOBJ) $(HTMLOBJ) $(TEXTOBJ)
+DIST_DOCS = $(DVIOBJ) $(PSOBJ) $(HTMLOBJ) $(INFOOBJ) $(TEXTOBJ)
 
 .SUFFIXES:      .0 .3 .ps .txt .dvi
 
@@ -112,10 +118,12 @@ history.ps:	history.dvi
 	$(RM) $@
 	$(DVIPS) history.dvi
 
+#
+# This leaves readline.html and rlman.html -- rlman.html is for www.gnu.org
+#
 readline.html:	${RLSRC}
 	$(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/rlman.texinfo
 	sed -e 's:rlman.html:readline.html:g' rlman.html > readline.html
-	$(RM) rlman.html
 
 rluserman.html:	${RLSRC}
 	$(TEXI2HTML) -menu -monolithic -I $(TEXINPUTDIR) $(srcdir)/rluserman.texinfo
@@ -133,49 +141,94 @@ text:	$(TEXTOBJ)
 
 readline.0: readline.3
 
+readline_3.ps: readline.3
+	${RM} $@
+	${GROFF} -man < $(srcdir)/readline.3 > $@ 
+
+history.0: history.3
+
+history_3.ps: history.3
+	${RM} $@
+	${GROFF} -man < $(srcdir)/history.3 > $@ 
+
 clean:
 	$(RM) *.aux *.cp *.fn *.ky *.log *.pg *.toc *.tp *.vr *.cps *.pgs \
-	      *.fns *.kys *.tps *.vrs *.bt *.bts *.o core
+	      *.fns *.kys *.tps *.vrs *.bt *.bts *.o core *.core
+
+mostlyclean: clean
 
-distclean: clean
-	$(RM) $(CREATED_DOCS)
+distclean: clean maybe-clean
 	$(RM) $(INTERMEDIATE_OBJ)
 	$(RM) Makefile
 
-mostlyclean: clean
+maybe-clean:
+	-if test "X$(topdir)" != "X$(BUILD_DIR)"; then \
+		$(RM) $(DIST_DOCS); \
+	fi
 
 maintainer-clean: clean
-	$(RM) $(CREATED_DOCS)
+	$(RM) $(DIST_DOCS)
 	$(RM) $(INTERMEDIATE_OBJ)
 	$(RM) Makefile
 
 installdirs:	$(topdir)/support/mkdirs
-	-$(SHELL) $(topdir)/support/mkdirs $(infodir) $(man3dir)
+	-$(SHELL) $(topdir)/support/mkdirs $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)
+	-if test -n "${htmldir}" ; then \
+		$(SHELL) $(topdir)/support/mkdirs $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir) ; \
+	fi
 
 install:	installdirs
 	if test -f readline.info; then \
-		${INSTALL_DATA} readline.info $(infodir)/readline.info; \
+		${INSTALL_DATA} readline.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info; \
 	else \
-		${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.info $(infodir)/readline.info; \
+		${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info; \
 	fi
 	if test -f rluserman.info; then \
-		${INSTALL_DATA} rluserman.info $(infodir)/rluserman.info; \
+		${INSTALL_DATA} rluserman.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info; \
 	else \
-		${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/rluserman.info $(infodir)/rluserman.info; \
+		${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/rluserman.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info; \
 	fi
 	if test -f history.info; then \
-		${INSTALL_DATA} history.info $(infodir)/history.info; \
+		${INSTALL_DATA} history.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info; \
 	else \
-		${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/history.info $(infodir)/history.info; \
+		${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/history.info $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info; \
 	fi
 	-if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version' >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
-		install-info --dir-file=$(infodir)/dir $(infodir)/readline.info ; \
-		install-info --dir-file=$(infodir)/dir $(infodir)/history.info ; \
+		install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \
+			$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info ; \
+		install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \
+			$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info ; \
+		install-info --dir-file=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/dir \
+			$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info ; \
 	else true; fi
-	-${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.3 $(man3dir)/readline.3
+	-${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.3 $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/readline$(man3ext)
+	-${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/history.3 $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/history$(man3ext)
+	-if test -n "${htmldir}" ; then \
+		if test -f readline.html; then \
+			${INSTALL_DATA} readline.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/readline.html; \
+		else \
+			${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/readline.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/readline.html; \
+		fi ; \
+		if test -f history.html; then \
+			${INSTALL_DATA} history.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/history.html; \
+		else \
+			${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/history.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/history.html; \
+		fi ; \
+		if test -f rluserman.html; then \
+			${INSTALL_DATA} rluserman.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/rluserman.html; \
+		else \
+			${INSTALL_DATA} $(srcdir)/rluserman.html $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/rluserman.html; \
+		fi ; \
+	fi
 
 uninstall:
-	$(RM) $(infodir)/readline.info
-	$(RM) $(infodir)/rluserman.info
-	$(RM) $(infodir)/history.info
-	$(RM) $(man3dir)/readline.3
+	$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/readline.info
+	$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/rluserman.info
+	$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/history.info
+	$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/readline$(man3ext)
+	$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(man3dir)/history$(man3ext)
+	-if test -n "${htmldir}" ; then \
+		$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/readline.html ; \
+		$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/rluserman.html ; \
+		$(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/history.html ; \
+	fi
diff --git a/readline/doc/hist.texinfo b/readline/doc/hist.texinfo
index 8a9c941..63ceb16 100644
--- a/readline/doc/hist.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/hist.texinfo
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ This document describes the GNU History library, a programming tool that
 provides a consistent user interface for recalling lines of previously
 typed input.
 
-Copyright (C) 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
 by the Free Software Foundation.
 
 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
-Copyright @copyright{} 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright @copyright{} 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 @end titlepage
 
 @ifinfo
diff --git a/readline/doc/history.0 b/readline/doc/history.0
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..324c363
--- /dev/null
+++ b/readline/doc/history.0
@@ -0,0 +1,660 @@
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+NNAAMMEE
+       history - GNU History Library
+
+CCOOPPYYRRIIGGHHTT
+       The  GNU History Library is Copyright (C) 1989-2002 by the
+       Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+DDEESSCCRRIIPPTTIIOONN
+       Many programs read input from the user a line at  a  time.
+       The  GNU  History  library  is able to keep track of those
+       lines, associate arbitrary data with each line,  and  uti-
+       lize  information  from  previous  lines  in composing new
+       ones.
+
+
+HHIISSTTOORRYY EEXXPPAANNSSIIOONN
+       The history library supports a history  expansion  feature
+       that  is identical to the history expansion in bbaasshh..  This
+       section describes what syntax features are available.
+
+       History expansions introduce words from the  history  list
+       into  the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands,
+       insert the arguments to a previous command into  the  cur-
+       rent  input  line,  or  fix  errors  in  previous commands
+       quickly.
+
+       History expansion is usually performed immediately after a
+       complete  line is read.  It takes place in two parts.  The
+       first is to determine which line from the history list  to
+       use during substitution.  The second is to select portions
+       of that line for inclusion into the current one.  The line
+       selected  from  the history is the _e_v_e_n_t, and the portions
+       of that line that are acted upon are _w_o_r_d_s.  Various _m_o_d_i_-
+       _f_i_e_r_s are available to manipulate the selected words.  The
+       line is broken into words in the same fashion as bbaasshh does
+       when  reading input, so that several words that would oth-
+       erwise be separated are  considered  one  word  when  sur-
+       rounded  by  quotes  (see  the description of hhiissttoorryy__ttookk--
+       eenniizzee(()) below).  History expansions are introduced by  the
+       appearance  of the history expansion character, which is !!
+       by default.  Only backslash  (\\)  and  single  quotes  can
+       quote the history expansion character.
+
+   EEvveenntt DDeessiiggnnaattoorrss
+       An event designator is a reference to a command line entry
+       in the history list.
+
+       !!      Start a history substitution, except when  followed
+              by a bbllaannkk, newline, = or (.
+       !!_n     Refer to command line _n.
+       !!--_n    Refer to the current command line minus _n.
+       !!!!     Refer  to  the previous command.  This is a synonym
+              for `!-1'.
+
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        1
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       !!_s_t_r_i_n_g
+              Refer to the  most  recent  command  starting  with
+              _s_t_r_i_n_g.
+       !!??_s_t_r_i_n_g[[??]]
+              Refer to the most recent command containing _s_t_r_i_n_g.
+              The trailing ?? may be omitted if _s_t_r_i_n_g is followed
+              immediately by a newline.
+       ^^_s_t_r_i_n_g_1^^_s_t_r_i_n_g_2^^
+              Quick   substitution.   Repeat  the  last  command,
+              replacing  _s_t_r_i_n_g_1  with  _s_t_r_i_n_g_2.   Equivalent  to
+              ``!!:s/_s_t_r_i_n_g_1/_s_t_r_i_n_g_2/'' (see MMooddiiffiieerrss below).
+       !!##     The entire command line typed so far.
+
+   WWoorrdd DDeessiiggnnaattoorrss
+       Word designators are used to select desired words from the
+       event.  A :: separates the  event  specification  from  the
+       word designator.  It may be omitted if the word designator
+       begins with a ^^, $$, **, --, or %%.  Words are  numbered  from
+       the  beginning  of  the  line,  with  the first word being
+       denoted by 0 (zero).  Words are inserted into the  current
+       line separated by single spaces.
+
+       00 ((zzeerroo))
+              The  zeroth  word.  For the shell, this is the com-
+              mand word.
+       _n      The _nth word.
+       ^^      The first argument.  That is, word 1.
+       $$      The last argument.
+       %%      The word matched  by  the  most  recent  `?_s_t_r_i_n_g?'
+              search.
+       _x--_y    A range of words; `-_y' abbreviates `0-_y'.
+       **      All of the words but the zeroth.  This is a synonym
+              for `_1_-_$'.  It is not an error to use ** if there is
+              just  one  word  in  the event; the empty string is
+              returned in that case.
+       xx**     Abbreviates _x_-_$.
+       xx--     Abbreviates _x_-_$ like xx**, but omits the last word.
+
+       If a word designator is supplied without an event specifi-
+       cation, the previous command is used as the event.
+
+   MMooddiiffiieerrss
+       After  the  optional  word  designator, there may appear a
+       sequence of one or more of the following  modifiers,  each
+       preceded by a `:'.
+
+       hh      Remove a trailing file name component, leaving only
+              the head.
+       tt      Remove all leading file  name  components,  leaving
+              the tail.
+       rr      Remove  a trailing suffix of the form _._x_x_x, leaving
+              the basename.
+       ee      Remove all but the trailing suffix.
+       pp      Print the new command but do not execute it.
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        2
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       qq      Quote the substituted words, escaping further  sub-
+              stitutions.
+       xx      Quote  the  substituted  words as with qq, but break
+              into words at bbllaannkkss and newlines.
+       ss//_o_l_d//_n_e_w//
+              Substitute _n_e_w for the first occurrence of  _o_l_d  in
+              the event line.  Any delimiter can be used in place
+              of /.  The final delimiter is optional if it is the
+              last  character  of  the event line.  The delimiter
+              may be quoted in _o_l_d and _n_e_w with  a  single  back-
+              slash.  If & appears in _n_e_w, it is replaced by _o_l_d.
+              A single backslash will quote the  &.   If  _o_l_d  is
+              null, it is set to the last _o_l_d substituted, or, if
+              no previous history substitutions took  place,  the
+              last _s_t_r_i_n_g in a !!??_s_t_r_i_n_g[[??]]  search.
+       &&      Repeat the previous substitution.
+       gg      Cause  changes  to be applied over the entire event
+              line.  This is used in conjunction with `::ss' (e.g.,
+              `::ggss//_o_l_d//_n_e_w//')  or  `::&&'.   If used with `::ss', any
+              delimiter can be used in place of /, and the  final
+              delimiter  is  optional if it is the last character
+              of the event line.
+
+PPRROOGGRRAAMMMMIINNGG WWIITTHH HHIISSTTOORRYY FFUUNNCCTTIIOONNSS
+       This section describes how to use the History  library  in
+       other programs.
+
+   IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo HHiissttoorryy
+       The  programmer  using  the  History library has available
+       functions for remembering lines on a history list, associ-
+       ating  arbitrary data with a line, removing lines from the
+       list, searching through the list for a line containing  an
+       arbitrary  text  string,  and  referencing any line in the
+       list directly.  In addition, a history _e_x_p_a_n_s_i_o_n  function
+       is  available  which provides for a consistent user inter-
+       face across different programs.
+
+       The user using programs written with the  History  library
+       has  the benefit of a consistent user interface with a set
+       of well-known commands for manipulating the text of previ-
+       ous  lines and using that text in new commands.  The basic
+       history manipulation commands are identical to the history
+       substitution provided by bbaasshh.
+
+       If  the  programmer  desires,  he  can  use  the  Readline
+       library,  which  includes  some  history  manipulation  by
+       default, and has the added advantage of command line edit-
+       ing.
+
+       Before declaring any functions using any functionality the
+       History  library  provides  in  other code, an application
+       writer should include the file _<_r_e_a_d_l_i_n_e_/_h_i_s_t_o_r_y_._h_> in any
+       file  that  uses  the History library's features.  It sup-
+       plies extern declarations for all of the library's  public
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        3
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       functions  and  variables,  and declares all of the public
+       data structures.
+
+
+   HHiissttoorryy SSttoorraaggee
+       The history list is an array of history entries.   A  his-
+       tory entry is declared as follows:
+
+       _t_y_p_e_d_e_f _v_o_i_d _* hhiissttddaattaa__tt;;
+
+       typedef struct _hist_entry {
+         char *line;
+         histdata_t data;
+       } HIST_ENTRY;
+
+       The history list itself might therefore be declared as
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _*_* tthhee__hhiissttoorryy__lliisstt;;
+
+       The  state  of  the History library is encapsulated into a
+       single structure:
+
+       /*
+        * A structure used to pass around the current state of the history.
+        */
+       typedef struct _hist_state {
+         HIST_ENTRY **entries; /* Pointer to the entries themselves. */
+         int offset;           /* The location pointer within this array. */
+         int length;           /* Number of elements within this array. */
+         int size;             /* Number of slots allocated to this array. */
+         int flags;
+       } HISTORY_STATE;
+
+       If the flags member includes HHSS__SSTTIIFFLLEEDD, the  history  has
+       been stifled.
+
+HHiissttoorryy FFuunnccttiioonnss
+       This  section describes the calling sequence for the vari-
+       ous functions exported by the GNU History library.
+
+   IInniittiiaalliizziinngg HHiissttoorryy aanndd SSttaattee MMaannaaggeemmeenntt
+       This section describes functions used  to  initialize  and
+       manage  the  state of the History library when you want to
+       use the history functions in your program.
+
+       _v_o_i_d uussiinngg__hhiissttoorryy (_v_o_i_d)
+       Begin a session in which the history  functions  might  be
+       used.  This initializes the interactive variables.
+
+       _H_I_S_T_O_R_Y___S_T_A_T_E _* hhiissttoorryy__ggeett__hhiissttoorryy__ssttaattee (_v_o_i_d)
+       Return  a  structure  describing  the current state of the
+       input history.
+
+       _v_o_i_d hhiissttoorryy__sseett__hhiissttoorryy__ssttaattee (_H_I_S_T_O_R_Y___S_T_A_T_E _*_s_t_a_t_e)
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        4
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       Set the state of the history list according to _s_t_a_t_e.
+
+
+   HHiissttoorryy LLiisstt MMaannaaggeemmeenntt
+       These functions manage individual entries on  the  history
+       list, or set parameters managing the list itself.
+
+       _v_o_i_d aadddd__hhiissttoorryy (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_s_t_r_i_n_g)
+       Place  _s_t_r_i_n_g at the end of the history list.  The associ-
+       ated data field (if any) is set to NNUULLLL.
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _* rreemmoovvee__hhiissttoorryy (_i_n_t _w_h_i_c_h)
+       Remove history entry at offset  _w_h_i_c_h  from  the  history.
+       The  removed element is returned so you can free the line,
+       data, and containing structure.
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _* rreeppllaaccee__hhiissttoorryy__eennttrryy (_i_n_t _w_h_i_c_h_, _c_o_n_s_t  _c_h_a_r
+       _*_l_i_n_e_, _h_i_s_t_d_a_t_a___t _d_a_t_a)
+       Make the history entry at offset _w_h_i_c_h have _l_i_n_e and _d_a_t_a.
+       This returns the old entry so you can dispose of the data.
+       In  the  case  of  an  invalid  _w_h_i_c_h,  a  NNUULLLL pointer is
+       returned.
+
+       _v_o_i_d cclleeaarr__hhiissttoorryy (_v_o_i_d)
+       Clear the history list by deleting all the entries.
+
+       _v_o_i_d ssttiiffllee__hhiissttoorryy (_i_n_t _m_a_x)
+       Stifle the history list, remembering  only  the  last  _m_a_x
+       entries.
+
+       _i_n_t uunnssttiiffllee__hhiissttoorryy (_v_o_i_d)
+       Stop  stifling  the history.  This returns the previously-
+       set maximum number of history  entries  (as  set  by  ssttii--
+       ffllee__hhiissttoorryy(())).   history was stifled.  The value is posi-
+       tive if the history was stifled, negative if it wasn't.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__iiss__ssttiifflleedd (_v_o_i_d)
+       Returns non-zero if the history is stifled, zero if it  is
+       not.
+
+
+   IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn AAbboouutt tthhee HHiissttoorryy LLiisstt
+       These  functions  return information about the entire his-
+       tory list or individual list entries.
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _*_* hhiissttoorryy__lliisstt (_v_o_i_d)
+       Return a NNUULLLL terminated array of _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y  _*  which  is
+       the  current input history.  Element 0 of this list is the
+       beginning of time.  If there is no history, return NNUULLLL.
+
+       _i_n_t wwhheerree__hhiissttoorryy (_v_o_i_d)
+       Returns the offset of the current history element.
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _* ccuurrrreenntt__hhiissttoorryy (_v_o_i_d)
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        5
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       Return the history  entry  at  the  current  position,  as
+       determined  by  wwhheerree__hhiissttoorryy(()).   If  there  is  no entry
+       there, return a NNUULLLL pointer.
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _* hhiissttoorryy__ggeett (_i_n_t _o_f_f_s_e_t)
+       Return the history entry at position _o_f_f_s_e_t, starting from
+       hhiissttoorryy__bbaassee.  If there is no entry there, or if _o_f_f_s_e_t is
+       greater than the history length, return a NNUULLLL pointer.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__ttoottaall__bbyytteess (_v_o_i_d)
+       Return the  number  of  bytes  that  the  primary  history
+       entries  are  using.  This function returns the sum of the
+       lengths of all the lines in the history.
+
+
+   MMoovviinngg AArroouunndd tthhee HHiissttoorryy LLiisstt
+       These functions allow the current index into  the  history
+       list to be set or changed.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__sseett__ppooss (_i_n_t _p_o_s)
+       Set  the  current history offset to _p_o_s, an absolute index
+       into the list.  Returns 1 on success, 0  if  _p_o_s  is  less
+       than zero or greater than the number of history entries.
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _* pprreevviioouuss__hhiissttoorryy (_v_o_i_d)
+       Back up the current history offset to the previous history
+       entry, and return a pointer to that entry.  If there is no
+       previous entry, return a NNUULLLL pointer.
+
+       _H_I_S_T___E_N_T_R_Y _* nneexxtt__hhiissttoorryy (_v_o_i_d)
+       Move  the  current history offset forward to the next his-
+       tory entry, and return the a pointer to  that  entry.   If
+       there is no next entry, return a NNUULLLL pointer.
+
+
+   SSeeaarrcchhiinngg tthhee HHiissttoorryy LLiisstt
+       These  functions  allow  searching of the history list for
+       entries containing a specific string.   Searching  may  be
+       performed  both forward and backward from the current his-
+       tory position.  The search may be _a_n_c_h_o_r_e_d,  meaning  that
+       the  string  must  match  at  the beginning of the history
+       entry.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__sseeaarrcchh (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_s_t_r_i_n_g_, _i_n_t _d_i_r_e_c_t_i_o_n)
+       Search the history for _s_t_r_i_n_g,  starting  at  the  current
+       history  offset.   If  _d_i_r_e_c_t_i_o_n  is less than 0, then the
+       search is through previous entries, otherwise through sub-
+       sequent  entries.   If  _s_t_r_i_n_g  is found, then the current
+       history index is set to that history entry, and the  value
+       returned  is  the  offset  in  the line of the entry where
+       _s_t_r_i_n_g was found.  Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1
+       is returned.
+
+       _i_n_t   hhiissttoorryy__sseeaarrcchh__pprreeffiixx   (_c_o_n_s_t   _c_h_a_r  _*_s_t_r_i_n_g_,  _i_n_t
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        6
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       _d_i_r_e_c_t_i_o_n)
+       Search the history for _s_t_r_i_n_g,  starting  at  the  current
+       history  offset.   The  search is anchored: matching lines
+       must begin with _s_t_r_i_n_g.  If _d_i_r_e_c_t_i_o_n is less than 0, then
+       the  search is through previous entries, otherwise through
+       subsequent entries.  If _s_t_r_i_n_g is found, then the  current
+       history  index  is set to that entry, and the return value
+       is  0.   Otherwise,  nothing  is  changed,  and  a  -1  is
+       returned.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__sseeaarrcchh__ppooss (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_s_t_r_i_n_g_, _i_n_t _d_i_r_e_c_t_i_o_n_,
+       _i_n_t _p_o_s)
+       Search for _s_t_r_i_n_g in the history list, starting at _p_o_s, an
+       absolute  index  into the list.  If _d_i_r_e_c_t_i_o_n is negative,
+       the search proceeds backward from _p_o_s, otherwise  forward.
+       Returns  the  absolute  index of the history element where
+       _s_t_r_i_n_g was found, or -1 otherwise.
+
+
+   MMaannaaggiinngg tthhee HHiissttoorryy FFiillee
+       The History library can read the history from and write it
+       to  a file.  This section documents the functions for man-
+       aging a history file.
+
+       _i_n_t rreeaadd__hhiissttoorryy (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e)
+       Add the contents of _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e to the history list,  a  line
+       at  a  time.   If _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e is NNUULLLL, then read from _~_/_._h_i_s_-
+       _t_o_r_y.  Returns 0 if successful, or eerrrrnnoo if not.
+
+       _i_n_t rreeaadd__hhiissttoorryy__rraannggee (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r  _*_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e_,  _i_n_t  _f_r_o_m_,
+       _i_n_t _t_o)
+       Read  a  range  of lines from _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e, adding them to the
+       history list.  Start reading at line _f_r_o_m and end  at  _t_o.
+       If  _f_r_o_m  is  zero, start at the beginning.  If _t_o is less
+       than _f_r_o_m, then read until the end of the file.  If  _f_i_l_e_-
+       _n_a_m_e  is  NNUULLLL,  then  read from _~_/_._h_i_s_t_o_r_y.  Returns 0 if
+       successful, or eerrrrnnoo if not.
+
+       _i_n_t wwrriittee__hhiissttoorryy (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e)
+       Write the current history to _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e,  overwriting  _f_i_l_e_-
+       _n_a_m_e  if  necessary.   If _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e is NNUULLLL, then write the
+       history list to _~_/_._h_i_s_t_o_r_y.   Returns  0  on  success,  or
+       eerrrrnnoo on a read or write error.
+
+
+       _i_n_t aappppeenndd__hhiissttoorryy (_i_n_t _n_e_l_e_m_e_n_t_s_, _c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e)
+       Append the last _n_e_l_e_m_e_n_t_s of the history list to _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e.
+       If _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e is NNUULLLL, then append to _~_/_._h_i_s_t_o_r_y.  Returns 0
+       on success, or eerrrrnnoo on a read or write error.
+
+       _i_n_t   hhiissttoorryy__ttrruunnccaattee__ffiillee  (_c_o_n_s_t  _c_h_a_r  _*_f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e_,  _i_n_t
+       _n_l_i_n_e_s)
+       Truncate the history file _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e, leaving only the  last
+       _n_l_i_n_e_s  lines.   If  _f_i_l_e_n_a_m_e  is NNUULLLL, then _~_/_._h_i_s_t_o_r_y is
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        7
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       truncated.  Returns 0 on success, or eerrrrnnoo on failure.
+
+
+   HHiissttoorryy EExxppaannssiioonn
+       These functions implement history expansion.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__eexxppaanndd (_c_h_a_r _*_s_t_r_i_n_g_, _c_h_a_r _*_*_o_u_t_p_u_t)
+       Expand _s_t_r_i_n_g, placing the result into _o_u_t_p_u_t,  a  pointer
+       to a string.  Returns:
+              0      If no expansions took place (or, if the only
+                     change in the text was the removal of escape
+                     characters  preceding  the history expansion
+                     character);
+              1      if expansions did take place;
+              -1     if there was an error in expansion;
+              2      if the returned line  should  be  displayed,
+                     but not executed, as with the ::pp modifier.
+       If  an  error ocurred in expansion, then _o_u_t_p_u_t contains a
+       descriptive error message.
+
+       _c_h_a_r _* ggeett__hhiissttoorryy__eevveenntt (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_s_t_r_i_n_g_, _i_n_t _*_c_i_n_d_e_x_,
+       _i_n_t _q_c_h_a_r)
+       Returns  the text of the history event beginning at _s_t_r_i_n_g
+       + _*_c_i_n_d_e_x.  _*_c_i_n_d_e_x is modified  to  point  to  after  the
+       event  specifier.  At function entry, _c_i_n_d_e_x points to the
+       index into _s_t_r_i_n_g where the  history  event  specification
+       begins.   _q_c_h_a_r  is a character that is allowed to end the
+       event specification in addition to the  ``normal''  termi-
+       nating characters.
+
+       _c_h_a_r _*_* hhiissttoorryy__ttookkeenniizzee (_c_o_n_s_t _c_h_a_r _*_s_t_r_i_n_g)
+       Return  an  array  of tokens parsed out of _s_t_r_i_n_g, much as
+       the shell might.  The tokens are split on  the  characters
+       in the hhiissttoorryy__wwoorrdd__ddeelliimmiitteerrss variable, and shell quoting
+       conventions are obeyed.
+
+       _c_h_a_r _* hhiissttoorryy__aarrgg__eexxttrraacctt (_i_n_t  _f_i_r_s_t_,  _i_n_t  _l_a_s_t_,  _c_o_n_s_t
+       _c_h_a_r _*_s_t_r_i_n_g)
+       Extract  a  string segment consisting of the _f_i_r_s_t through
+       _l_a_s_t arguments present in  _s_t_r_i_n_g.   Arguments  are  split
+       using hhiissttoorryy__ttookkeenniizzee(()).
+
+
+   HHiissttoorryy VVaarriiaabblleess
+       This  section  describes  the externally-visible variables
+       exported by the GNU History Library.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__bbaassee
+       The logical offset of the first entry in the history list.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__lleennggtthh
+       The  number  of  entries  currently  stored in the history
+       list.
+
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        8
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__mmaaxx__eennttrriieess
+       The maximum number  of  history  entries.   This  must  be
+       changed using ssttiiffllee__hhiissttoorryy(()).
+
+       _c_h_a_r hhiissttoorryy__eexxppaannssiioonn__cchhaarr
+       The  character  that  introduces  a  history  event.   The
+       default is !!.  Setting this to 0 inhibits  history  expan-
+       sion.
+
+       _c_h_a_r hhiissttoorryy__ssuubbsstt__cchhaarr
+       The  character  that invokes word substitution if found at
+       the start of a line.  The default is ^^.
+
+       _c_h_a_r hhiissttoorryy__ccoommmmeenntt__cchhaarr
+       During tokenization, if this  character  is  seen  as  the
+       first  character  of  a  word,  then it and all subsequent
+       characters up to a newline are ignored,  suppressing  his-
+       tory  expansion  for  the  remainder of the line.  This is
+       disabled by default.
+
+       _c_h_a_r _* hhiissttoorryy__wwoorrdd__ddeelliimmiitteerrss
+       The  characters  that  separate  tokens  for  hhiissttoorryy__ttookk--
+       eenniizzee(()).  The default value is "" \\tt\\nn(())<<>>;;&&||"".
+
+       _c_h_a_r _* hhiissttoorryy__nnoo__eexxppaanndd__cchhaarrss
+       The  list of characters which inhibit history expansion if
+       found immediately following  hhiissttoorryy__eexxppaannssiioonn__cchhaarr.   The
+       default is space, tab, newline, \\rr, and ==.
+
+       _c_h_a_r _* hhiissttoorryy__sseeaarrcchh__ddeelliimmiitteerr__cchhaarrss
+       The list of additional characters which can delimit a his-
+       tory search string, in addition to space, tab, _: and _?  in
+       the case of a substring search.  The default is empty.
+
+       _i_n_t hhiissttoorryy__qquuootteess__iinnhhiibbiitt__eexxppaannssiioonn
+       If  non-zero,  single-quoted words are not scanned for the
+       history expansion character.  The default value is 0.
+
+       _r_l___l_i_n_e_b_u_f___f_u_n_c___t _* hhiissttoorryy__iinnhhiibbiitt__eexxppaannssiioonn__ffuunnccttiioonn
+       This should be set to the address of a function that takes
+       two  arguments:  a  cchhaarr  ** (_s_t_r_i_n_g) and an iinntt index into
+       that string (_i).  It should return a non-zero value if the
+       history expansion starting at _s_t_r_i_n_g_[_i_] should not be per-
+       formed; zero if the  expansion  should  be  done.   It  is
+       intended  for  use  by applications like bbaasshh that use the
+       history expansion character for additional  purposes.   By
+       default, this variable is set to NNUULLLL.
+
+FFIILLEESS
+       _~_/_._h_i_s_t_o_r_y
+              Default filename for reading and writing saved his-
+              tory
+
+
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                        9
+
+
+
+
+
+HISTORY(3)                                             HISTORY(3)
+
+
+SSEEEE AALLSSOO
+       _T_h_e _G_n_u _R_e_a_d_l_i_n_e _L_i_b_r_a_r_y, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
+       _T_h_e _G_n_u _H_i_s_t_o_r_y _L_i_b_r_a_r_y, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
+       _b_a_s_h(1)
+       _r_e_a_d_l_i_n_e(3)
+
+AAUUTTHHOORRSS
+       Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation
+       bfox@gnu.org
+
+       Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University
+       chet@ins.CWRU.Edu
+
+BBUUGG RREEPPOORRTTSS
+       If you find a bug  in  the  hhiissttoorryy  library,  you  should
+       report it.  But first, you should make sure that it really
+       is a bug, and that it appears in the latest version of the
+       hhiissttoorryy library that you have.
+
+       Once  you have determined that a bug actually exists, mail
+       a bug report to _b_u_g_-_r_e_a_d_l_i_n_e@_g_n_u_._o_r_g.  If you have a  fix,
+       you  are  welcome  to  mail that as well!  Suggestions and
+       `philosophical' bug reports may  be  mailed  to  _b_u_g_-_r_e_a_d_-
+       _l_i_n_e@_g_n_u_._o_r_g   or   posted   to   the   Usenet   newsgroup
+       ggnnuu..bbaasshh..bbuugg.
+
+       Comments and  bug  reports  concerning  this  manual  page
+       should be directed to _c_h_e_t_@_i_n_s_._C_W_R_U_._E_d_u.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GNU History 4.3          2002 January 31                       10
+
+
diff --git a/readline/doc/history.3 b/readline/doc/history.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed0cb9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/readline/doc/history.3
@@ -0,0 +1,640 @@
+.\"
+.\" MAN PAGE COMMENTS to
+.\"
+.\"	Chet Ramey
+.\"	Information Network Services
+.\"	Case Western Reserve University
+.\"	chet@ins.CWRU.Edu
+.\"
+.\"	Last Change: Thu Jan 31 16:08:07 EST 2002
+.\"
+.TH HISTORY 3 "2002 January 31" "GNU History 4.3"
+.\"
+.\" File Name macro.  This used to be `.PN', for Path Name,
+.\" but Sun doesn't seem to like that very much.
+.\"
+.de FN
+\fI\|\\$1\|\fP
+..
+.ds lp \fR\|(\fP
+.ds rp \fR\|)\fP
+.\" FnN return-value fun-name N arguments
+.de Fn1
+\fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3\fP\\*(rp
+.br
+..
+.de Fn2
+.if t \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3,\|\\$4\fP\\*(rp
+.if n \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3, \\$4\fP\\*(rp
+.br
+..
+.de Fn3
+.if t \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3,\|\\$4,\|\\$5\fP\|\\*(rp
+.if n \fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP \\*(lp\fI\\$3, \\$4, \\$5\fP\\*(rp
+.br
+..
+.de Vb
+\fI\\$1\fP \fB\\$2\fP
+.br
+..
+.SH NAME
+history \- GNU History Library
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.if t The GNU History Library is Copyright \(co 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.if n The GNU History Library is Copyright (C) 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Many programs read input from the user a line at a time.  The GNU
+History library is able to keep track of those lines, associate arbitrary
+data with each line, and utilize information from previous lines in
+composing new ones. 
+.PP
+.SH "HISTORY EXPANSION"
+.PP
+The history library supports a history expansion feature that
+is identical to the history expansion in
+.BR bash.
+This section describes what syntax features are available.
+.PP
+History expansions introduce words from the history list into
+the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the
+arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or
+fix errors in previous commands quickly.
+.PP
+History expansion is usually performed immediately after a complete line
+is read.
+It takes place in two parts.
+The first is to determine which line from the history list
+to use during substitution.
+The second is to select portions of that line for inclusion into
+the current one.
+The line selected from the history is the \fIevent\fP,
+and the portions of that line that are acted upon are \fIwords\fP.
+Various \fImodifiers\fP are available to manipulate the selected words.
+The line is broken into words in the same fashion as \fBbash\fP
+does when reading input,
+so that several words that would otherwise be separated 
+are considered one word when surrounded by quotes (see the
+description of \fBhistory_tokenize()\fP below).
+History expansions are introduced by the appearance of the
+history expansion character, which is \^\fB!\fP\^ by default.
+Only backslash (\^\fB\e\fP\^) and single quotes can quote
+the history expansion character.
+.SS Event Designators
+.PP
+An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the
+history list.
+.PP
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.B !
+Start a history substitution, except when followed by a
+.BR blank ,
+newline, = or (.
+.TP
+.B !\fIn\fR
+Refer to command line
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.B !\-\fIn\fR
+Refer to the current command line minus
+.IR n .
+.TP
+.B !!
+Refer to the previous command.  This is a synonym for `!\-1'.
+.TP
+.B !\fIstring\fR
+Refer to the most recent command starting with 
+.IR string .
+.TP
+.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
+Refer to the most recent command containing
+.IR string .
+The trailing \fB?\fP may be omitted if
+.I string
+is followed immediately by a newline.
+.TP
+.B \d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring1\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring2\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u
+Quick substitution.  Repeat the last command, replacing
+.I string1
+with
+.IR string2 .
+Equivalent to
+``!!:s/\fIstring1\fP/\fIstring2\fP/''
+(see \fBModifiers\fP below).
+.TP
+.B !#
+The entire command line typed so far.
+.PD
+.SS Word Designators
+.PP
+Word designators are used to select desired words from the event.
+A 
+.B :
+separates the event specification from the word designator.
+It may be omitted if the word designator begins with a
+.BR ^ ,
+.BR $ ,
+.BR * ,
+.BR \- ,
+or
+.BR % .
+Words are numbered from the beginning of the line,
+with the first word being denoted by 0 (zero).
+Words are inserted into the current line separated by single spaces.
+.PP
+.PD 0
+.TP
+.B 0 (zero)
+The zeroth word.  For the shell, this is the command
+word.
+.TP
+.I n
+The \fIn\fRth word.
+.TP
+.B ^
+The first argument.  That is, word 1.
+.TP
+.B $
+The last argument.
+.TP
+.B %
+The word matched by the most recent `?\fIstring\fR?' search.
+.TP
+.I x\fB\-\fPy
+A range of words; `\-\fIy\fR' abbreviates `0\-\fIy\fR'.
+.TP
+.B *
+All of the words but the zeroth.  This is a synonym
+for `\fI1\-$\fP'.  It is not an error to use
+.B *
+if there is just one
+word in the event; the empty string is returned in that case.
+.TP
+.B x*
+Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP.
+.TP
+.B x\-
+Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP like \fBx*\fP, but omits the last word.
+.PD
+.PP
+If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the
+previous command is used as the event.
+.SS Modifiers
+.PP
+After the optional word designator, there may appear a sequence of
+one or more of the following modifiers, each preceded by a `:'.
+.PP
+.PD 0
+.PP
+.TP
+.B h
+Remove a trailing file name component, leaving only the head.
+.TP
+.B t
+Remove all leading file name components, leaving the tail.
+.TP
+.B r
+Remove a trailing suffix of the form \fI.xxx\fP, leaving the
+basename.
+.TP
+.B e
+Remove all but the trailing suffix.
+.TP
+.B p
+Print the new command but do not execute it.
+.TP
+.B q
+Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions.
+.TP
+.B x
+Quote the substituted words as with
+.BR q ,
+but break into words at
+.B blanks
+and newlines.
+.TP
+.B s/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/
+Substitute
+.I new
+for the first occurrence of
+.I old
+in the event line.  Any delimiter can be used in place of /.  The
+final delimiter is optional if it is the last character of the
+event line.  The delimiter may be quoted in
+.I old
+and
+.I new
+with a single backslash.  If & appears in
+.IR new ,
+it is replaced by
+.IR old .
+A single backslash will quote the &.  If
+.I old
+is null, it is set to the last
+.I old
+substituted, or, if no previous history substitutions took place,
+the last
+.I string
+in a
+.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
+search.
+.TP
+.B &
+Repeat the previous substitution.
+.TP
+.B g
+Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line.  This is
+used in conjunction with `\fB:s\fP' (e.g., `\fB:gs/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/\fR')
+or `\fB:&\fP'.  If used with
+`\fB:s\fP', any delimiter can be used
+in place of /, and the final delimiter is optional
+if it is the last character of the event line.
+.PD
+.SH "PROGRAMMING WITH HISTORY FUNCTIONS"
+This section describes how to use the History library in other programs.
+.SS Introduction to History
+.PP
+The programmer using the History library has available functions
+for remembering lines on a history list, associating arbitrary data
+with a line, removing lines from the list, searching through the list
+for a line containing an arbitrary text string, and referencing any line
+in the list directly.  In addition, a history \fIexpansion\fP function
+is available which provides for a consistent user interface across
+different programs.
+.PP
+The user using programs written with the History library has the
+benefit of a consistent user interface with a set of well-known
+commands for manipulating the text of previous lines and using that text
+in new commands.  The basic history manipulation commands are
+identical to
+the history substitution provided by \fBbash\fP.
+.PP
+If the programmer desires, he can use the Readline library, which
+includes some history manipulation by default, and has the added
+advantage of command line editing.
+.PP
+Before declaring any functions using any functionality the History
+library provides in other code, an application writer should include
+the file
+.FN <readline/history.h>
+in any file that uses the
+History library's features.  It supplies extern declarations for all
+of the library's public functions and variables, and declares all of
+the public data structures.
+
+.SS History Storage
+.PP
+The history list is an array of history entries.  A history entry is
+declared as follows:
+.PP
+.Vb "typedef void *" histdata_t;
+.PP
+.nf
+typedef struct _hist_entry {
+  char *line;
+  histdata_t data;
+} HIST_ENTRY;
+.fi
+.PP
+The history list itself might therefore be declared as
+.PP
+.Vb "HIST_ENTRY **" the_history_list;
+.PP
+The state of the History library is encapsulated into a single structure:
+.PP
+.nf
+/*
+ * A structure used to pass around the current state of the history.
+ */
+typedef struct _hist_state {
+  HIST_ENTRY **entries; /* Pointer to the entries themselves. */
+  int offset;           /* The location pointer within this array. */
+  int length;           /* Number of elements within this array. */
+  int size;             /* Number of slots allocated to this array. */
+  int flags;
+} HISTORY_STATE;
+.fi
+.PP
+If the flags member includes \fBHS_STIFLED\fP, the history has been
+stifled.
+.SH "History Functions"
+.PP
+This section describes the calling sequence for the various functions
+exported by the GNU History library.
+.SS Initializing History and State Management
+This section describes functions used to initialize and manage
+the state of the History library when you want to use the history
+functions in your program.
+
+.Fn1 void using_history void
+Begin a session in which the history functions might be used.  This
+initializes the interactive variables.
+
+.Fn1 "HISTORY_STATE *" history_get_history_state void
+Return a structure describing the current state of the input history.
+
+.Fn1 void history_set_history_state "HISTORY_STATE *state"
+Set the state of the history list according to \fIstate\fP.
+
+.SS History List Management
+
+These functions manage individual entries on the history list, or set
+parameters managing the list itself.
+
+.Fn1 void add_history "const char *string"
+Place \fIstring\fP at the end of the history list.  The associated data
+field (if any) is set to \fBNULL\fP.
+
+.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" remove_history "int which"
+Remove history entry at offset \fIwhich\fP from the history.  The
+removed element is returned so you can free the line, data,
+and containing structure.
+
+.Fn3 "HIST_ENTRY *" replace_history_entry "int which" "const char *line" "histdata_t data"
+Make the history entry at offset \fIwhich\fP have \fIline\fP and \fIdata\fP.
+This returns the old entry so you can dispose of the data.  In the case
+of an invalid \fIwhich\fP, a \fBNULL\fP pointer is returned.
+
+.Fn1 void clear_history "void"
+Clear the history list by deleting all the entries.
+
+.Fn1 void stifle_history "int max"
+Stifle the history list, remembering only the last \fImax\fP entries.
+
+.Fn1 int unstifle_history "void"
+Stop stifling the history.  This returns the previously-set
+maximum number of history entries (as set by \fBstifle_history()\fP).
+history was stifled.  The value is positive if the history was
+stifled, negative if it wasn't.
+
+.Fn1 int history_is_stifled "void"
+Returns non-zero if the history is stifled, zero if it is not.
+
+.SS Information About the History List
+
+These functions return information about the entire history list or
+individual list entries.
+
+.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY **" history_list "void"
+Return a \fBNULL\fP terminated array of \fIHIST_ENTRY *\fP which is the
+current input history.  Element 0 of this list is the beginning of time.
+If there is no history, return \fBNULL\fP.
+
+.Fn1 int where_history "void"
+Returns the offset of the current history element.
+
+.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" current_history "void"
+Return the history entry at the current position, as determined by
+\fBwhere_history()\fP.  If there is no entry there, return a \fBNULL\fP
+pointer.
+
+.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" history_get "int offset"
+Return the history entry at position \fIoffset\fP, starting from
+\fBhistory_base\fP.
+If there is no entry there, or if \fIoffset\fP
+is greater than the history length, return a \fBNULL\fP pointer.
+
+.Fn1 int history_total_bytes "void"
+Return the number of bytes that the primary history entries are using.
+This function returns the sum of the lengths of all the lines in the
+history.
+
+.SS Moving Around the History List
+
+These functions allow the current index into the history list to be
+set or changed.
+
+.Fn1 int history_set_pos "int pos"
+Set the current history offset to \fIpos\fP, an absolute index
+into the list.
+Returns 1 on success, 0 if \fIpos\fP is less than zero or greater
+than the number of history entries.
+
+.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" previous_history "void"
+Back up the current history offset to the previous history entry, and
+return a pointer to that entry.  If there is no previous entry, return
+a \fBNULL\fP pointer.
+
+.Fn1 "HIST_ENTRY *" next_history "void"
+Move the current history offset forward to the next history entry, and
+return the a pointer to that entry.  If there is no next entry, return
+a \fBNULL\fP pointer.
+
+.SS Searching the History List
+
+These functions allow searching of the history list for entries containing
+a specific string.  Searching may be performed both forward and backward
+from the current history position.  The search may be \fIanchored\fP,
+meaning that the string must match at the beginning of the history entry.
+
+.Fn2 int history_search "const char *string" "int direction"
+Search the history for \fIstring\fP, starting at the current history offset.
+If \fIdirection\fP is less than 0, then the search is through
+previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries.
+If \fIstring\fP is found, then
+the current history index is set to that history entry, and the value
+returned is the offset in the line of the entry where
+\fIstring\fP was found.  Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is
+returned.
+
+.Fn2 int history_search_prefix "const char *string" "int direction"
+Search the history for \fIstring\fP, starting at the current history
+offset.  The search is anchored: matching lines must begin with
+\fIstring\fP.  If \fIdirection\fP is less than 0, then the search is
+through previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries.
+If \fIstring\fP is found, then the
+current history index is set to that entry, and the return value is 0. 
+Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is returned. 
+
+.Fn3 int history_search_pos "const char *string" "int direction" "int pos"
+Search for \fIstring\fP in the history list, starting at \fIpos\fP, an
+absolute index into the list.  If \fIdirection\fP is negative, the search
+proceeds backward from \fIpos\fP, otherwise forward.  Returns the absolute
+index of the history element where \fIstring\fP was found, or -1 otherwise.
+
+.SS Managing the History File
+The History library can read the history from and write it to a file.
+This section documents the functions for managing a history file.
+
+.Fn1 int read_history "const char *filename"
+Add the contents of \fIfilename\fP to the history list, a line at a time.
+If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then read from \fI~/.history\fP.
+Returns 0 if successful, or \fBerrno\fP if not.
+
+.Fn3 int read_history_range "const char *filename" "int from" "int to"
+Read a range of lines from \fIfilename\fP, adding them to the history list.
+Start reading at line \fIfrom\fP and end at \fIto\fP.
+If \fIfrom\fP is zero, start at the beginning.  If \fIto\fP is less than
+\fIfrom\fP, then read until the end of the file.  If \fIfilename\fP is
+\fBNULL\fP, then read from \fI~/.history\fP.  Returns 0 if successful,
+or \fBerrno\fP if not.
+
+.Fn1 int write_history "const char *filename"
+Write the current history to \fIfilename\fP, overwriting \fIfilename\fP
+if necessary.
+If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then write the history list to \fI~/.history\fP.
+Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on a read or write error.
+
+
+.Fn2 int append_history "int nelements" "const char *filename"
+Append the last \fInelements\fP of the history list to \fIfilename\fP.
+If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then append to \fI~/.history\fP.
+Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on a read or write error.
+
+.Fn2 int history_truncate_file "const char *filename" "int nlines"
+Truncate the history file \fIfilename\fP, leaving only the last
+\fInlines\fP lines.
+If \fIfilename\fP is \fBNULL\fP, then \fI~/.history\fP is truncated.
+Returns 0 on success, or \fBerrno\fP on failure.
+
+.SS History Expansion
+
+These functions implement history expansion.
+
+.Fn2 int history_expand "char *string" "char **output"
+Expand \fIstring\fP, placing the result into \fIoutput\fP, a pointer
+to a string.  Returns:
+.RS
+.PD 0
+.TP
+0
+If no expansions took place (or, if the only change in
+the text was the removal of escape characters preceding the history expansion
+character);
+.TP
+1
+if expansions did take place;
+.TP
+-1
+if there was an error in expansion;
+.TP
+2
+if the returned line should be displayed, but not executed,
+as with the \fB:p\fP modifier.
+.PD
+.RE
+If an error ocurred in expansion, then \fIoutput\fP contains a descriptive
+error message.
+
+.Fn3 "char *" get_history_event "const char *string" "int *cindex" "int qchar"
+Returns the text of the history event beginning at \fIstring\fP +
+\fI*cindex\fP.  \fI*cindex\fP is modified to point to after the event
+specifier.  At function entry, \fIcindex\fP points to the index into
+\fIstring\fP where the history event specification begins.  \fIqchar\fP
+is a character that is allowed to end the event specification in addition
+to the ``normal'' terminating characters.
+
+.Fn1 "char **" history_tokenize "const char *string"
+Return an array of tokens parsed out of \fIstring\fP, much as the
+shell might.
+The tokens are split on the characters in the
+\fBhistory_word_delimiters\fP variable,
+and shell quoting conventions are obeyed.
+
+.Fn3 "char *" history_arg_extract "int first" "int last" "const char *string"
+Extract a string segment consisting of the \fIfirst\fP through \fIlast\fP
+arguments present in \fIstring\fP.  Arguments are split using
+\fBhistory_tokenize()\fP.
+
+.SS History Variables
+
+This section describes the externally-visible variables exported by
+the GNU History Library.
+
+.Vb int history_base
+The logical offset of the first entry in the history list.
+
+.Vb int history_length
+The number of entries currently stored in the history list.
+
+.Vb int history_max_entries
+The maximum number of history entries.  This must be changed using
+\fBstifle_history()\fP.
+
+.Vb char history_expansion_char
+The character that introduces a history event.  The default is \fB!\fP.
+Setting this to 0 inhibits history expansion.
+
+.Vb char history_subst_char
+The character that invokes word substitution if found at the start of
+a line.  The default is \fB^\fP.
+
+.Vb char history_comment_char
+During tokenization, if this character is seen as the first character
+of a word, then it and all subsequent characters up to a newline are
+ignored, suppressing history expansion for the remainder of the line.
+This is disabled by default.
+
+.Vb "char *" history_word_delimiters
+The characters that separate tokens for \fBhistory_tokenize()\fP.
+The default value is \fB"\ \et\en()<>;&|"\fP.
+
+.Vb "char *" history_no_expand_chars
+The list of characters which inhibit history expansion if found immediately
+following \fBhistory_expansion_char\fP.  The default is space, tab, newline,
+\fB\er\fP, and \fB=\fP.
+
+.Vb "char *" history_search_delimiter_chars
+The list of additional characters which can delimit a history search
+string, in addition to space, tab, \fI:\fP and \fI?\fP in the case of
+a substring search.  The default is empty.
+
+.Vb int history_quotes_inhibit_expansion
+If non-zero, single-quoted words are not scanned for the history expansion
+character.  The default value is 0.
+
+.Vb "rl_linebuf_func_t *" history_inhibit_expansion_function
+This should be set to the address of a function that takes two arguments:
+a \fBchar *\fP (\fIstring\fP)
+and an \fBint\fP index into that string (\fIi\fP).
+It should return a non-zero value if the history expansion starting at
+\fIstring[i]\fP should not be performed; zero if the expansion should
+be done.
+It is intended for use by applications like \fBbash\fP that use the history
+expansion character for additional purposes.
+By default, this variable is set to \fBNULL\fP.
+.SH FILES
+.PD 0 
+.TP
+.FN ~/.history
+Default filename for reading and writing saved history
+.PD
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+.PD 0
+.TP
+\fIThe Gnu Readline Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
+.TP
+\fIThe Gnu History Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
+.TP
+\fIbash\fP(1)
+.TP
+\fIreadline\fP(3)
+.PD
+.SH AUTHORS
+Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation
+.br
+bfox@gnu.org
+.PP
+Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University
+.br
+chet@ins.CWRU.Edu
+.SH BUG REPORTS
+If you find a bug in the
+.B history
+library, you should report it.  But first, you should
+make sure that it really is a bug, and that it appears in the latest
+version of the
+.B history
+library that you have.
+.PP
+Once you have determined that a bug actually exists, mail a
+bug report to \fIbug\-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP.
+If you have a fix, you are welcome to mail that
+as well!  Suggestions and `philosophical' bug reports may be mailed
+to \fPbug-readline\fP@\fIgnu.org\fP or posted to the Usenet
+newsgroup
+.BR gnu.bash.bug .
+.PP
+Comments and bug reports concerning
+this manual page should be directed to
+.IR chet@ins.CWRU.Edu .
diff --git a/readline/doc/hstech.texinfo b/readline/doc/hstech.texinfo
index 12fff2c..9494446 100644
--- a/readline/doc/hstech.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/hstech.texinfo
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 @ignore
 This file documents the user interface to the GNU History library.
 
-Copyright (C) 1988, 1991, 1994, 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 Authored by Brian Fox and Chet Ramey.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual
@@ -27,9 +27,9 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
 @chapter Programming with GNU History
 
 This chapter describes how to interface programs that you write
-with the GNU History Library.
+with the @sc{gnu} History Library.
 It should be considered a technical guide.
-For information on the interactive use of GNU History, @pxref{Using
+For information on the interactive use of @sc{gnu} History, @pxref{Using
 History Interactively}.
 
 @menu
@@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ History Interactively}.
 @node Introduction to History
 @section Introduction to History
 
-Many programs read input from the user a line at a time.  The GNU History
-library is able to keep track of those lines, associate arbitrary data with
-each line, and utilize information from previous lines in composing new
-ones.
+Many programs read input from the user a line at a time.  The @sc{gnu}
+History library is able to keep track of those lines, associate arbitrary
+data with each line, and utilize information from previous lines in
+composing new ones. 
 
 The programmer using the History library has available functions
 for remembering lines on a history list, associating arbitrary data
@@ -80,9 +80,11 @@ The history list is an array of history entries.  A history entry is
 declared as follows:
 
 @example
+typedef void *histdata_t;
+
 typedef struct _hist_entry @{
   char *line;
-  char *data;
+  histdata_t data;
 @} HIST_ENTRY;
 @end example
 
@@ -95,12 +97,14 @@ HIST_ENTRY **the_history_list;
 The state of the History library is encapsulated into a single structure:
 
 @example
-/* A structure used to pass the current state of the history stuff around. */
+/*
+ * A structure used to pass around the current state of the history.
+ */
 typedef struct _hist_state @{
-  HIST_ENTRY **entries;         /* Pointer to the entries themselves. */
-  int offset;                   /* The location pointer within this array. */
-  int length;                   /* Number of elements within this array. */
-  int size;                     /* Number of slots allocated to this array. */
+  HIST_ENTRY **entries; /* Pointer to the entries themselves. */
+  int offset;           /* The location pointer within this array. */
+  int length;           /* Number of elements within this array. */
+  int size;             /* Number of slots allocated to this array. */
   int flags;
 @} HISTORY_STATE;
 @end example
@@ -112,7 +116,7 @@ stifled.
 @section History Functions
 
 This section describes the calling sequence for the various functions
-present in GNU History.
+exported by the @sc{gnu} History library.
 
 @menu
 * Initializing History and State Management::	Functions to call when you
@@ -139,12 +143,12 @@ This section describes functions used to initialize and manage
 the state of the History library when you want to use the history
 functions in your program.
 
-@deftypefun void using_history ()
+@deftypefun void using_history (void)
 Begin a session in which the history functions might be used.  This
 initializes the interactive variables.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {HISTORY_STATE *} history_get_history_state ()
+@deftypefun {HISTORY_STATE *} history_get_history_state (void)
 Return a structure describing the current state of the input history.
 @end deftypefun
 
@@ -158,7 +162,7 @@ Set the state of the history list according to @var{state}.
 These functions manage individual entries on the history list, or set
 parameters managing the list itself.
 
-@deftypefun void add_history (char *string)
+@deftypefun void add_history (const char *string)
 Place @var{string} at the end of the history list.  The associated data
 field (if any) is set to @code{NULL}.
 @end deftypefun
@@ -169,13 +173,13 @@ removed element is returned so you can free the line, data,
 and containing structure.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} replace_history_entry (int which, char *line, char *data)
+@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} replace_history_entry (int which, const char *line, histdata_t data)
 Make the history entry at offset @var{which} have @var{line} and @var{data}.
 This returns the old entry so you can dispose of the data.  In the case
 of an invalid @var{which}, a @code{NULL} pointer is returned.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun void clear_history ()
+@deftypefun void clear_history (void)
 Clear the history list by deleting all the entries.
 @end deftypefun
 
@@ -183,13 +187,14 @@ Clear the history list by deleting all the entries.
 Stifle the history list, remembering only the last @var{max} entries.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int unstifle_history ()
-Stop stifling the history.  This returns the previous amount the
-history was stifled.  The value is positive if the history was
+@deftypefun int unstifle_history (void)
+Stop stifling the history.  This returns the previously-set
+maximum number of history entries (as set by @code{stifle_history()}).
+The value is positive if the history was
 stifled, negative if it wasn't.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int history_is_stifled ()
+@deftypefun int history_is_stifled (void)
 Returns non-zero if the history is stifled, zero if it is not.
 @end deftypefun
 
@@ -199,29 +204,30 @@ Returns non-zero if the history is stifled, zero if it is not.
 These functions return information about the entire history list or
 individual list entries.
 
-@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY **} history_list ()
-Return a @code{NULL} terminated array of @code{HIST_ENTRY} which is the
+@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY **} history_list (void)
+Return a @code{NULL} terminated array of @code{HIST_ENTRY *} which is the
 current input history.  Element 0 of this list is the beginning of time.
 If there is no history, return @code{NULL}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int where_history ()
+@deftypefun int where_history (void)
 Returns the offset of the current history element.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} current_history ()
+@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} current_history (void)
 Return the history entry at the current position, as determined by
-@code{where_history ()}.  If there is no entry there, return a @code{NULL}
+@code{where_history()}.  If there is no entry there, return a @code{NULL}
 pointer.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} history_get (int offset)
 Return the history entry at position @var{offset}, starting from
-@code{history_base}.  If there is no entry there, or if @var{offset}
+@code{history_base} (@pxref{History Variables}).
+If there is no entry there, or if @var{offset}
 is greater than the history length, return a @code{NULL} pointer.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int history_total_bytes ()
+@deftypefun int history_total_bytes (void)
 Return the number of bytes that the primary history entries are using.
 This function returns the sum of the lengths of all the lines in the
 history.
@@ -234,17 +240,19 @@ These functions allow the current index into the history list to be
 set or changed.
 
 @deftypefun int history_set_pos (int pos)
-Set the position in the history list to @var{pos}, an absolute index
+Set the current history offset to @var{pos}, an absolute index
 into the list.
+Returns 1 on success, 0 if @var{pos} is less than zero or greater
+than the number of history entries.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} previous_history ()
+@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} previous_history (void)
 Back up the current history offset to the previous history entry, and
 return a pointer to that entry.  If there is no previous entry, return
 a @code{NULL} pointer.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} next_history ()
+@deftypefun {HIST_ENTRY *} next_history (void)
 Move the current history offset forward to the next history entry, and
 return the a pointer to that entry.  If there is no next entry, return
 a @code{NULL} pointer.
@@ -260,26 +268,28 @@ from the current history position.  The search may be @dfn{anchored},
 meaning that the string must match at the beginning of the history entry.
 @cindex anchored search
 
-@deftypefun int history_search (char *string, int direction)
-Search the history for @var{string}, starting at the current history
-offset.  If @var{direction} < 0, then the search is through previous entries,
-else through subsequent.  If @var{string} is found, then
+@deftypefun int history_search (const char *string, int direction)
+Search the history for @var{string}, starting at the current history offset.
+If @var{direction} is less than 0, then the search is through
+previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries.
+If @var{string} is found, then
 the current history index is set to that history entry, and the value
 returned is the offset in the line of the entry where
 @var{string} was found.  Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is
 returned.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int history_search_prefix (char *string, int direction)
+@deftypefun int history_search_prefix (const char *string, int direction)
 Search the history for @var{string}, starting at the current history
 offset.  The search is anchored: matching lines must begin with
-@var{string}.  If @var{direction} < 0, then the search is through previous
-entries, else through subsequent.  If @var{string} is found, then the
+@var{string}.  If @var{direction} is less than 0, then the search is
+through previous entries, otherwise through subsequent entries.
+If @var{string} is found, then the
 current history index is set to that entry, and the return value is 0. 
 Otherwise, nothing is changed, and a -1 is returned. 
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int history_search_pos (char *string, int direction, int pos)
+@deftypefun int history_search_pos (const char *string, int direction, int pos)
 Search for @var{string} in the history list, starting at @var{pos}, an
 absolute index into the list.  If @var{direction} is negative, the search
 proceeds backward from @var{pos}, otherwise forward.  Returns the absolute
@@ -292,41 +302,46 @@ index of the history element where @var{string} was found, or -1 otherwise.
 The History library can read the history from and write it to a file.
 This section documents the functions for managing a history file.
 
-@deftypefun int read_history (char *filename)
-Add the contents of @var{filename} to the history list, a line at a
-time.  If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then read from
-@file{~/.history}.  Returns 0 if successful, or errno if not.
+@deftypefun int read_history (const char *filename)
+Add the contents of @var{filename} to the history list, a line at a time.
+If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then read from @file{~/.history}.
+Returns 0 if successful, or @code{errno} if not.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int read_history_range (char *filename, int from, int to)
+@deftypefun int read_history_range (const char *filename, int from, int to)
 Read a range of lines from @var{filename}, adding them to the history list.
-Start reading at line @var{from} and end at @var{to}.  If
-@var{from} is zero, start at the beginning.  If @var{to} is less than
+Start reading at line @var{from} and end at @var{to}.
+If @var{from} is zero, start at the beginning.  If @var{to} is less than
 @var{from}, then read until the end of the file.  If @var{filename} is
 @code{NULL}, then read from @file{~/.history}.  Returns 0 if successful,
 or @code{errno} if not.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int write_history (char *filename)
+@deftypefun int write_history (const char *filename)
 Write the current history to @var{filename}, overwriting @var{filename}
-if necessary.  If @var{filename} is
-@code{NULL}, then write the history list to @file{~/.history}.  Values
-returned are as in @code{read_history ()}.
+if necessary.
+If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then write the history list to
+@file{~/.history}.
+Returns 0 on success, or @code{errno} on a read or write error.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int append_history (int nelements, char *filename)
+@deftypefun int append_history (int nelements, const char *filename)
 Append the last @var{nelements} of the history list to @var{filename}.
+If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then append to @file{~/.history}.
+Returns 0 on success, or @code{errno} on a read or write error.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int history_truncate_file (char *filename, int nlines)
+@deftypefun int history_truncate_file (const char *filename, int nlines)
 Truncate the history file @var{filename}, leaving only the last
 @var{nlines} lines.
+If @var{filename} is @code{NULL}, then @file{~/.history} is truncated.
+Returns 0 on success, or @code{errno} on failure.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @node History Expansion
 @subsection History Expansion
 
-These functions implement @code{csh}-like history expansion.
+These functions implement history expansion.
 
 @deftypefun int history_expand (char *string, char **output)
 Expand @var{string}, placing the result into @var{output}, a pointer
@@ -334,7 +349,7 @@ to a string (@pxref{History Interaction}).  Returns:
 @table @code
 @item 0
 If no expansions took place (or, if the only change in
-the text was the de-slashifying of the history expansion
+the text was the removal of escape characters preceding the history expansion
 character);
 @item 1
 if expansions did take place;
@@ -349,12 +364,7 @@ If an error ocurred in expansion, then @var{output} contains a descriptive
 error message.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char *} history_arg_extract (int first, int last, char *string)
-Extract a string segment consisting of the @var{first} through @var{last}
-arguments present in @var{string}.  Arguments are broken up as in Bash.
-@end deftypefun
-
-@deftypefun {char *} get_history_event (char *string, int *cindex, int qchar)
+@deftypefun {char *} get_history_event (const char *string, int *cindex, int qchar)
 Returns the text of the history event beginning at @var{string} +
 @var{*cindex}.  @var{*cindex} is modified to point to after the event
 specifier.  At function entry, @var{cindex} points to the index into
@@ -363,18 +373,24 @@ is a character that is allowed to end the event specification in addition
 to the ``normal'' terminating characters.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char **} history_tokenize (char *string)
+@deftypefun {char **} history_tokenize (const char *string)
 Return an array of tokens parsed out of @var{string}, much as the
-shell might.  The tokens are split on white space and on the
-characters @code{()<>;&|$}, and shell quoting conventions are
-obeyed.
+shell might.  The tokens are split on the characters in the
+@var{history_word_delimiters} variable,
+and shell quoting conventions are obeyed.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {char *} history_arg_extract (int first, int last, const char *string)
+Extract a string segment consisting of the @var{first} through @var{last}
+arguments present in @var{string}.  Arguments are split using
+@code{history_tokenize}.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @node History Variables
 @section History Variables
 
-This section describes the externally visible variables exported by
-the GNU History Library.
+This section describes the externally-visible variables exported by
+the @sc{gnu} History Library.
 
 @deftypevar int history_base
 The logical offset of the first entry in the history list.
@@ -384,13 +400,14 @@ The logical offset of the first entry in the history list.
 The number of entries currently stored in the history list.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar int max_input_history
+@deftypevar int history_max_entries
 The maximum number of history entries.  This must be changed using
-@code{stifle_history ()}.
+@code{stifle_history()}.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar char history_expansion_char
-The character that starts a history event.  The default is @samp{!}.
+The character that introduces a history event.  The default is @samp{!}.
+Setting this to 0 inhibits history expansion.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar char history_subst_char
@@ -405,15 +422,20 @@ ignored, suppressing history expansion for the remainder of the line.
 This is disabled by default.
 @end deftypevar
 
+@deftypevar {char *} history_word_delimiters
+The characters that separate tokens for @code{history_tokenize()}.
+The default value is @code{" \t\n()<>;&|"}.
+@end deftypevar
+
 @deftypevar {char *} history_no_expand_chars
 The list of characters which inhibit history expansion if found immediately
-following @var{history_expansion_char}.  The default is whitespace and
-@samp{=}.
+following @var{history_expansion_char}.  The default is space, tab, newline,
+carriage return, and @samp{=}.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar {char *} history_search_delimiter_chars
 The list of additional characters which can delimit a history search
-string, in addition to whitespace, @samp{:} and @samp{?} in the case of
+string, in addition to space, TAB, @samp{:} and @samp{?} in the case of
 a substring search.  The default is empty.
 @end deftypevar
 
@@ -422,24 +444,30 @@ If non-zero, single-quoted words are not scanned for the history expansion
 character.  The default value is 0.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} history_inhibit_expansion_function
+@deftypevar {rl_linebuf_func_t *} history_inhibit_expansion_function
 This should be set to the address of a function that takes two arguments:
-a @code{char *} (@var{string}) and an integer index into that string (@var{i}).
+a @code{char *} (@var{string})
+and an @code{int} index into that string (@var{i}).
 It should return a non-zero value if the history expansion starting at
 @var{string[i]} should not be performed; zero if the expansion should
 be done.
 It is intended for use by applications like Bash that use the history
 expansion character for additional purposes.
-By default, this variable is set to NULL.
+By default, this variable is set to @code{NULL}.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @node History Programming Example
 @section History Programming Example
 
-The following program demonstrates simple use of the GNU History Library.
+The following program demonstrates simple use of the @sc{gnu} History Library.
 
 @smallexample
-main ()
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <readline/history.h>
+
+main (argc, argv)
+     int argc;
+     char **argv;
 @{
   char line[1024], *t;
   int len, done = 0;
diff --git a/readline/doc/hsuser.texinfo b/readline/doc/hsuser.texinfo
index 5f75f5d..418bfa8 100644
--- a/readline/doc/hsuser.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/hsuser.texinfo
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 @ignore
 This file documents the user interface to the GNU History library.
 
-Copyright (C) 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 Authored by Brian Fox and Chet Ramey.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual
@@ -38,9 +38,9 @@ For information on using the @sc{gnu} History Library in other programs,
 see the @sc{gnu} Readline Library Manual.
 @end ifset
 @ifclear BashFeatures
-This chapter describes how to use the GNU History Library interactively,
+This chapter describes how to use the @sc{gnu} History Library interactively,
 from a user's standpoint.  It should be considered a user's guide.  For
-information on using the GNU History Library in your own programs,
+information on using the @sc{gnu} History Library in your own programs,
 @pxref{Programming with GNU History}.
 @end ifclear
 
@@ -65,36 +65,36 @@ information on using the GNU History Library in your own programs,
 @cindex command history
 @cindex history list
 
-When the @samp{-o history} option to the @code{set} builtin
+When the @option{-o history} option to the @code{set} builtin
 is enabled (@pxref{The Set Builtin}),
-the shell provides access to the @var{command history},
+the shell provides access to the @dfn{command history},
 the list of commands previously typed.
-The value of the @code{HISTSIZE} shell variable is used as the
+The value of the @env{HISTSIZE} shell variable is used as the
 number of commands to save in a history list.
-The text of the last @code{$HISTSIZE}
+The text of the last @env{$HISTSIZE}
 commands (default 500) is saved.
 The shell stores each command in the history list prior to
 parameter and variable expansion
 but after history expansion is performed, subject to the
 values of the shell variables
-@code{HISTIGNORE} and @code{HISTCONTROL}.
+@env{HISTIGNORE} and @env{HISTCONTROL}.
 
 When the shell starts up, the history is initialized from the
-file named by the @code{HISTFILE} variable (default @file{~/.bash_history}).
-The file named by the value of @code{HISTFILE} is truncated, if
+file named by the @env{HISTFILE} variable (default @file{~/.bash_history}).
+The file named by the value of @env{HISTFILE} is truncated, if
 necessary, to contain no more than the number of lines specified by
-the value of the @code{HISTFILESIZE} variable.
+the value of the @env{HISTFILESIZE} variable.
 When an interactive shell exits, the last
-@code{$HISTSIZE} lines are copied from the history list to the file
-named by @code{$HISTFILE}.
+@env{$HISTSIZE} lines are copied from the history list to the file
+named by @env{$HISTFILE}.
 If the @code{histappend} shell option is set (@pxref{Bash Builtins}),
 the lines are appended to the history file,
 otherwise the history file is overwritten.
-If @code{HISTFILE}
+If @env{HISTFILE}
 is unset, or if the history file is unwritable, the history is
 not saved.  After saving the history, the history file is truncated
-to contain no more than @code{$HISTFILESIZE}
-lines.  If @code{HISTFILESIZE} is not set, no truncation is performed.
+to contain no more than @env{$HISTFILESIZE}
+lines.  If @env{HISTFILESIZE} is not set, no truncation is performed.
 
 The builtin command @code{fc} may be used to list or edit and re-execute
 a portion of the history list.
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ are available in each editing mode that provide access to the
 history list (@pxref{Commands For History}).
 
 The shell allows control over which commands are saved on the history
-list.  The @code{HISTCONTROL} and @code{HISTIGNORE}
+list.  The @env{HISTCONTROL} and @env{HISTIGNORE}
 variables may be set to cause the shell to save only a subset of the
 commands entered.
 The @code{cmdhist}
@@ -141,15 +141,15 @@ command beginning with that string) or as a number (an index into the
 history list, where a negative number is used as an offset from the
 current command number).  If @var{last} is not specified it is set to
 @var{first}.  If @var{first} is not specified it is set to the previous
-command for editing and @minus{}16 for listing.  If the @samp{-l} flag is
-given, the commands are listed on standard output.  The @samp{-n} flag
-suppresses the command numbers when listing.  The @samp{-r} flag
+command for editing and @minus{}16 for listing.  If the @option{-l} flag is
+given, the commands are listed on standard output.  The @option{-n} flag
+suppresses the command numbers when listing.  The @option{-r} flag
 reverses the order of the listing.  Otherwise, the editor given by
 @var{ename} is invoked on a file containing those commands.  If
 @var{ename} is not given, the value of the following variable expansion
 is used: @code{$@{FCEDIT:-$@{EDITOR:-vi@}@}}.  This says to use the
-value of the @code{FCEDIT} variable if set, or the value of the
-@code{EDITOR} variable if that is set, or @code{vi} if neither is set.
+value of the @env{FCEDIT} variable if set, or the value of the
+@env{EDITOR} variable if that is set, or @code{vi} if neither is set.
 When editing is complete, the edited commands are echoed and executed.
 
 In the second form, @var{command} is re-executed after each instance
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ history -ps @var{arg}
 @end example
 
 With no options, display the history list with line numbers.
-Lines prefixed with with a @samp{*} have been modified.
+Lines prefixed with a @samp{*} have been modified.
 An argument of @var{n} lists only the last @var{n} lines.
 Options, if supplied, have the following meanings:
 
@@ -211,10 +211,10 @@ the history list as a single entry.
 
 @end table
 
-When any of the @samp{-w}, @samp{-r}, @samp{-a}, or @samp{-n} options is
+When any of the @option{-w}, @option{-r}, @option{-a}, or @option{-n} options is
 used, if @var{filename}
 is given, then it is used as the history file.  If not, then
-the value of the @code{HISTFILE} variable is used.
+the value of the @env{HISTFILE} variable is used.
 
 @end table
 @end ifset
@@ -260,9 +260,9 @@ editing buffer for further modification.
 If Readline is being used, and the @code{histreedit}
 shell option is enabled, a failed history expansion will be
 reloaded into the Readline editing buffer for correction.
-The @samp{-p} option to the @code{history} builtin command
+The @option{-p} option to the @code{history} builtin command
 may be used to see what a history expansion will do before using it.
-The @samp{-s} option to the @code{history} builtin may be used to
+The @option{-s} option to the @code{history} builtin may be used to
 add commands to the end of the history list without actually executing
 them, so that they are available for subsequent recall.
 This is most useful in conjunction with Readline.
diff --git a/readline/doc/manvers.texinfo b/readline/doc/manvers.texinfo
index 3122b6c..1206cf0 100644
--- a/readline/doc/manvers.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/manvers.texinfo
@@ -1,6 +1,10 @@
-@set EDITION 4.1
-@set VERSION 4.1
-@set UPDATED 2000 January 19
-@set UPDATE-MONTH January 2000
+@ignore
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 
+@end ignore
 
-@set LASTCHANGE Wed Jan 19 12:16:30 EST 2000
+@set EDITION 4.3
+@set VERSION 4.3
+@set UPDATED 2002 March 4
+@set UPDATE-MONTH March 2002
+
+@set LASTCHANGE Mon Mar  4 12:00:16 EST 2002
diff --git a/readline/doc/readline.3 b/readline/doc/readline.3
index c1ed9cf..afd6ba2 100644
--- a/readline/doc/readline.3
+++ b/readline/doc/readline.3
@@ -6,9 +6,9 @@
 .\"	Case Western Reserve University
 .\"	chet@ins.CWRU.Edu
 .\"
-.\"	Last Change: Tue Jun  1 13:28:03 EDT 1999
+.\"	Last Change: Tue Jan 22 09:18:25 EST 2002
 .\"
-.TH READLINE 3 "1999 Jun 1" GNU
+.TH READLINE 3 "2002 January 22" "GNU Readline 4.3"
 .\"
 .\" File Name macro.  This used to be `.PN', for Path Name,
 .\" but Sun doesn't seem to like that very much.
@@ -23,20 +23,19 @@ readline \- get a line from a user with editing
 .nf
 .ft B
 #include <stdio.h>
-#include <readline.h>
-#include <history.h>
+#include <readline/readline.h>
+#include <readline/history.h>
 .ft
 .fi
 .LP
 .nf
-.ft B
-char *readline (prompt)
-char *prompt;
-.ft
+\fIchar *\fP
+.br
+\fBreadline\fP (\fIconst char *prompt\fP);
 .fi
 .SH COPYRIGHT
-.if n Readline is Copyright (C) 1989, 1991, 1993, 1995, 1996 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.if t Readline is Copyright \(co 1989, 1991, 1993, 1995, 1996 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.if n Readline is Copyright (C) 1989\-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.if t Readline is Copyright \(co 1989\-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .LP
 .B readline
@@ -45,9 +44,10 @@ and return it, using
 .B prompt
 as a prompt.  If 
 .B prompt
-is null, no prompt is issued.  The line returned is allocated with
-.IR malloc (3),
-so the caller must free it when finished.  The line returned
+is \fBNULL\fP or the empty string, no prompt is issued.
+The line returned is allocated with
+.IR malloc (3);
+the caller must free it when finished.  The line returned
 has the final newline removed, so only the text of the line
 remains.
 .LP
@@ -57,6 +57,11 @@ line.
 By default, the line editing commands
 are similar to those of emacs.
 A vi\-style line editing interface is also available.
+.LP
+This manual page describes only the most basic use of \fBreadline\fP.
+Much more functionality is available; see
+\fIThe GNU Readline Library\fP and \fIThe GNU History Library\fP
+for additional information.
 .SH RETURN VALUE
 .LP
 .B readline
@@ -130,6 +135,7 @@ or
 .RS
 C\-Meta\-u: universal\-argument
 .RE
+.sp
 into the 
 .I inputrc
 would make M\-C\-u execute the readline command
@@ -137,15 +143,16 @@ would make M\-C\-u execute the readline command
 .PP
 The following symbolic character names are recognized while
 processing key bindings:
-.IR RUBOUT ,
 .IR DEL ,
 .IR ESC ,
+.IR ESCAPE ,
 .IR LFD ,
 .IR NEWLINE ,
 .IR RET ,
 .IR RETURN ,
-.IR SPC ,
+.IR RUBOUT ,
 .IR SPACE ,
+.IR SPC ,
 and
 .IR TAB .
 .PP
@@ -161,6 +168,7 @@ command or the text of a macro and a key sequence to which
 it should be bound. The name may be specified in one of two ways:
 as a symbolic key name, possibly with \fIMeta\-\fP or \fIControl\-\fP
 prefixes, or as a key sequence.
+.PP
 When using the form \fBkeyname\fP:\^\fIfunction-name\fP or \fImacro\fP,
 .I keyname
 is the name of a key spelled out in English.  For example:
@@ -170,7 +178,7 @@ Control\-u: universal\-argument
 .br
 Meta\-Rubout: backward\-kill\-word
 .br
-Control\-o: ">&output"
+Control\-o: "> output"
 .RE
 .LP
 In the above example,
@@ -184,7 +192,8 @@ and
 .I C\-o
 is bound to run the macro
 expressed on the right hand side (that is, to insert the text
-.I >&output
+.if t \f(CW> output\fP
+.if n ``> output''
 into the line).
 .PP
 In the second form, \fB"keyseq"\fP:\^\fIfunction\-name\fP or \fImacro\fP,
@@ -194,7 +203,8 @@ differs from
 above in that strings denoting
 an entire key sequence may be specified by placing the sequence
 within double quotes.  Some GNU Emacs style key escapes can be
-used, as in the following example.
+used, as in the following example, but the symbolic character names
+are not recognized.
 .sp
 .RS
 "\eC\-u": universal\-argument
@@ -214,8 +224,11 @@ is bound to the function
 and 
 .I "ESC [ 1 1 ~"
 is bound to insert the text
-.BR "Function Key 1" .
-The full set of GNU Emacs style escape sequences is
+.if t \f(CWFunction Key 1\fP.
+.if n ``Function Key 1''.
+.PP
+The full set of GNU Emacs style escape sequences available when specifying
+key sequences is
 .RS
 .PD 0
 .TP
@@ -232,10 +245,10 @@ an escape character
 backslash
 .TP
 .B \e"
-literal "
+literal ", a double quote
 .TP
 .B \e'
-literal '
+literal ', a single quote
 .RE
 .PD
 .PP
@@ -269,12 +282,12 @@ horizontal tab
 vertical tab
 .TP
 .B \e\fInnn\fP
-the character whose ASCII code is the octal value \fInnn\fP
+the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
 (one to three digits)
 .TP
-.B \ex\fInnn\fP
-the character whose ASCII code is the hexadecimal value \fInnn\fP
-(one to three digits)
+.B \ex\fIHH\fP
+the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP
+(one or two hex digits)
 .RE
 .PD
 .PP
@@ -313,7 +326,8 @@ file with a statement of the form
 Except where noted, readline variables can take the values
 .B On
 or
-.BR Off .
+.B Off
+(without regard to case).
 The variables and their default values are:
 .PP
 .PD 0
@@ -351,7 +365,7 @@ on the terminal.
 .B convert\-meta (On)
 If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will convert characters with the
 eighth bit set to an ASCII key sequence
-by stripping the eighth bit and prepending an
+by stripping the eighth bit and prefixing it with an
 escape character (in effect, using escape as the \fImeta prefix\fP).
 .TP
 .B disable\-completion (Off)
@@ -361,7 +375,7 @@ mapped to \fBself-insert\fP.
 .TP
 .B editing\-mode (emacs)
 Controls whether readline begins with a set of key bindings similar
-to \fIemacs\fP or \fIvi\fP.
+to emacs or vi.
 .B editing\-mode
 can be set to either
 .B emacs
@@ -377,6 +391,11 @@ arrow keys.
 If set to \fBon\fP, tilde expansion is performed when readline
 attempts word completion.
 .TP
+.B history-preserve-point     
+If set to \fBon\fP, the history code attempts to place point at the 
+same location on each history line retrived with \fBprevious-history\fP 
+or \fBnext-history\fP.
+.TP
 .B horizontal\-scroll\-mode (Off)
 When set to \fBOn\fP, makes readline use a single line for display,
 scrolling the input horizontally on a single screen line when it
@@ -384,12 +403,12 @@ becomes longer than the screen width rather than wrapping to a new line.
 .TP
 .B input\-meta (Off)
 If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will enable eight-bit input (that is,
-it will not strip the high bit from the characters it reads),
+it will not clear the eighth bit in the characters it reads),
 regardless of what the terminal claims it can support.  The name
 .B meta\-flag
 is a synonym for this variable.
 .TP
-.B isearch\-terminators (``C\-[C\-J'')
+.B isearch\-terminators (``C\-[ C\-J'')
 The string of characters that should terminate an incremental
 search without subsequently executing the character as a command.
 If this variable has not been given a value, the characters
@@ -402,24 +421,39 @@ vi-command\fP, and
 .IR vi-insert .
 \fIvi\fP is equivalent to \fIvi-command\fP; \fIemacs\fP is
 equivalent to \fIemacs-standard\fP.  The default value is
-.IR emacs ;
-the value of
+.IR emacs .
+The value of
 .B editing\-mode
 also affects the default keymap.
 .TP
 .B mark\-directories (On)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, complete<d directory names have a slash
+If set to \fBOn\fP, completed directory names have a slash
 appended.
 .TP
 .B mark\-modified\-lines (Off)
 If set to \fBOn\fP, history lines that have been modified are displayed
 with a preceding asterisk (\fB*\fP).
 .TP
+.B mark\-symlinked\-directories (Off)
+If set to \fBOn\fP, completed names which are symbolic links to directories
+have a slash appended (subject to the value of
+\fBmark\-directories\fP).
+.TP
+.B match\-hidden\-files (On)
+This variable, when set to \fBOn\fP, causes readline to match files whose 
+names begin with a `.' (hidden files) when performing filename     
+completion, unless the leading `.' is     
+supplied by the user in the filename to be completed.
+.TP
 .B output\-meta (Off)
 If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display characters with the
 eighth bit set directly rather than as a meta-prefixed escape
 sequence.
 .TP
+.B page\-completions (On)
+If set to \fBOn\fP, readline uses an internal \fImore\fP-like pager
+to display a screenful of possible completions at a time.
+.TP
 .B print\-completions\-horizontally (Off)
 If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display completions with matches
 sorted horizontally in alphabetical order, rather than down the screen.
@@ -433,7 +467,7 @@ matches to be listed immediately instead of ringing the bell.
 .TP
 .B visible\-stats (Off)
 If set to \fBOn\fP, a character denoting a file's type as reported  
-by \fBstat\fP(2) is appended to the filename when listing possible
+by \fIstat\fP(2) is appended to the filename when listing possible
 completions.
 .PD
 .SS Conditional Constructs
@@ -481,7 +515,7 @@ key sequence that quotes the current or previous word in Bash:
 .sp 1
 .RS
 .nf
-\fB$if\fP bash
+\fB$if\fP Bash
 # Quote the current or previous word
 "\eC-xq": "\eeb\e"\eef\e""
 \fB$endif\fP
@@ -519,22 +553,27 @@ As each character of the search string is typed, readline displays
 the next entry from the history matching the string typed so far.
 An incremental search requires only as many characters as needed to
 find the desired history entry.
-The characters present in the value of the \fIisearch-terminators\fP
+To search backward in the history for a particular string, type
+\fBC\-r\fP.  Typing \fBC\-s\fP searches forward through the history.
+The characters present in the value of the \fBisearch-terminators\fP
 variable are used to terminate an incremental search.
-If that variable has not been assigned a value the Escape and
-Control-J characters will terminate an incremental search.
-Control-G will abort an incremental search and restore the original
+If that variable has not been assigned a value the \fIEscape\fP and
+\fBC\-J\fP characters will terminate an incremental search.
+\fBC\-G\fP will abort an incremental search and restore the original
 line.
 When the search is terminated, the history entry containing the
 search string becomes the current line.
-To find other matching entries in the history list, type Control-S or
-Control-R as appropriate.
+.PP
+To find other matching entries in the history list, type \fBC\-s\fP or
+\fBC\-r\fP as appropriate.
 This will search backward or forward in the history for the next
 line matching the search string typed so far.
 Any other key sequence bound to a readline command will terminate
 the search and execute that command.
-For instance, a \fInewline\fP will terminate the search and accept
+For instance, a newline will terminate the search and accept
 the line, thereby executing the command from the history list.
+A movement command will terminate the search, make the last line found
+the current line, and begin editing.
 .PP
 Non-incremental searches read the entire search string before starting
 to search for matching history lines.  The search string may be
@@ -544,6 +583,11 @@ typed by the user or be part of the contents of the current line.
 The following is a list of the names of the commands and the default
 key sequences to which they are bound.
 Command names without an accompanying key sequence are unbound by default.
+.PP
+In the following descriptions, \fIpoint\fP refers to the current cursor
+position, and \fImark\fP refers to a cursor position saved by the
+\fBset\-mark\fP command.
+The text between the point and mark is referred to as the \fIregion\fP.
 .SS Commands for Moving
 .PP
 .PD 0
@@ -581,9 +625,11 @@ Refresh the current line.
 .PD 0
 .TP
 .B accept\-line (Newline, Return)
-Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is.  If this line is
-non-empty, add it to the history list. If the line is a modified
-history line, then restore the history line to its original state.
+Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is.
+If this line is
+non-empty, it may be added to the history list for future recall with
+\fBadd_history()\fP.
+If the line is a modified history line, the history line is restored to its original state.
 .TP
 .B previous\-history (C\-p)
 Fetch the previous command from the history list, moving back in
@@ -629,8 +675,8 @@ This is a non-incremental search.
 .TP
 .B yank\-nth\-arg (M\-C\-y)
 Insert the first argument to the previous command (usually
-the second word on the previous line) at point (the current
-cursor position).  With an argument
+the second word on the previous line) at point.
+With an argument
 .IR n ,
 insert the \fIn\fPth word from the previous command (the words
 in the previous command begin with word 0).  A negative argument
@@ -649,9 +695,9 @@ list, inserting the last argument of each line in turn.
 .PD 0
 .TP
 .B delete\-char (C\-d)
-Delete the character under the cursor.  If point is at the
+Delete the character at point.  If point is at the
 beginning of the line, there are no characters in the line, and
-the last character typed was not bound to \fBBdelete\-char\fP, then return
+the last character typed was not bound to \fBdelete\-char\fP, then return
 .SM
 .BR EOF .
 .TP
@@ -662,7 +708,7 @@ save the deleted text on the kill ring.
 .B forward\-backward\-delete\-char   
 Delete the character under the cursor, unless the cursor is at the
 end of the line, in which case the character behind the cursor is
-deleted.  By default, this is not bound to a key.
+deleted.
 .TP
 .B quoted\-insert (C\-q, C\-v)
 Add the next character that you type to the line verbatim.  This is
@@ -675,13 +721,17 @@ Insert a tab character.
 Insert the character typed.
 .TP
 .B transpose\-chars (C\-t)
-Drag the character before point forward over the character at point.
-Point moves forward as well.  If point is at the end of the line, then
-transpose the two characters before point.  Negative arguments don't work.
+Drag the character before point forward over the character at point,
+moving point forward as well.
+If point is at the end of the line, then this transposes
+the two characters before point.
+Negative arguments have no effect.
 .TP
 .B transpose\-words (M\-t)
-Drag the word behind the cursor past the word in front of the cursor
-moving the cursor over that word as well.
+Drag the word before point past the word after point,
+moving point over that word as well.
+If point is at the end of the line, this transposes
+the last two words on the line.
 .TP
 .B upcase\-word (M\-u)
 Uppercase the current (or following) word.  With a negative argument,
@@ -694,13 +744,24 @@ lowercase the previous word, but do not move point.
 .B capitalize\-word (M\-c)
 Capitalize the current (or following) word.  With a negative argument,
 capitalize the previous word, but do not move point.
+.TP
+.B overwrite\-mode
+Toggle overwrite mode.  With an explicit positive numeric argument,
+switches to overwrite mode.  With an explicit non-positive numeric
+argument, switches to insert mode.  This command affects only
+\fBemacs\fP mode; \fBvi\fP mode does overwrite differently.
+Each call to \fIreadline()\fP starts in insert mode.
+In overwrite mode, characters bound to \fBself\-insert\fP replace   
+the text at point rather than pushing the text to the right.
+Characters bound to \fBbackward\-delete\-char\fP replace the character
+before point with a space.  By default, this command is unbound.
 .PD
 .SS Killing and Yanking
 .PP
 .PD 0
 .TP
 .B kill\-line (C\-k)
-Kill the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
+Kill the text from point to the end of the line.
 .TP
 .B backward\-kill\-line (C\-x Rubout)
 Kill backward to the beginning of the line.
@@ -711,22 +772,20 @@ The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.
 .\" There is no real difference between this and backward-kill-line
 .TP
 .B kill\-whole\-line
-Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where the
-cursor is.
+Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where point is.
 .TP
 .B kill\-word  (M\-d)
-Kill from the cursor to the end of the current word, or if between
+Kill from point the end of the current word, or if between
 words, to the end of the next word.  Word boundaries are the same as
 those used by \fBforward\-word\fP.
 .TP
 .B backward\-kill\-word (M\-Rubout)
-Kill the word behind the cursor.  Word boundaries are the same as
-those used by \fBbackward\-word\fP.
+Kill the word behind point.
+Word boundaries are the same as those used by \fBbackward\-word\fP.
 .TP
 .B unix\-word\-rubout (C\-w)
-Kill the word behind the cursor, using white space as a word boundary.
-The word boundaries are different from
-.BR backward\-kill\-word .
+Kill the word behind point, using white space as a word boundary.
+The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.
 .TP
 .B delete\-horizontal\-space (M\-\e)
 Delete all spaces and tabs around point.
@@ -747,7 +806,7 @@ Copy the word following point to the kill buffer.
 The word boundaries are the same as \fBforward\-word\fP.
 .TP
 .B yank (C\-y)
-Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at the cursor.
+Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point.
 .TP
 .B yank\-pop (M\-y)
 Rotate the kill ring, and yank the new top.  Only works following
@@ -808,8 +867,9 @@ Similar to \fBcomplete\fP, but replaces the word to be completed
 with a single match from the list of possible completions.
 Repeated execution of \fBmenu\-complete\fP steps through the list
 of possible completions, inserting each match in turn.
-At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung and the
-original text is restored.
+At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung
+(subject to the setting of \Bbell\-style\fP)
+and the original text is restored.
 An argument of \fIn\fP moves \fIn\fP positions forward in the list
 of matches; a negative argument may be used to move backward 
 through the list.
@@ -821,7 +881,6 @@ Deletes the character under the cursor if not at the beginning or
 end of the line (like \fBdelete-char\fP).
 If at the end of the line, behaves identically to
 \fBpossible-completions\fP.
-This command is unbound by default.
 .PD
 .SS Keyboard Macros
 .PP
@@ -874,8 +933,8 @@ command enough times to return the line to its initial state.
 .B tilde\-expand (M\-&)
 Perform tilde expansion on the current word.
 .TP
-.B set\-mark (C\-@, M-<space>)
-Set the mark to the current point.  If a
+.B set\-mark (C\-@, M\-<space>)
+Set the mark to the point.  If a
 numeric argument is supplied, the mark is set to that position.
 .TP
 .B exchange\-point\-and\-mark (C\-x C\-x)
@@ -891,11 +950,20 @@ A character is read and point is moved to the previous occurrence of that
 character.  A negative count searches for subsequent occurrences.
 .TP
 .B insert\-comment (M\-#)
-The value of the readline
+Without a numeric argument, the value of the readline
+.B comment\-begin
+variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line.
+If a numeric argument is supplied, this command acts as a toggle:  if
+the characters at the beginning of the line do not match the value   
+of \fBcomment\-begin\fP, the value is inserted, otherwise             
+the characters in \fBcomment-begin\fP are deleted from the beginning of
+the line.
+In either case, the line is accepted as if a newline had been typed.
+The default value of
 .B comment\-begin
-variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line, and the line
-is accepted as if a newline had been typed.  This makes the current line
-a shell comment.
+makes the current line a shell comment.
+If a numeric argument causes the comment character to be removed, the line
+will be executed by the shell.
 .TP
 .B dump\-functions
 Print all of the functions and their key bindings to the
@@ -918,7 +986,7 @@ of an \fIinputrc\fP file.
 .B emacs\-editing\-mode (C\-e)
 When in
 .B vi
-editing mode, this causes a switch to
+command mode, this causes a switch to
 .B emacs
 editing mode.
 .TP
@@ -932,25 +1000,23 @@ editing mode.
 .SH DEFAULT KEY BINDINGS
 .LP
 The following is a list of the default emacs and vi bindings.
-Characters with the 8th bit set are written as M\-<character>, and
+Characters with the eighth bit set are written as M\-<character>, and
 are referred to as
 .I metafied
 characters.
 The printable ASCII characters not mentioned in the list of emacs
 standard bindings are bound to the
-.I self\-insert
+.B self\-insert
 function, which just inserts the given character into the input line.
 In vi insertion mode, all characters not specifically mentioned are
 bound to
-.IR self\-insert .
+.BR self\-insert .
 Characters assigned to signal generation by
 .IR stty (1)
 or the terminal driver, such as C-Z or C-C,
 retain that function.
-Upper and lower case
-.I metafied
-characters are bound to the same function in the emacs mode
-meta keymap.
+Upper and lower case metafied characters are bound to the same function in
+the emacs mode meta keymap.
 The remaining characters are unbound, which causes readline
 to ring the bell (subject to the setting of the
 .B bell\-style
@@ -1036,7 +1102,7 @@ Emacs Meta bindings
 "M-Y"  yank-pop
 "M-\e"  delete-horizontal-space
 "M-~"  tilde-expand
-"M-C-?"  backward-delete-word
+"M-C-?"  backward-kill-word
 "M-_"  yank-last-arg
 .PP
 Emacs Control-X bindings
@@ -1096,6 +1162,7 @@ VI Command Mode functions
 "C-V"  quoted-insert
 "C-W"  unix-word-rubout
 "C-Y"  yank
+"C-_"  vi-undo
 "\^ "  forward-char
 "#"  insert-comment
 "$"  end-of-line
@@ -1150,7 +1217,7 @@ VI Command Mode functions
 "r"  vi-change-char
 "s"  vi-subst
 "t"  vi-char-search
-"u"  undo
+"u"  vi-undo
 "w"  vi-next-word
 "x"  vi-delete
 "y"  vi-yank-to
diff --git a/readline/doc/rlman.texinfo b/readline/doc/rlman.texinfo
index 759f0eb..1ffebad 100644
--- a/readline/doc/rlman.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/rlman.texinfo
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ This document describes the GNU Readline Library, a utility which aids
 in the consistency of user interface across discrete programs that need
 to provide a command line interface.
 
-Copyright (C) 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
 by the Free Software Foundation.
 
 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
-Copyright @copyright{} 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright @copyright{} 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 @end titlepage
 
 @ifinfo
diff --git a/readline/doc/rltech.texinfo b/readline/doc/rltech.texinfo
index 51c340a..037e824 100644
--- a/readline/doc/rltech.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/rltech.texinfo
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ This document describes the GNU Readline Library, a utility for aiding
 in the consitency of user interface across discrete programs that need
 to provide a command line interface.
 
-Copyright (C) 1988, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
@@ -35,9 +35,9 @@ by the Foundation.
 @node Programming with GNU Readline
 @chapter Programming with GNU Readline
 
-This chapter describes the interface between the GNU Readline Library and
+This chapter describes the interface between the @sc{gnu} Readline Library and
 other programs.  If you are a programmer, and you wish to include the
-features found in GNU Readline
+features found in @sc{gnu} Readline
 such as completion, line editing, and interactive history manipulation
 in your own programs, this section is for you.
 
@@ -61,18 +61,20 @@ Many programs provide a command line interface, such as @code{mail},
 @code{ftp}, and @code{sh}.  For such programs, the default behaviour of
 Readline is sufficient.  This section describes how to use Readline in
 the simplest way possible, perhaps to replace calls in your code to
-@code{gets()} or @code{fgets ()}.
+@code{gets()} or @code{fgets()}.
 
 @findex readline
 @cindex readline, function
-The function @code{readline ()} prints a prompt and then reads and returns
-a single line of text from the user.  The line @code{readline}
-returns is allocated with @code{malloc ()}; you should @code{free ()}
-the line when you are done with it.  The declaration for @code{readline}
-in ANSI C is
+
+The function @code{readline()} prints a prompt @var{prompt}
+and then reads and returns a single line of text from the user.
+If @var{prompt} is @code{NULL} or the empty string, no prompt is displayed.
+The line @code{readline} returns is allocated with @code{malloc()};
+the caller should @code{free()} the line when it has finished with it.
+The declaration for @code{readline} in ANSI C is
 
 @example
-@code{char *readline (char *@var{prompt});}
+@code{char *readline (const char *@var{prompt});}
 @end example
 
 @noindent
@@ -90,7 +92,7 @@ line is empty at that point, then @code{(char *)NULL} is returned.
 Otherwise, the line is ended just as if a newline had been typed.
 
 If you want the user to be able to get at the line later, (with
-@key{C-p} for example), you must call @code{add_history ()} to save the
+@key{C-p} for example), you must call @code{add_history()} to save the
 line away in a @dfn{history} list of such lines.
 
 @example
@@ -102,19 +104,20 @@ For full details on the GNU History Library, see the associated manual.
 
 It is preferable to avoid saving empty lines on the history list, since
 users rarely have a burning need to reuse a blank line.  Here is
-a function which usefully replaces the standard @code{gets ()} library
+a function which usefully replaces the standard @code{gets()} library
 function, and has the advantage of no static buffer to overflow:
 
 @example
 /* A static variable for holding the line. */
 static char *line_read = (char *)NULL;
 
-/* Read a string, and return a pointer to it.  Returns NULL on EOF. */
+/* Read a string, and return a pointer to it.
+   Returns NULL on EOF. */
 char *
 rl_gets ()
 @{
-  /* If the buffer has already been allocated, return the memory
-     to the free pool. */
+  /* If the buffer has already been allocated,
+     return the memory to the free pool. */
   if (line_read)
     @{
       free (line_read);
@@ -124,7 +127,8 @@ rl_gets ()
   /* Get a line from the user. */
   line_read = readline ("");
 
-  /* If the line has any text in it, save it on the history. */
+  /* If the line has any text in it,
+     save it on the history. */
   if (line_read && *line_read)
     add_history (line_read);
 
@@ -135,17 +139,17 @@ rl_gets ()
 This function gives the user the default behaviour of @key{TAB}
 completion: completion on file names.  If you do not want Readline to
 complete on filenames, you can change the binding of the @key{TAB} key
-with @code{rl_bind_key ()}.
+with @code{rl_bind_key()}.
 
 @example
-@code{int rl_bind_key (int @var{key}, int (*@var{function})());}
+@code{int rl_bind_key (int @var{key}, rl_command_func_t *@var{function});}
 @end example
 
-@code{rl_bind_key ()} takes two arguments: @var{key} is the character that
+@code{rl_bind_key()} takes two arguments: @var{key} is the character that
 you want to bind, and @var{function} is the address of the function to
-call when @var{key} is pressed.  Binding @key{TAB} to @code{rl_insert ()}
+call when @var{key} is pressed.  Binding @key{TAB} to @code{rl_insert()}
 makes @key{TAB} insert itself.
-@code{rl_bind_key ()} returns non-zero if @var{key} is not a valid
+@code{rl_bind_key()} returns non-zero if @var{key} is not a valid
 ASCII character code (between 0 and 255).
 
 Thus, to disable the default @key{TAB} behavior, the following suffices:
@@ -154,7 +158,7 @@ Thus, to disable the default @key{TAB} behavior, the following suffices:
 @end example
 
 This code should be executed once at the start of your program; you
-might write a function called @code{initialize_readline ()} which
+might write a function called @code{initialize_readline()} which
 performs this and other desired initializations, such as installing
 custom completers (@pxref{Custom Completers}).
 
@@ -174,45 +178,82 @@ in any file that uses Readline's features.  Since some of the definitions
 in @code{readline.h} use the @code{stdio} library, the file
 @code{<stdio.h>} should be included before @code{readline.h}.
 
+@code{readline.h} defines a C preprocessor variable that should
+be treated as an integer, @code{RL_READLINE_VERSION}, which may
+be used to conditionally compile application code depending on
+the installed Readline version.  The value is a hexadecimal
+encoding of the major and minor version numbers of the library,
+of the form 0x@var{MMmm}.  @var{MM} is the two-digit major
+version number; @var{mm} is the two-digit minor version number. 
+For Readline 4.2, for example, the value of
+@code{RL_READLINE_VERSION} would be @code{0x0402}. 
+
 @menu
-* The Function Type::	C declarations to make code readable.
+* Readline Typedefs::	C declarations to make code readable.
 * Function Writing::	Variables and calling conventions.
 @end menu
 
-@node The Function Type
-@subsection The Function Type
+@node Readline Typedefs
+@subsection Readline Typedefs
 
-For readabilty, we declare a new type of object, called
-@dfn{Function}.  A @code{Function} is a C function which
-returns an @code{int}.  The type declaration for @code{Function} is:
+For readabilty, we declare a number of new object types, all pointers
+to functions.
 
-@noindent
-@code{typedef int Function ();}
+The reason for declaring these new types is to make it easier to write
+code describing pointers to C functions with appropriately prototyped
+arguments and return values.
 
-The reason for declaring this new type is to make it easier to write
-code describing pointers to C functions.  Let us say we had a variable
-called @var{func} which was a pointer to a function.  Instead of the
-classic C declaration
+For instance, say we want to declare a variable @var{func} as a pointer
+to a function which takes two @code{int} arguments and returns an
+@code{int} (this is the type of all of the Readline bindable functions).
+Instead of the classic C declaration
 
-@code{int (*)()func;}
+@code{int (*func)();}
 
 @noindent
-we may write
+or the ANSI-C style declaration
 
-@code{Function *func;}
+@code{int (*func)(int, int);}
 
 @noindent
-Similarly, there are
+we may write
 
-@example
-typedef void VFunction ();
-typedef char *CPFunction (); @r{and}
-typedef char **CPPFunction ();
-@end example
+@code{rl_command_func_t *func;}
 
-@noindent
-for functions returning no value, @code{pointer to char}, and
-@code{pointer to pointer to char}, respectively.
+The full list of function pointer types available is
+
+@table @code
+@item typedef int rl_command_func_t (int, int);
+
+@item typedef char *rl_compentry_func_t (const char *, int);
+
+@item typedef char **rl_completion_func_t (const char *, int, int);
+
+@item typedef char *rl_quote_func_t (char *, int, char *);
+
+@item typedef char *rl_dequote_func_t (char *, int);
+
+@item typedef int rl_compignore_func_t (char **);
+
+@item typedef void rl_compdisp_func_t (char **, int, int);
+
+@item typedef int rl_hook_func_t (void);
+
+@item typedef int rl_getc_func_t (FILE *);
+
+@item typedef int rl_linebuf_func_t (char *, int);
+
+@item typedef int rl_intfunc_t (int);
+@item #define rl_ivoidfunc_t rl_hook_func_t
+@item typedef int rl_icpfunc_t (char *);
+@item typedef int rl_icppfunc_t (char **);
+
+@item typedef void rl_voidfunc_t (void);
+@item typedef void rl_vintfunc_t (int);
+@item typedef void rl_vcpfunc_t (char *);
+@item typedef void rl_vcppfunc_t (char **);
+
+@end table
 
 @node Function Writing
 @subsection Writing a New Function
@@ -224,7 +265,7 @@ variables that describe the current state of the line read so far.
 The calling sequence for a command @code{foo} looks like
 
 @example
-@code{foo (int count, int key)}
+@code{int foo (int count, int key)}
 @end example
 
 @noindent
@@ -241,6 +282,9 @@ to do something useful with both negative and positive arguments.
 At the very least, it should be aware that it can be passed a
 negative argument.
 
+A command function should return 0 if its action completes successfully,
+and a non-zero value if some error occurs.
+
 @node Readline Variables
 @section Readline Variables
 
@@ -265,7 +309,7 @@ The number of characters present in @code{rl_line_buffer}.  When
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar int rl_mark
-The mark (saved position) in the current line.  If set, the mark
+The @var{mark} (saved position) in the current line.  If set, the mark
 and point define a @emph{region}.
 @end deftypevar
 
@@ -274,11 +318,23 @@ Setting this to a non-zero value causes Readline to return the current
 line immediately.
 @end deftypevar
 
+@deftypevar int rl_num_chars_to_read
+Setting this to a positive value before calling @code{readline()} causes
+Readline to return after accepting that many characters, rather
+than reading up to a character bound to @code{accept-line}.
+@end deftypevar
+
 @deftypevar int rl_pending_input
 Setting this to a value makes it the next keystroke read.  This is a
 way to stuff a single character into the input stream.
 @end deftypevar
 
+@deftypevar int rl_dispatching
+Set to a non-zero value if a function is being called from a key binding;
+zero otherwise.  Application functions can test this to discover whether
+they were called directly or by Readline's dispatching mechanism.
+@end deftypevar
+
 @deftypevar int rl_erase_empty_line
 Setting this to a non-zero value causes Readline to completely erase
 the current line, including any prompt, any time a newline is typed as
@@ -288,7 +344,9 @@ the beginning of the newly-blank line.
 
 @deftypevar {char *} rl_prompt
 The prompt Readline uses.  This is set from the argument to
-@code{readline ()}, and should not be assigned to directly.
+@code{readline()}, and should not be assigned to directly.
+The @code{rl_set_prompt()} function (@pxref{Redisplay}) may
+be used to modify the prompt string after calling @code{readline()}.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar int rl_already_prompted
@@ -301,15 +359,30 @@ The calling application is responsible for managing the value; Readline
 never sets it.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_library_version
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_library_version
 The version number of this revision of the library.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_terminal_name
-The terminal type, used for initialization.
+@deftypevar int rl_readline_version
+An integer encoding the current version of the library.  The encoding is
+of the form 0x@var{MMmm}, where @var{MM} is the two-digit major version
+number, and @var{mm} is the two-digit minor version number.
+For example, for Readline-4.2, @code{rl_readline_version} would have the
+value 0x0402.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {int} rl_gnu_readline_p
+Always set to 1, denoting that this is @sc{gnu} readline rather than some
+emulation.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_terminal_name
+The terminal type, used for initialization.  If not set by the application,
+Readline sets this to the value of the @env{TERM} environment variable
+the first time it is called.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_readline_name
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_readline_name
 This variable is set to a unique name by each application using Readline.
 The value allows conditional parsing of the inputrc file
 (@pxref{Conditional Init Constructs}).
@@ -317,42 +390,68 @@ The value allows conditional parsing of the inputrc file
 
 @deftypevar {FILE *} rl_instream
 The stdio stream from which Readline reads input.
+If @code{NULL}, Readline defaults to @var{stdin}.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar {FILE *} rl_outstream
 The stdio stream to which Readline performs output.
+If @code{NULL}, Readline defaults to @var{stdout}.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {rl_command_func_t *} rl_last_func
+The address of the last command function Readline executed.  May be used to
+test whether or not a function is being executed twice in succession, for
+example.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_startup_hook
+@deftypevar {rl_hook_func_t *} rl_startup_hook
 If non-zero, this is the address of a function to call just
 before @code{readline} prints the first prompt.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_pre_input_hook
+@deftypevar {rl_hook_func_t *} rl_pre_input_hook
 If non-zero, this is the address of a function to call after
 the first prompt has been printed and just before @code{readline}
 starts reading input characters.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_event_hook
+@deftypevar {rl_hook_func_t *} rl_event_hook
 If non-zero, this is the address of a function to call periodically
-when readline is waiting for terminal input.
+when Readline is waiting for terminal input.
+By default, this will be called at most ten times a second if there
+is no keyboard input.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_getc_function
-If non-zero, @code{readline} will call indirectly through this pointer
+@deftypevar {rl_getc_func_t *} rl_getc_function
+If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer
 to get a character from the input stream.  By default, it is set to
-@code{rl_getc}, the default @code{readline} character input function
-(@pxref{Utility Functions}).
+@code{rl_getc}, the default Readline character input function
+(@pxref{Character Input}).
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {VFunction *} rl_redisplay_function
-If non-zero, @code{readline} will call indirectly through this pointer
+@deftypevar {rl_voidfunc_t *} rl_redisplay_function
+If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer
 to update the display with the current contents of the editing buffer.
-By default, it is set to @code{rl_redisplay}, the default @code{readline}
+By default, it is set to @code{rl_redisplay}, the default Readline
 redisplay function (@pxref{Redisplay}).
 @end deftypevar
 
+@deftypevar {rl_vintfunc_t *} rl_prep_term_function
+If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer
+to initialize the terminal.  The function takes a single argument, an
+@code{int} flag that says whether or not to use eight-bit characters.
+By default, this is set to @code{rl_prep_terminal}
+(@pxref{Terminal Management}).
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {rl_voidfunc_t *} rl_deprep_term_function
+If non-zero, Readline will call indirectly through this pointer
+to reset the terminal.  This function should undo the effects of
+@code{rl_prep_term_function}.
+By default, this is set to @code{rl_deprep_terminal}
+(@pxref{Terminal Management}).
+@end deftypevar
+
 @deftypevar {Keymap} rl_executing_keymap
 This variable is set to the keymap (@pxref{Keymaps}) in which the
 currently executing readline function was found.
@@ -363,6 +462,79 @@ This variable is set to the keymap (@pxref{Keymaps}) in which the
 last key binding occurred.
 @end deftypevar 
 
+@deftypevar {char *} rl_executing_macro
+This variable is set to the text of any currently-executing macro.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {int} rl_readline_state
+A variable with bit values that encapsulate the current Readline state.
+A bit is set with the @code{RL_SETSTATE} macro, and unset with the
+@code{RL_UNSETSTATE} macro.  Use the @code{RL_ISSTATE} macro to test
+whether a particular state bit is set.  Current state bits include:
+
+@table @code
+@item RL_STATE_NONE
+Readline has not yet been called, nor has it begun to intialize.
+@item RL_STATE_INITIALIZING
+Readline is initializing its internal data structures.
+@item RL_STATE_INITIALIZED
+Readline has completed its initialization.
+@item RL_STATE_TERMPREPPED
+Readline has modified the terminal modes to do its own input and redisplay.
+@item RL_STATE_READCMD
+Readline is reading a command from the keyboard.
+@item RL_STATE_METANEXT
+Readline is reading more input after reading the meta-prefix character.
+@item RL_STATE_DISPATCHING
+Readline is dispatching to a command.
+@item RL_STATE_MOREINPUT
+Readline is reading more input while executing an editing command.
+@item RL_STATE_ISEARCH
+Readline is performing an incremental history search.
+@item RL_STATE_NSEARCH
+Readline is performing a non-incremental history search.
+@item RL_STATE_SEARCH
+Readline is searching backward or forward through the history for a string.
+@item RL_STATE_NUMERICARG
+Readline is reading a numeric argument.
+@item RL_STATE_MACROINPUT
+Readline is currently getting its input from a previously-defined keyboard
+macro.
+@item RL_STATE_MACRODEF
+Readline is currently reading characters defining a keyboard macro.
+@item RL_STATE_OVERWRITE
+Readline is in overwrite mode.
+@item RL_STATE_COMPLETING
+Readline is performing word completion.
+@item RL_STATE_SIGHANDLER
+Readline is currently executing the readline signal handler.
+@item RL_STATE_UNDOING
+Readline is performing an undo.
+@item RL_STATE_DONE
+Readline has read a key sequence bound to @code{accept-line}
+and is about to return the line to the caller.
+@end table
+
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {int} rl_explicit_arg
+Set to a non-zero value if an explicit numeric argument was specified by
+the user.  Only valid in a bindable command function.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {int} rl_numeric_arg
+Set to the value of any numeric argument explicitly specified by the user
+before executing the current Readline function.  Only valid in a bindable
+command function.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {int} rl_editing_mode
+Set to a value denoting Readline's current editing mode.  A value of
+@var{1} means Readline is currently in emacs mode; @var{0}
+means that vi mode is active.
+@end deftypevar
+
+
 @node Readline Convenience Functions
 @section Readline Convenience Functions
 
@@ -375,8 +547,12 @@ last key binding occurred.
 * Allowing Undoing::	How to make your functions undoable.
 * Redisplay::		Functions to control line display.
 * Modifying Text::	Functions to modify @code{rl_line_buffer}.
+* Character Input::	Functions to read keyboard input.
+* Terminal Management::	Functions to manage terminal settings.
 * Utility Functions::	Generally useful functions and hooks.
+* Miscellaneous Functions::	Functions that don't fall into any category.
 * Alternate Interface::	Using Readline in a `callback' fashion.
+* A Readline Example::		An example Readline function.
 @end menu
 
 @node Function Naming
@@ -396,10 +572,10 @@ This binds the keystroke @key{Meta-Rubout} to the function
 programmer, should bind the functions you write to descriptive names as
 well.  Readline provides a function for doing that:
 
-@deftypefun int rl_add_defun (char *name, Function *function, int key)
+@deftypefun int rl_add_defun (const char *name, rl_command_func_t *function, int key)
 Add @var{name} to the list of named functions.  Make @var{function} be
 the function that gets called.  If @var{key} is not -1, then bind it to
-@var{function} using @code{rl_bind_key ()}.
+@var{function} using @code{rl_bind_key()}.
 @end deftypefun
 
 Using this function alone is sufficient for most applications.  It is
@@ -416,16 +592,17 @@ association between the keys that the user types and the functions that
 get run.  You can make your own keymaps, copy existing keymaps, and tell
 Readline which keymap to use.
 
-@deftypefun Keymap rl_make_bare_keymap ()
+@deftypefun Keymap rl_make_bare_keymap (void)
 Returns a new, empty keymap.  The space for the keymap is allocated with
-@code{malloc ()}; you should @code{free ()} it when you are done.
+@code{malloc()}; the caller should free it by calling
+@code{rl_discard_keymap()} when done.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @deftypefun Keymap rl_copy_keymap (Keymap map)
 Return a new keymap which is a copy of @var{map}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun Keymap rl_make_keymap ()
+@deftypefun Keymap rl_make_keymap (void)
 Return a new keymap with the printing characters bound to rl_insert,
 the lowercase Meta characters bound to run their equivalents, and
 the Meta digits bound to produce numeric arguments.
@@ -438,7 +615,7 @@ Free the storage associated with @var{keymap}.
 Readline has several internal keymaps.  These functions allow you to
 change which keymap is active.
 
-@deftypefun Keymap rl_get_keymap ()
+@deftypefun Keymap rl_get_keymap (void)
 Returns the currently active keymap.
 @end deftypefun
 
@@ -446,7 +623,7 @@ Returns the currently active keymap.
 Makes @var{keymap} the currently active keymap.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun Keymap rl_get_keymap_by_name (char *name)
+@deftypefun Keymap rl_get_keymap_by_name (const char *name)
 Return the keymap matching @var{name}.  @var{name} is one which would
 be supplied in a @code{set keymap} inputrc line (@pxref{Readline Init File}).
 @end deftypefun
@@ -459,28 +636,28 @@ be supplied in a @code{set keymap} inputrc line (@pxref{Readline Init File}).
 @node Binding Keys
 @subsection Binding Keys
 
-You associate keys with functions through the keymap.  Readline has
-several internal keymaps: @code{emacs_standard_keymap},
+Key sequences are associate with functions through the keymap.
+Readline has several internal keymaps: @code{emacs_standard_keymap},
 @code{emacs_meta_keymap}, @code{emacs_ctlx_keymap},
 @code{vi_movement_keymap}, and @code{vi_insertion_keymap}.
 @code{emacs_standard_keymap} is the default, and the examples in
 this manual assume that.
 
-Since @code{readline} installs a set of default key bindings the first
+Since @code{readline()} installs a set of default key bindings the first
 time it is called, there is always the danger that a custom binding
-installed before the first call to @code{readline} will be overridden.
+installed before the first call to @code{readline()} will be overridden.
 An alternate mechanism is to install custom key bindings in an
 initialization function assigned to the @code{rl_startup_hook} variable
 (@pxref{Readline Variables}).
 
 These functions manage key bindings.
 
-@deftypefun int rl_bind_key (int key, Function *function)
+@deftypefun int rl_bind_key (int key, rl_command_func_t *function)
 Binds @var{key} to @var{function} in the currently active keymap.
 Returns non-zero in the case of an invalid @var{key}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_bind_key_in_map (int key, Function *function, Keymap map)
+@deftypefun int rl_bind_key_in_map (int key, rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map)
 Bind @var{key} to @var{function} in @var{map}.  Returns non-zero in the case
 of an invalid @var{key}.
 @end deftypefun
@@ -495,15 +672,21 @@ Bind @var{key} to the null function in @var{map}.
 Returns non-zero in case of error.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_unbind_function_in_map (Function *function, Keymap map)
+@deftypefun int rl_unbind_function_in_map (rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map)
 Unbind all keys that execute @var{function} in @var{map}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_unbind_command_in_map (char *command, Keymap map)
+@deftypefun int rl_unbind_command_in_map (const char *command, Keymap map)
 Unbind all keys that are bound to @var{command} in @var{map}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_generic_bind (int type, char *keyseq, char *data, Keymap map)
+@deftypefun int rl_set_key (const char *keyseq, rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map)
+Bind the key sequence represented by the string @var{keyseq} to the function
+@var{function}.  This makes new keymaps as
+necessary.  The initial keymap in which to do bindings is @var{map}.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_generic_bind (int type, const char *keyseq, char *data, Keymap map)
 Bind the key sequence represented by the string @var{keyseq} to the arbitrary
 pointer @var{data}.  @var{type} says what kind of data is pointed to by
 @var{data}; this can be a function (@code{ISFUNC}), a macro
@@ -517,7 +700,7 @@ perform any key bindings and variable assignments found
 (@pxref{Readline Init File}).
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_read_init_file (char *filename)
+@deftypefun int rl_read_init_file (const char *filename)
 Read keybindings and variable assignments from @var{filename}
 (@pxref{Readline Init File}).
 @end deftypefun
@@ -526,25 +709,26 @@ Read keybindings and variable assignments from @var{filename}
 @subsection Associating Function Names and Bindings
 
 These functions allow you to find out what keys invoke named functions
-and the functions invoked by a particular key sequence.
+and the functions invoked by a particular key sequence.  You may also
+associate a new function name with an arbitrary function.
 
-@deftypefun {Function *} rl_named_function (char *name)
+@deftypefun {rl_command_func_t *} rl_named_function (const char *name)
 Return the function with name @var{name}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {Function *} rl_function_of_keyseq (char *keyseq, Keymap map, int *type)
+@deftypefun {rl_command_func_t *} rl_function_of_keyseq (const char *keyseq, Keymap map, int *type)
 Return the function invoked by @var{keyseq} in keymap @var{map}.
-If @var{map} is NULL, the current keymap is used.  If @var{type} is
-not NULL, the type of the object is returned in it (one of @code{ISFUNC},
-@code{ISKMAP}, or @code{ISMACR}).
+If @var{map} is @code{NULL}, the current keymap is used.  If @var{type} is
+not @code{NULL}, the type of the object is returned in the @code{int} variable
+it points to (one of @code{ISFUNC}, @code{ISKMAP}, or @code{ISMACR}).
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char **} rl_invoking_keyseqs (Function *function)
+@deftypefun {char **} rl_invoking_keyseqs (rl_command_func_t *function)
 Return an array of strings representing the key sequences used to
 invoke @var{function} in the current keymap.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char **} rl_invoking_keyseqs_in_map (Function *function, Keymap map)
+@deftypefun {char **} rl_invoking_keyseqs_in_map (rl_command_func_t *function, Keymap map)
 Return an array of strings representing the key sequences used to
 invoke @var{function} in the keymap @var{map}.
 @end deftypefun
@@ -556,14 +740,19 @@ the list is formatted in such a way that it can be made part of an
 @code{inputrc} file and re-read.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun void rl_list_funmap_names ()
+@deftypefun void rl_list_funmap_names (void)
 Print the names of all bindable Readline functions to @code{rl_outstream}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char **} rl_funmap_names ()
+@deftypefun {const char **} rl_funmap_names (void)
 Return a NULL terminated array of known function names.  The array is
 sorted.  The array itself is allocated, but not the strings inside.  You
-should free () the array when you done, but not the pointrs.
+should @code{free()} the array when you are done, but not the pointers.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_add_funmap_entry (const char *name, rl_command_func_t *function)
+Add @var{name} to the list of bindable Readline command names, and make
+@var{function} the function to be called when @var{name} is invoked.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @node Allowing Undoing
@@ -571,41 +760,40 @@ should free () the array when you done, but not the pointrs.
 
 Supporting the undo command is a painless thing, and makes your
 functions much more useful.  It is certainly easy to try
-something if you know you can undo it.  I could use an undo function for
-the stock market.
+something if you know you can undo it.
 
 If your function simply inserts text once, or deletes text once, and
-uses @code{rl_insert_text ()} or @code{rl_delete_text ()} to do it, then
+uses @code{rl_insert_text()} or @code{rl_delete_text()} to do it, then
 undoing is already done for you automatically.
 
 If you do multiple insertions or multiple deletions, or any combination
 of these operations, you should group them together into one operation.
-This is done with @code{rl_begin_undo_group ()} and
-@code{rl_end_undo_group ()}.
+This is done with @code{rl_begin_undo_group()} and
+@code{rl_end_undo_group()}.
 
 The types of events that can be undone are:
 
-@example
+@smallexample
 enum undo_code @{ UNDO_DELETE, UNDO_INSERT, UNDO_BEGIN, UNDO_END @}; 
-@end example
+@end smallexample
 
 Notice that @code{UNDO_DELETE} means to insert some text, and
 @code{UNDO_INSERT} means to delete some text.  That is, the undo code
-tells undo what to undo, not how to undo it.  @code{UNDO_BEGIN} and
-@code{UNDO_END} are tags added by @code{rl_begin_undo_group ()} and
-@code{rl_end_undo_group ()}.
+tells what to undo, not how to undo it.  @code{UNDO_BEGIN} and
+@code{UNDO_END} are tags added by @code{rl_begin_undo_group()} and
+@code{rl_end_undo_group()}.
 
-@deftypefun int rl_begin_undo_group ()
+@deftypefun int rl_begin_undo_group (void)
 Begins saving undo information in a group construct.  The undo
-information usually comes from calls to @code{rl_insert_text ()} and
-@code{rl_delete_text ()}, but could be the result of calls to
-@code{rl_add_undo ()}.
+information usually comes from calls to @code{rl_insert_text()} and
+@code{rl_delete_text()}, but could be the result of calls to
+@code{rl_add_undo()}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_end_undo_group ()
+@deftypefun int rl_end_undo_group (void)
 Closes the current undo group started with @code{rl_begin_undo_group
-()}.  There should be one call to @code{rl_end_undo_group ()}
-for each call to @code{rl_begin_undo_group ()}.
+()}.  There should be one call to @code{rl_end_undo_group()}
+for each call to @code{rl_begin_undo_group()}.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @deftypefun void rl_add_undo (enum undo_code what, int start, int end, char *text)
@@ -613,17 +801,17 @@ Remember how to undo an event (according to @var{what}).  The affected
 text runs from @var{start} to @var{end}, and encompasses @var{text}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun void free_undo_list ()
+@deftypefun void rl_free_undo_list (void)
 Free the existing undo list.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_do_undo ()
+@deftypefun int rl_do_undo (void)
 Undo the first thing on the undo list.  Returns @code{0} if there was
 nothing to undo, non-zero if something was undone.
 @end deftypefun
 
 Finally, if you neither insert nor delete text, but directly modify the
-existing text (e.g., change its case), call @code{rl_modifying ()}
+existing text (e.g., change its case), call @code{rl_modifying()}
 once, just before you modify the text.  You must supply the indices of
 the text range that you are going to modify.
 
@@ -636,22 +824,22 @@ that text.
 @node Redisplay
 @subsection Redisplay
 
-@deftypefun void rl_redisplay ()
+@deftypefun void rl_redisplay (void)
 Change what's displayed on the screen to reflect the current contents
 of @code{rl_line_buffer}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_forced_update_display ()
+@deftypefun int rl_forced_update_display (void)
 Force the line to be updated and redisplayed, whether or not
 Readline thinks the screen display is correct.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_on_new_line ()
+@deftypefun int rl_on_new_line (void)
 Tell the update functions that we have moved onto a new (empty) line,
 usually after ouputting a newline.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_on_new_line_with_prompt ()
+@deftypefun int rl_on_new_line_with_prompt (void)
 Tell the update functions that we have moved onto a new line, with
 @var{rl_prompt} already displayed.
 This could be used by applications that want to output the prompt string
@@ -660,40 +848,72 @@ redisplay.
 It should be used after setting @var{rl_already_prompted}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_reset_line_state ()
+@deftypefun int rl_reset_line_state (void)
 Reset the display state to a clean state and redisplay the current line
 starting on a new line.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_message (va_alist)
-The arguments are a string as would be supplied to @code{printf}.  The
-resulting string is displayed in the @dfn{echo area}.  The echo area
+@deftypefun int rl_crlf (void)
+Move the cursor to the start of the next screen line.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_show_char (int c)
+Display character @var{c} on @code{rl_outstream}.
+If Readline has not been set to display meta characters directly, this
+will convert meta characters to a meta-prefixed key sequence.
+This is intended for use by applications which wish to do their own
+redisplay.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_message (const char *, @dots{})
+The arguments are a format string as would be supplied to @code{printf},
+possibly containing conversion specifications such as @samp{%d}, and
+any additional arguments necessary to satisfy the conversion specifications.
+The resulting string is displayed in the @dfn{echo area}.  The echo area
 is also used to display numeric arguments and search strings.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_clear_message ()
+@deftypefun int rl_clear_message (void)
 Clear the message in the echo area.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun void rl_save_prompt ()
+@deftypefun void rl_save_prompt (void)
 Save the local Readline prompt display state in preparation for
-displaying a new message in the message area with @code{rl_message}.
+displaying a new message in the message area with @code{rl_message()}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun void rl_restore_prompt ()
+@deftypefun void rl_restore_prompt (void)
 Restore the local Readline prompt display state saved by the most
 recent call to @code{rl_save_prompt}.
 @end deftypefun
 
+@deftypefun int rl_expand_prompt (char *prompt)
+Expand any special character sequences in @var{prompt} and set up the
+local Readline prompt redisplay variables.
+This function is called by @code{readline()}.  It may also be called to
+expand the primary prompt if the @code{rl_on_new_line_with_prompt()}
+function or @code{rl_already_prompted} variable is used.
+It returns the number of visible characters on the last line of the
+(possibly multi-line) prompt.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_set_prompt (const char *prompt)
+Make Readline use @var{prompt} for subsequent redisplay.  This calls
+@code{rl_expand_prompt()} to expand the prompt and sets @code{rl_prompt}
+to the result.
+@end deftypefun
+
 @node Modifying Text
 @subsection Modifying Text
 
-@deftypefun int rl_insert_text (char *text)
+@deftypefun int rl_insert_text (const char *text)
 Insert @var{text} into the line at the current cursor position.
+Returns the number of characters inserted.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @deftypefun int rl_delete_text (int start, int end)
 Delete the text between @var{start} and @var{end} in the current line.
+Returns the number of characters deleted.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @deftypefun {char *} rl_copy_text (int start, int end)
@@ -710,53 +930,113 @@ the text is appended, otherwise prepended.  If the last command was
 not a kill, a new kill ring slot is used.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@node Utility Functions
-@subsection Utility Functions
+@deftypefun int rl_push_macro_input (char *macro)
+Cause @var{macro} to be inserted into the line, as if it had been invoked
+by a key bound to a macro.  Not especially useful; use
+@code{rl_insert_text()} instead.
+@end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_read_key ()
-Return the next character available.  This handles input inserted into
-the input stream via @var{pending input} (@pxref{Readline Variables})
-and @code{rl_stuff_char ()}, macros, and characters read from the keyboard.
+@node Character Input
+@subsection Character Input
+
+@deftypefun int rl_read_key (void)
+Return the next character available from Readline's current input stream.
+This handles input inserted into
+the input stream via @var{rl_pending_input} (@pxref{Readline Variables})
+and @code{rl_stuff_char()}, macros, and characters read from the keyboard.
+While waiting for input, this function will call any function assigned to
+the @code{rl_event_hook} variable.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_getc (FILE *)
-Return the next character available from the keyboard.
+@deftypefun int rl_getc (FILE *stream)
+Return the next character available from @var{stream}, which is assumed to
+be the keyboard.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @deftypefun int rl_stuff_char (int c)
 Insert @var{c} into the Readline input stream.  It will be "read"
 before Readline attempts to read characters from the terminal with
-@code{rl_read_key ()}.
+@code{rl_read_key()}.  Up to 512 characters may be pushed back.
+@code{rl_stuff_char} returns 1 if the character was successfully inserted;
+0 otherwise.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_extend_line_buffer (int len)
-Ensure that @code{rl_line_buffer} has enough space to hold @var{len}
-characters, possibly reallocating it if necessary.
+@deftypefun int rl_execute_next (int c)
+Make @var{c} be the next command to be executed when @code{rl_read_key()}
+is called.  This sets @var{rl_pending_input}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_initialize ()
-Initialize or re-initialize Readline's internal state.
+@deftypefun int rl_clear_pending_input (void)
+Unset @var{rl_pending_input}, effectively negating the effect of any
+previous call to @code{rl_execute_next()}.  This works only if the
+pending input has not already been read with @code{rl_read_key()}.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_set_keyboard_input_timeout (int u)
+While waiting for keyboard input in @code{rl_read_key()}, Readline will
+wait for @var{u} microseconds for input before calling any function
+assigned to @code{rl_event_hook}.  The default waiting period is
+one-tenth of a second.  Returns the old timeout value.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@node Terminal Management
+@subsection Terminal Management
+
+@deftypefun void rl_prep_terminal (int meta_flag)
+Modify the terminal settings for Readline's use, so @code{readline()}
+can read a single character at a time from the keyboard.
+The @var{meta_flag} argument should be non-zero if Readline should
+read eight-bit input.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void rl_deprep_terminal (void)
+Undo the effects of @code{rl_prep_terminal()}, leaving the terminal in
+the state in which it was before the most recent call to
+@code{rl_prep_terminal()}.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void rl_tty_set_default_bindings (Keymap kmap)
+Read the operating system's terminal editing characters (as would be displayed
+by @code{stty}) to their Readline equivalents.  The bindings are performed
+in @var{kmap}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_reset_terminal (char *terminal_name)
+@deftypefun int rl_reset_terminal (const char *terminal_name)
 Reinitialize Readline's idea of the terminal settings using
 @var{terminal_name} as the terminal type (e.g., @code{vt100}).
-If @var{terminal_name} is NULL, the value of the @code{TERM}
+If @var{terminal_name} is @code{NULL}, the value of the @code{TERM}
 environment variable is used.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int alphabetic (int c)
-Return 1 if @var{c} is an alphabetic character.
+@node Utility Functions
+@subsection Utility Functions
+
+@deftypefun void rl_replace_line (const char *text, int clear_undo)
+Replace the contents of @code{rl_line_buffer} with @var{text}.
+The point and mark are preserved, if possible.
+If @var{clear_undo} is non-zero, the undo list associated with the
+current line is cleared.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int numeric (int c)
-Return 1 if @var{c} is a numeric character.
+@deftypefun int rl_extend_line_buffer (int len)
+Ensure that @code{rl_line_buffer} has enough space to hold @var{len}
+characters, possibly reallocating it if necessary.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int ding ()
+@deftypefun int rl_initialize (void)
+Initialize or re-initialize Readline's internal state.
+It's not strictly necessary to call this; @code{readline()} calls it before
+reading any input.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_ding (void)
 Ring the terminal bell, obeying the setting of @code{bell-style}.
 @end deftypefun
 
+@deftypefun int rl_alphabetic (int c)
+Return 1 if @var{c} is an alphabetic character.
+@end deftypefun
+
 @deftypefun void rl_display_match_list (char **matches, int len, int max)
 A convenience function for displaying a list of strings in
 columnar format on Readline's output stream.  @code{matches} is the list
@@ -767,34 +1047,80 @@ the setting of @code{print-completions-horizontally} to select how the
 matches are displayed (@pxref{Readline Init File Syntax}).
 @end deftypefun
 
-The following are implemented as macros, defined in @code{chartypes.h}.
+The following are implemented as macros, defined in @code{chardefs.h}.
+Applications should refrain from using them.
 
-@deftypefun int uppercase_p (int c)
+@deftypefun int _rl_uppercase_p (int c)
 Return 1 if @var{c} is an uppercase alphabetic character.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int lowercase_p (int c)
+@deftypefun int _rl_lowercase_p (int c)
 Return 1 if @var{c} is a lowercase alphabetic character.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int digit_p (int c)
+@deftypefun int _rl_digit_p (int c)
 Return 1 if @var{c} is a numeric character.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int to_upper (int c)
+@deftypefun int _rl_to_upper (int c)
 If @var{c} is a lowercase alphabetic character, return the corresponding
 uppercase character.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int to_lower (int c)
+@deftypefun int _rl_to_lower (int c)
 If @var{c} is an uppercase alphabetic character, return the corresponding
 lowercase character.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int digit_value (int c)
+@deftypefun int _rl_digit_value (int c)
 If @var{c} is a number, return the value it represents.
 @end deftypefun
 
+@node Miscellaneous Functions
+@subsection Miscellaneous Functions
+
+@deftypefun int rl_macro_bind (const char *keyseq, const char *macro, Keymap map)
+Bind the key sequence @var{keyseq} to invoke the macro @var{macro}.
+The binding is performed in @var{map}.  When @var{keyseq} is invoked, the
+@var{macro} will be inserted into the line.  This function is deprecated;
+use @code{rl_generic_bind()} instead.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void rl_macro_dumper (int readable)
+Print the key sequences bound to macros and their values, using
+the current keymap, to @code{rl_outstream}.
+If @var{readable} is non-zero, the list is formatted in such a way
+that it can be made part of an @code{inputrc} file and re-read.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_variable_bind (const char *variable, const char *value)
+Make the Readline variable @var{variable} have @var{value}.
+This behaves as if the readline command
+@samp{set @var{variable} @var{value}} had been executed in an @code{inputrc}
+file (@pxref{Readline Init File Syntax}).
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void rl_variable_dumper (int readable)
+Print the readline variable names and their current values
+to @code{rl_outstream}.
+If @var{readable} is non-zero, the list is formatted in such a way
+that it can be made part of an @code{inputrc} file and re-read.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_set_paren_blink_timeout (int u)
+Set the time interval (in microseconds) that Readline waits when showing
+a balancing character when @code{blink-matching-paren} has been enabled.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun {char *} rl_get_termcap (const char *cap)
+Retrieve the string value of the termcap capability @var{cap}.
+Readline fetches the termcap entry for the current terminal name and
+uses those capabilities to move around the screen line and perform other
+terminal-specific operations, like erasing a line.  Readline does not
+use all of a terminal's capabilities, and this function will return
+values for only those capabilities Readline uses.
+@end deftypefun
+
 @node Alternate Interface
 @subsection Alternate Interface
 
@@ -805,28 +1131,40 @@ on various file descriptors.  To accomodate this need, readline can
 also be invoked as a `callback' function from an event loop.  There
 are functions available to make this easy.
 
-@deftypefun void rl_callback_handler_install (char *prompt, Vfunction *lhandler)
+@deftypefun void rl_callback_handler_install (const char *prompt, rl_vcpfunc_t *lhandler)
 Set up the terminal for readline I/O and display the initial
 expanded value of @var{prompt}.  Save the value of @var{lhandler} to
-use as a callback when a complete line of input has been entered.
+use as a function to call when a complete line of input has been entered.
+The function takes the text of the line as an argument.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun void rl_callback_read_char ()
+@deftypefun void rl_callback_read_char (void)
 Whenever an application determines that keyboard input is available, it
 should call @code{rl_callback_read_char()}, which will read the next
-character from the current input source.  If that character completes the
-line, @code{rl_callback_read_char} will invoke the @var{lhandler}
-function saved by @code{rl_callback_handler_install} to process the
-line.  @code{EOF} is  indicated by calling @var{lhandler} with a
+character from the current input source.
+If that character completes the line, @code{rl_callback_read_char} will
+invoke the @var{lhandler} function saved by @code{rl_callback_handler_install}
+to process the line.
+Before calling the @var{lhandler} function, the terminal settings are
+reset to the values they had before calling
+@code{rl_callback_handler_install}.
+If the @var{lhandler} function returns,
+the terminal settings are modified for Readline's use again.
+@code{EOF} is  indicated by calling @var{lhandler} with a
 @code{NULL} line.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun void rl_callback_handler_remove ()
+@deftypefun void rl_callback_handler_remove (void)
 Restore the terminal to its initial state and remove the line handler.
 This may be called from within a callback as well as independently.
+If the @var{lhandler} installed by @code{rl_callback_handler_install}
+does not exit the program, either this function or the function referred
+to by the value of @code{rl_deprep_term_function} should be called before
+the program exits to reset the terminal settings.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@subsection An Example
+@node A Readline Example
+@subsection A Readline Example
 
 Here is a function which changes lowercase characters to their uppercase
 equivalents, and uppercase characters to lowercase.  If
@@ -875,16 +1213,16 @@ invert_case_line (count, key)
       end = temp;
     @}
 
-  /* Tell readline that we are modifying the line, so it will save
-     the undo information. */
+  /* Tell readline that we are modifying the line,
+     so it will save the undo information. */
   rl_modifying (start, end);
 
   for (i = start; i != end; i++)
     @{
-      if (uppercase_p (rl_line_buffer[i]))
-        rl_line_buffer[i] = to_lower (rl_line_buffer[i]);
-      else if (lowercase_p (rl_line_buffer[i]))
-        rl_line_buffer[i] = to_upper (rl_line_buffer[i]);
+      if (_rl_uppercase_p (rl_line_buffer[i]))
+        rl_line_buffer[i] = _rl_to_lower (rl_line_buffer[i]);
+      else if (_rl_lowercase_p (rl_line_buffer[i]))
+        rl_line_buffer[i] = _rl_to_upper (rl_line_buffer[i]);
     @}
   /* Move point to on top of the last character changed. */
   rl_point = (direction == 1) ? end - 1 : start;
@@ -897,44 +1235,44 @@ invert_case_line (count, key)
 
 Signals are asynchronous events sent to a process by the Unix kernel,
 sometimes on behalf of another process.  They are intended to indicate
-exceptional events, like a user pressing the interrupt key on his
-terminal, or a network connection being broken.  There is a class of
-signals that can be sent to the process currently reading input from
-the keyboard.  Since Readline changes the terminal attributes when it
-is called, it needs to perform special processing when a signal is
-received to restore the terminal to a sane state, or provide application
-writers with functions to do so manually.
+exceptional events, like a user pressing the interrupt key on his terminal,
+or a network connection being broken.  There is a class of signals that can
+be sent to the process currently reading input from the keyboard.  Since
+Readline changes the terminal attributes when it is called, it needs to
+perform special processing when such a signal is received in order to
+restore the terminal to a sane state, or provide application writers with
+functions to do so manually. 
 
 Readline contains an internal signal handler that is installed for a
 number of signals (@code{SIGINT}, @code{SIGQUIT}, @code{SIGTERM},
 @code{SIGALRM}, @code{SIGTSTP}, @code{SIGTTIN}, and @code{SIGTTOU}).
 When one of these signals is received, the signal handler
 will reset the terminal attributes to those that were in effect before
-@code{readline ()} was called, reset the signal handling to what it was
-before @code{readline ()} was called, and resend the signal to the calling
+@code{readline()} was called, reset the signal handling to what it was
+before @code{readline()} was called, and resend the signal to the calling
 application.
 If and when the calling application's signal handler returns, Readline
 will reinitialize the terminal and continue to accept input.
 When a @code{SIGINT} is received, the Readline signal handler performs
 some additional work, which will cause any partially-entered line to be
-aborted (see the description of @code{rl_free_line_state ()}).
+aborted (see the description of @code{rl_free_line_state()} below).
 
 There is an additional Readline signal handler, for @code{SIGWINCH}, which
 the kernel sends to a process whenever the terminal's size changes (for
 example, if a user resizes an @code{xterm}).  The Readline @code{SIGWINCH}
-handler updates Readline's internal screen size state, and then calls any
-@code{SIGWINCH} signal handler the calling application has installed. 
+handler updates Readline's internal screen size information, and then calls
+any @code{SIGWINCH} signal handler the calling application has installed. 
 Readline calls the application's @code{SIGWINCH} signal handler without
 resetting the terminal to its original state.  If the application's signal
 handler does more than update its idea of the terminal size and return (for
 example, a @code{longjmp} back to a main processing loop), it @emph{must}
-call @code{rl_cleanup_after_signal ()} (described below), to restore the
+call @code{rl_cleanup_after_signal()} (described below), to restore the
 terminal state. 
 
 Readline provides two variables that allow application writers to
 control whether or not it will catch certain signals and act on them
 when they are received.  It is important that applications change the
-values of these variables only when calling @code{readline ()}, not in
+values of these variables only when calling @code{readline()}, not in
 a signal handler, so Readline's internal signal state is not corrupted.
 
 @deftypevar int rl_catch_signals
@@ -960,7 +1298,7 @@ and internal state cleanup upon receipt of a signal.
 
 @deftypefun void rl_cleanup_after_signal (void)
 This function will reset the state of the terminal to what it was before
-@code{readline ()} was called, and remove the Readline signal handlers for
+@code{readline()} was called, and remove the Readline signal handlers for
 all signals, depending on the values of @code{rl_catch_signals} and
 @code{rl_catch_sigwinch}.
 @end deftypefun
@@ -969,7 +1307,7 @@ all signals, depending on the values of @code{rl_catch_signals} and
 This will free any partial state associated with the current input line
 (undo information, any partial history entry, any partially-entered
 keyboard macro, and any partially-entered numeric argument).  This
-should be called before @code{rl_cleanup_after_signal ()}.  The
+should be called before @code{rl_cleanup_after_signal()}.  The
 Readline signal handler for @code{SIGINT} calls this to abort the
 current input line.
 @end deftypefun
@@ -981,11 +1319,26 @@ handlers, depending on the values of @code{rl_catch_signals} and
 @end deftypefun
 
 If an application does not wish Readline to catch @code{SIGWINCH}, it may
-call @code{rl_resize_terminal ()} to force Readline to update its idea of
-the terminal size when a @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
+call @code{rl_resize_terminal()} or @code{rl_set_screen_size()} to force
+Readline to update its idea of the terminal size when a @code{SIGWINCH}
+is received.
 
 @deftypefun void rl_resize_terminal (void)
-Update Readline's internal screen size.
+Update Readline's internal screen size by reading values from the kernel.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun void rl_set_screen_size (int rows, int cols)
+Set Readline's idea of the terminal size to @var{rows} rows and
+@var{cols} columns.
+@end deftypefun
+
+If an application does not want to install a @code{SIGWINCH} handler, but
+is still interested in the screen dimensions, Readline's idea of the screen
+size may be queried.
+
+@deftypefun void rl_get_screen_size (int *rows, int *cols)
+Return Readline's idea of the terminal's size in the
+variables pointed to by the arguments.
 @end deftypefun
 
 The following functions install and remove Readline's signal handlers.
@@ -999,7 +1352,7 @@ Install Readline's signal handler for @code{SIGINT}, @code{SIGQUIT},
 
 @deftypefun int rl_clear_signals (void)
 Remove all of the Readline signal handlers installed by
-@code{rl_set_signals ()}.
+@code{rl_set_signals()}.
 @end deftypefun
 
 @node Custom Completers
@@ -1034,30 +1387,31 @@ There are three major functions used to perform completion:
 
 @enumerate
 @item
-The user-interface function @code{rl_complete ()}.  This function is
-called with the same arguments as other Readline
-functions intended for interactive use:  @var{count} and
-@var{invoking_key}.  It isolates the word to be completed and calls
-@code{completion_matches ()} to generate a list of possible completions.
+The user-interface function @code{rl_complete()}.  This function is
+called with the same arguments as other bindable Readline functions:
+@var{count} and @var{invoking_key}.
+It isolates the word to be completed and calls
+@code{rl_completion_matches()} to generate a list of possible completions.
 It then either lists the possible completions, inserts the possible
 completions, or actually performs the
 completion, depending on which behavior is desired.
 
 @item
-The internal function @code{completion_matches ()} uses your
-@dfn{generator} function to generate the list of possible matches, and
-then returns the array of these matches.  You should place the address
-of your generator function in @code{rl_completion_entry_function}.
+The internal function @code{rl_completion_matches()} uses an
+application-supplied @dfn{generator} function to generate the list of
+possible matches, and then returns the array of these matches.
+The caller should place the address of its generator function in
+@code{rl_completion_entry_function}.
 
 @item
 The generator function is called repeatedly from
-@code{completion_matches ()}, returning a string each time.  The
+@code{rl_completion_matches()}, returning a string each time.  The
 arguments to the generator function are @var{text} and @var{state}.
 @var{text} is the partial word to be completed.  @var{state} is zero the
 first time the function is called, allowing the generator to perform
 any necessary initialization, and a positive non-zero integer for
-each subsequent call.  When the generator function returns
-@code{(char *)NULL} this signals @code{completion_matches ()} that there are
+each subsequent call.  The generator function returns
+@code{(char *)NULL} to inform @code{rl_completion_matches()} that there are
 no more possibilities left.  Usually the generator function computes the
 list of possible completions when @var{state} is zero, and returns them
 one at a time on subsequent calls.  Each string the generator function
@@ -1069,14 +1423,15 @@ frees the strings when it has finished with them.
 @deftypefun int rl_complete (int ignore, int invoking_key)
 Complete the word at or before point.  You have supplied the function
 that does the initial simple matching selection algorithm (see
-@code{completion_matches ()}).  The default is to do filename completion.
+@code{rl_completion_matches()}).  The default is to do filename completion.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_completion_entry_function
-This is a pointer to the generator function for @code{completion_matches
-()}.  If the value of @code{rl_completion_entry_function} is
-@code{(Function *)NULL} then the default filename generator function,
-@code{filename_completion_function ()}, is used.
+@deftypevar {rl_compentry_func_t *} rl_completion_entry_function
+This is a pointer to the generator function for
+@code{rl_completion_matches()}.
+If the value of @code{rl_completion_entry_function} is
+@code{NULL} then the default filename generator
+function, @code{rl_filename_completion_function()}, is used.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @node Completion Functions
@@ -1097,47 +1452,55 @@ performing partial completion.
 @deftypefun int rl_complete (int ignore, int invoking_key)
 Complete the word at or before point.  You have supplied the function
 that does the initial simple matching selection algorithm (see
-@code{completion_matches ()} and @code{rl_completion_entry_function}).
+@code{rl_completion_matches()} and @code{rl_completion_entry_function}).
 The default is to do filename
-completion.  This calls @code{rl_complete_internal ()} with an
+completion.  This calls @code{rl_complete_internal()} with an
 argument depending on @var{invoking_key}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_possible_completions (int count, int invoking_key))
+@deftypefun int rl_possible_completions (int count, int invoking_key)
 List the possible completions.  See description of @code{rl_complete
-()}.  This calls @code{rl_complete_internal ()} with an argument of
+()}.  This calls @code{rl_complete_internal()} with an argument of
 @samp{?}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun int rl_insert_completions (int count, int invoking_key))
+@deftypefun int rl_insert_completions (int count, int invoking_key)
 Insert the list of possible completions into the line, deleting the
-partially-completed word.  See description of @code{rl_complete ()}.
-This calls @code{rl_complete_internal ()} with an argument of @samp{*}.
+partially-completed word.  See description of @code{rl_complete()}.
+This calls @code{rl_complete_internal()} with an argument of @samp{*}.
+@end deftypefun
+
+@deftypefun int rl_completion_mode (rl_command_func_t *cfunc)
+Returns the apppriate value to pass to @code{rl_complete_internal()}
+depending on whether @var{cfunc} was called twice in succession and
+the value of the @code{show-all-if-ambiguous} variable.
+Application-specific completion functions may use this function to present
+the same interface as @code{rl_complete()}.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char **} completion_matches (char *text, CPFunction *entry_func)
-Returns an array of @code{(char *)} which is a list of completions for
-@var{text}.  If there are no completions, returns @code{(char **)NULL}.
+@deftypefun {char **} rl_completion_matches (const char *text, rl_compentry_func_t *entry_func)
+Returns an array of strings which is a list of completions for
+@var{text}.  If there are no completions, returns @code{NULL}.
 The first entry in the returned array is the substitution for @var{text}.
 The remaining entries are the possible completions.  The array is
 terminated with a @code{NULL} pointer.
 
 @var{entry_func} is a function of two args, and returns a
-@code{(char *)}.  The first argument is @var{text}.  The second is a
+@code{char *}.  The first argument is @var{text}.  The second is a
 state argument; it is zero on the first call, and non-zero on subsequent
 calls.  @var{entry_func} returns a @code{NULL}  pointer to the caller
 when there are no more matches.
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char *} filename_completion_function (char *text, int state)
-A generator function for filename completion in the general case.  Note
-that completion in Bash is a little different because of all
-the pathnames that must be followed when looking up completions for a
-command.  The Bash source is a useful reference for writing custom
-completion functions.
+@deftypefun {char *} rl_filename_completion_function (const char *text, int state)
+A generator function for filename completion in the general case.
+@var{text} is a partial filename.
+The Bash source is a useful reference for writing custom
+completion functions (the Bash completion functions call this and other
+Readline functions).
 @end deftypefun
 
-@deftypefun {char *} username_completion_function (char *text, int state)
+@deftypefun {char *} rl_username_completion_function (const char *text, int state)
 A completion generator for usernames.  @var{text} contains a partial
 username preceded by a random character (usually @samp{~}).  As with all
 completion generators, @var{state} is zero on the first call and non-zero
@@ -1147,26 +1510,29 @@ for subsequent calls.
 @node Completion Variables
 @subsection Completion Variables
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_completion_entry_function
-A pointer to the generator function for @code{completion_matches ()}.
-@code{NULL} means to use @code{filename_completion_function ()}, the default
+@deftypevar {rl_compentry_func_t *} rl_completion_entry_function
+A pointer to the generator function for @code{rl_completion_matches()}.
+@code{NULL} means to use @code{rl_filename_completion_function()}, the default
 filename completer.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {CPPFunction *} rl_attempted_completion_function
+@deftypevar {rl_completion_func_t *} rl_attempted_completion_function
 A pointer to an alternative function to create matches.
 The function is called with @var{text}, @var{start}, and @var{end}.
-@var{start} and @var{end} are indices in @code{rl_line_buffer} saying
-what the boundaries of @var{text} are.  If this function exists and
-returns @code{NULL}, or if this variable is set to @code{NULL}, then
-@code{rl_complete ()} will call the value of
+@var{start} and @var{end} are indices in @code{rl_line_buffer} defining
+the boundaries of @var{text}, which is a character string.
+If this function exists and returns @code{NULL}, or if this variable is
+set to @code{NULL}, then @code{rl_complete()} will call the value of
 @code{rl_completion_entry_function} to generate matches, otherwise the
 array of strings returned will be used.
+If this function sets the @code{rl_attempted_completion_over}
+variable to a non-zero value, Readline will not perform its default
+completion even if this function returns no matches.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {CPFunction *} rl_filename_quoting_function
-A pointer to a function that will quote a filename in an application-
-specific fashion.  This is called if filename completion is being
+@deftypevar {rl_quote_func_t *} rl_filename_quoting_function
+A pointer to a function that will quote a filename in an
+application-specific fashion.  This is called if filename completion is being
 attempted and one of the characters in @code{rl_filename_quote_characters}
 appears in a completed filename.  The function is called with
 @var{text}, @var{match_type}, and @var{quote_pointer}.  The @var{text}
@@ -1178,7 +1544,7 @@ to any opening quote character the user typed.  Some functions choose
 to reset this character.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {CPFunction *} rl_filename_dequoting_function
+@deftypevar {rl_dequote_func_t *} rl_filename_dequoting_function
 A pointer to a function that will remove application-specific quoting
 characters from a filename before completion is attempted, so those
 characters do not interfere with matching the text against names in
@@ -1188,52 +1554,83 @@ that delimits the filename (usually @samp{'} or @samp{"}).  If
 @var{quote_char} is zero, the filename was not in an embedded string.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_char_is_quoted_p
+@deftypevar {rl_linebuf_func_t *} rl_char_is_quoted_p
 A pointer to a function to call that determines whether or not a specific
 character in the line buffer is quoted, according to whatever quoting
-mechanism the program calling readline uses.  The function is called with
+mechanism the program calling Readline uses.  The function is called with
 two arguments: @var{text}, the text of the line, and @var{index}, the
 index of the character in the line.  It is used to decide whether a
 character found in @code{rl_completer_word_break_characters} should be
 used to break words for the completer.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar int rl_completion_query_items
-Up to this many items will be displayed in response to a
-possible-completions call.  After that, we ask the user if she is sure
-she wants to see them all.  The default value is 100.
+@deftypevar {rl_compignore_func_t *} rl_ignore_some_completions_function
+This function, if defined, is called by the completer when real filename
+completion is done, after all the matching names have been generated.
+It is passed a @code{NULL} terminated array of matches.
+The first element (@code{matches[0]}) is the
+maximal substring common to all matches. This function can
+re-arrange the list of matches as required, but each element deleted
+from the array must be freed.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {rl_icppfunc_t *} rl_directory_completion_hook
+This function, if defined, is allowed to modify the directory portion
+of filenames Readline completes.  It is called with the address of a
+string (the current directory name) as an argument, and may modify that string.
+If the string is replaced with a new string, the old value should be freed.
+Any modified directory name should have a trailing slash.
+The modified value will be displayed as part of the completion, replacing
+the directory portion of the pathname the user typed.
+It returns an integer that should be non-zero if the function modifies
+its directory argument.
+It could be used to expand symbolic links or shell variables in pathnames.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar {rl_compdisp_func_t *} rl_completion_display_matches_hook
+If non-zero, then this is the address of a function to call when
+completing a word would normally display the list of possible matches.
+This function is called in lieu of Readline displaying the list.
+It takes three arguments:
+(@code{char **}@var{matches}, @code{int} @var{num_matches}, @code{int} @var{max_length})
+where @var{matches} is the array of matching strings,
+@var{num_matches} is the number of strings in that array, and
+@var{max_length} is the length of the longest string in that array.
+Readline provides a convenience function, @code{rl_display_match_list},
+that takes care of doing the display to Readline's output stream.  That
+function may be called from this hook.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_basic_word_break_characters
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_basic_word_break_characters
 The basic list of characters that signal a break between words for the
 completer routine.  The default value of this variable is the characters
-which break words for completion in Bash, i.e.,
+which break words for completion in Bash:
 @code{" \t\n\"\\'`@@$><=;|&@{("}.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_basic_quote_characters
-List of quote characters which can cause a word break.
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_basic_quote_characters
+A list of quote characters which can cause a word break.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_completer_word_break_characters
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_completer_word_break_characters
 The list of characters that signal a break between words for
-@code{rl_complete_internal ()}.  The default list is the value of
+@code{rl_complete_internal()}.  The default list is the value of
 @code{rl_basic_word_break_characters}.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_completer_quote_characters
-List of characters which can be used to quote a substring of the line.
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_completer_quote_characters
+A list of characters which can be used to quote a substring of the line.
 Completion occurs on the entire substring, and within the substring
 @code{rl_completer_word_break_characters} are treated as any other character,
 unless they also appear within this list.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_filename_quote_characters
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_filename_quote_characters
 A list of characters that cause a filename to be quoted by the completer
 when they appear in a completed filename.  The default is the null string.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {char *} rl_special_prefixes
+@deftypevar {const char *} rl_special_prefixes
 The list of characters that are word break characters, but should be
 left in @var{text} when it is passed to the completion function.
 Programs can use this to help determine what kind of completing to do.
@@ -1241,6 +1638,12 @@ For instance, Bash sets this variable to "$@@" so that it can complete
 shell variables and hostnames.
 @end deftypevar
 
+@deftypevar int rl_completion_query_items
+Up to this many items will be displayed in response to a
+possible-completions call.  After that, we ask the user if she is sure
+she wants to see them all.  The default value is 100.
+@end deftypevar
+
 @deftypevar {int} rl_completion_append_character
 When a single completion alternative matches at the end of the command
 line, this character is appended to the inserted completion text.  The
@@ -1251,8 +1654,27 @@ provide the ``most sensible word separator character'' according to
 an application-specific command line syntax specification.
 @end deftypevar
 
+@deftypevar int rl_completion_suppress_append
+If non-zero, @var{rl_completion_append_character} is not appended to
+matches at the end of the command line, as described above.  It is
+set to 0 before any application-specific completion function is called.
+@end deftypevar
+
+@deftypevar int rl_completion_mark_symlink_dirs
+If non-zero, a slash will be appended to completed filenames that are
+symbolic links to directory names, subject to the value of the
+user-settable @var{mark-directories} variable.
+This variable exists so that application completion functions can
+override the user's global preference (set via the
+@var{mark-symlinked-directories} Readline variable) if appropriate.
+This variable is set to the user's preference before any
+application completion function is called, so unless that function
+modifies the value, the user's preferences are honored.
+@end deftypevar
+
 @deftypevar int rl_ignore_completion_duplicates
-If non-zero, then disallow duplicates in the matches.  Default is 1.
+If non-zero, then duplicates in the matches are removed.
+The default is 1.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar int rl_filename_completion_desired
@@ -1260,8 +1682,9 @@ Non-zero means that the results of the matches are to be treated as
 filenames.  This is @emph{always} zero on entry, and can only be changed
 within a completion entry generator function.  If it is set to a non-zero
 value, directory names have a slash appended and Readline attempts to
-quote completed filenames if they contain any embedded word break
-characters.
+quote completed filenames if they contain any characters in
+@code{rl_filename_quote_characters} and @code{rl_filename_quoting_desired}
+is set to a non-zero value.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @deftypevar int rl_filename_quoting_desired
@@ -1274,40 +1697,23 @@ function.  The quoting is effected via a call to the function pointed to
 by @code{rl_filename_quoting_function}.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar int rl_inhibit_completion
-If this variable is non-zero, completion is inhibit<ed.  The completion
-character will be inserted as any other bound to @code{self-insert}.
+@deftypevar int rl_attempted_completion_over
+If an application-specific completion function assigned to
+@code{rl_attempted_completion_function} sets this variable to a non-zero
+value, Readline will not perform its default filename completion even
+if the application's completion function returns no matches.
+It should be set only by an application's completion function.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_ignore_some_completions_function
-This function, if defined, is called by the completer when real filename
-completion is done, after all the matching names have been generated.
-It is passed a @code{NULL} terminated array of matches.
-The first element (@code{matches[0]}) is the
-maximal substring common to all matches. This function can
-re-arrange the list of matches as required, but each element deleted
-from the array must be freed.
+@deftypevar int rl_completion_type
+Set to a character describing the type of completion Readline is currently
+attempting; see the description of @code{rl_complete_internal()}
+(@pxref{Completion Functions}) for the list of characters.
 @end deftypevar
 
-@deftypevar {Function *} rl_directory_completion_hook
-This function, if defined, is allowed to modify the directory portion
-of filenames Readline completes.  It is called with the address of a
-string (the current directory name) as an argument.  It could be used
-to expand symbolic links or shell variables in pathnames.
-@end deftypevar
-
-@deftypevar {VFunction *} rl_completion_display_matches_hook
-If non-zero, then this is the address of a function to call when
-completing a word would normally display the list of possible matches.
-This function is called in lieu of Readline displaying the list.
-It takes three arguments:
-(@code{char **}@var{matches}, @code{int} @var{num_matches}, @code{int} @var{max_length})
-where @var{matches} is the array of matching strings,
-@var{num_matches} is the number of strings in that array, and
-@var{max_length} is the length of the longest string in that array.
-Readline provides a convenience function, @code{rl_display_match_list},
-that takes care of doing the display to Readline's output stream.  That
-function may be called from this hook.
+@deftypevar int rl_inhibit_completion
+If this variable is non-zero, completion is inhibited.  The completion
+character will be inserted as any other bound to @code{self-insert}.
 @end deftypevar
 
 @node A Short Completion Example
@@ -1334,19 +1740,25 @@ history list.
 #include <readline/readline.h>
 #include <readline/history.h>
 
-extern char *getwd ();
 extern char *xmalloc ();
 
 /* The names of functions that actually do the manipulation. */
-int com_list (), com_view (), com_rename (), com_stat (), com_pwd ();
-int com_delete (), com_help (), com_cd (), com_quit ();
+int com_list __P((char *));
+int com_view __P((char *));
+int com_rename __P((char *));
+int com_stat __P((char *));
+int com_pwd __P((char *));
+int com_delete __P((char *));
+int com_help __P((char *));
+int com_cd __P((char *));
+int com_quit __P((char *));
 
 /* A structure which contains information on the commands this program
    can understand. */
 
 typedef struct @{
   char *name;			/* User printable name of the function. */
-  Function *func;		/* Function to call to do the job. */
+  rl_icpfunc_t *func;		/* Function to call to do the job. */
   char *doc;			/* Documentation for this function.  */
 @} COMMAND;
 
@@ -1362,7 +1774,7 @@ COMMAND commands[] = @{
   @{ "rename", com_rename, "Rename FILE to NEWNAME" @},
   @{ "stat", com_stat, "Print out statistics on FILE" @},
   @{ "view", com_view, "View the contents of FILE" @},
-  @{ (char *)NULL, (Function *)NULL, (char *)NULL @}
+  @{ (char *)NULL, (rl_icpfunc_t *)NULL, (char *)NULL @}
 @};
 
 /* Forward declarations. */
@@ -1372,7 +1784,7 @@ COMMAND *find_command ();
 /* The name of this program, as taken from argv[0]. */
 char *progname;
 
-/* When non-zero, this global means the user is done using this program. */
+/* When non-zero, this means the user is done using this program. */
 int done;
 
 char *
@@ -1502,29 +1914,29 @@ stripwhite (string)
 /*                                                                  */
 /* **************************************************************** */
 
-char *command_generator ();
-char **fileman_completion ();
+char *command_generator __P((const char *, int));
+char **fileman_completion __P((const char *, int, int));
 
-/* Tell the GNU Readline library how to complete.  We want to try to complete
-   on command names if this is the first word in the line, or on filenames
-   if not. */
+/* Tell the GNU Readline library how to complete.  We want to try to
+   complete on command names if this is the first word in the line, or
+   on filenames if not. */
 initialize_readline ()
 @{
   /* Allow conditional parsing of the ~/.inputrc file. */
   rl_readline_name = "FileMan";
 
   /* Tell the completer that we want a crack first. */
-  rl_attempted_completion_function = (CPPFunction *)fileman_completion;
+  rl_attempted_completion_function = fileman_completion;
 @}
 
-/* Attempt to complete on the contents of TEXT.  START and END bound the
-   region of rl_line_buffer that contains the word to complete.  TEXT is
-   the word to complete.  We can use the entire contents of rl_line_buffer
-   in case we want to do some simple parsing.  Return the array of matches,
-   or NULL if there aren't any. */
+/* Attempt to complete on the contents of TEXT.  START and END
+   bound the region of rl_line_buffer that contains the word to
+   complete.  TEXT is the word to complete.  We can use the entire
+   contents of rl_line_buffer in case we want to do some simple
+   parsing.  Returnthe array of matches, or NULL if there aren't any. */
 char **
 fileman_completion (text, start, end)
-     char *text;
+     const char *text;
      int start, end;
 @{
   char **matches;
@@ -1535,32 +1947,33 @@ fileman_completion (text, start, end)
      to complete.  Otherwise it is the name of a file in the current
      directory. */
   if (start == 0)
-    matches = completion_matches (text, command_generator);
+    matches = rl_completion_matches (text, command_generator);
 
   return (matches);
 @}
 
-/* Generator function for command completion.  STATE lets us know whether
-   to start from scratch; without any state (i.e. STATE == 0), then we
-   start at the top of the list. */
+/* Generator function for command completion.  STATE lets us
+   know whether to start from scratch; without any state
+   (i.e. STATE == 0), then we start at the top of the list. */
 char *
 command_generator (text, state)
-     char *text;
+     const char *text;
      int state;
 @{
   static int list_index, len;
   char *name;
 
-  /* If this is a new word to complete, initialize now.  This includes
-     saving the length of TEXT for efficiency, and initializing the index
-     variable to 0. */
+  /* If this is a new word to complete, initialize now.  This
+     includes saving the length of TEXT for efficiency, and
+     initializing the index variable to 0. */
   if (!state)
     @{
       list_index = 0;
       len = strlen (text);
     @}
 
-  /* Return the next name which partially matches from the command list. */
+  /* Return the next name which partially matches from the
+     command list. */
   while (name = commands[list_index].name)
     @{
       list_index++;
@@ -1705,7 +2118,7 @@ com_pwd (ignore)
 @{
   char dir[1024], *s;
 
-  s = getwd (dir);
+  s = getcwd (dir, sizeof(dir) - 1);
   if (s == 0)
     @{
       printf ("Error getting pwd: %s\n", dir);
@@ -1716,7 +2129,8 @@ com_pwd (ignore)
   return 0;
 @}
 
-/* The user wishes to quit using this program.  Just set DONE non-zero. */
+/* The user wishes to quit using this program.  Just set DONE
+   non-zero. */
 com_quit (arg)
      char *arg;
 @{
@@ -1729,12 +2143,13 @@ too_dangerous (caller)
      char *caller;
 @{
   fprintf (stderr,
-           "%s: Too dangerous for me to distribute.  Write it yourself.\n",
+           "%s: Too dangerous for me to distribute.\n"
            caller);
+  fprintf (stderr, "Write it yourself.\n");
 @}
 
-/* Return non-zero if ARG is a valid argument for CALLER, else print
-   an error message and return zero. */
+/* Return non-zero if ARG is a valid argument for CALLER,
+   else print an error message and return zero. */
 int
 valid_argument (caller, arg)
      char *caller, *arg;
diff --git a/readline/doc/rluser.texinfo b/readline/doc/rluser.texinfo
index 6990b5c..94f851e 100644
--- a/readline/doc/rluser.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/rluser.texinfo
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ use these features.  There is a document entitled "readline.texinfo"
 which contains both end-user and programmer documentation for the
 GNU Readline Library.
 
-Copyright (C) 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
 Authored by Brian Fox and Chet Ramey.
 
@@ -72,11 +72,11 @@ used by several different programs, including Bash.
 The following paragraphs describe the notation used to represent
 keystrokes.
 
-The text @key{C-k} is read as `Control-K' and describes the character
+The text @kbd{C-k} is read as `Control-K' and describes the character
 produced when the @key{k} key is pressed while the Control key
 is depressed.
 
-The text @key{M-k} is read as `Meta-K' and describes the character
+The text @kbd{M-k} is read as `Meta-K' and describes the character
 produced when the Meta key (if you have one) is depressed, and the @key{k}
 key is pressed.
 The Meta key is labeled @key{ALT} on many keyboards.
@@ -89,11 +89,11 @@ Compose key for typing accented characters.
 
 If you do not have a Meta or @key{ALT} key, or another key working as
 a Meta key, the identical keystroke can be generated by typing @key{ESC}
-@i{first}, and then typing @key{k}.
+@emph{first}, and then typing @key{k}.
 Either process is known as @dfn{metafying} the @key{k} key.
 
-The text @key{M-C-k} is read as `Meta-Control-k' and describes the
-character produced by @dfn{metafying} @key{C-k}.
+The text @kbd{M-C-k} is read as `Meta-Control-k' and describes the
+character produced by @dfn{metafying} @kbd{C-k}.
 
 In addition, several keys have their own names.  Specifically,
 @key{DEL}, @key{ESC}, @key{LFD}, @key{SPC}, @key{RET}, and @key{TAB} all
@@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ as you type it in, allowing you to just fix your typo, and not forcing
 you to retype the majority of the line.  Using these editing commands,
 you move the cursor to the place that needs correction, and delete or
 insert the text of the corrections.  Then, when you are satisfied with
-the line, you simply press @key{RETURN}.  You do not have to be at the
-end of the line to press @key{RETURN}; the entire line is accepted
+the line, you simply press @key{RET}.  You do not have to be at the
+end of the line to press @key{RET}; the entire line is accepted
 regardless of the location of the cursor within the line.
 
 @menu
@@ -140,9 +140,9 @@ erase character to back up and delete the mistyped character.
 
 Sometimes you may mistype a character, and
 not notice the error until you have typed several other characters.  In
-that case, you can type @key{C-b} to move the cursor to the left, and then
+that case, you can type @kbd{C-b} to move the cursor to the left, and then
 correct your mistake.  Afterwards, you can move the cursor to the right
-with @key{C-f}.
+with @kbd{C-f}.
 
 When you add text in the middle of a line, you will notice that characters
 to the right of the cursor are `pushed over' to make room for the text
@@ -152,17 +152,17 @@ blank space created by the removal of the text.  A list of the bare
 essentials for editing the text of an input line follows.
 
 @table @asis
-@item @key{C-b}
+@item @kbd{C-b}
 Move back one character.
-@item @key{C-f}
+@item @kbd{C-f}
 Move forward one character.
 @item @key{DEL} or @key{Backspace}
 Delete the character to the left of the cursor.
-@item @key{C-d}
+@item @kbd{C-d}
 Delete the character underneath the cursor.
 @item @w{Printing characters}
 Insert the character into the line at the cursor.
-@item @key{C-_} or @key{C-x C-u}
+@item @kbd{C-_} or @kbd{C-x C-u}
 Undo the last editing command.  You can undo all the way back to an
 empty line.
 @end table
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ empty line.
 @noindent
 (Depending on your configuration, the @key{Backspace} key be set to
 delete the character to the left of the cursor and the @key{DEL} key set
-to delete the character underneath the cursor, like @key{C-d}, rather
+to delete the character underneath the cursor, like @kbd{C-d}, rather
 than the character to the left of the cursor.)
 
 @node Readline Movement Commands
@@ -179,11 +179,11 @@ than the character to the left of the cursor.)
 
 The above table describes the most basic keystrokes that you need
 in order to do editing of the input line.  For your convenience, many
-other commands have been added in addition to @key{C-b}, @key{C-f},
-@key{C-d}, and @key{DEL}.  Here are some commands for moving more rapidly
+other commands have been added in addition to @kbd{C-b}, @kbd{C-f},
+@kbd{C-d}, and @key{DEL}.  Here are some commands for moving more rapidly
 about the line.
 
-@table @key
+@table @kbd
 @item C-a
 Move to the start of the line.
 @item C-e
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ Move backward a word.
 Clear the screen, reprinting the current line at the top.
 @end table
 
-Notice how @key{C-f} moves forward a character, while @key{M-f} moves
+Notice how @kbd{C-f} moves forward a character, while @kbd{M-f} moves
 forward a word.  It is a loose convention that control keystrokes
 operate on characters while meta keystrokes operate on words.
 
@@ -225,36 +225,36 @@ another line.
 
 Here is the list of commands for killing text.
 
-@table @key
+@table @kbd
 @item C-k
 Kill the text from the current cursor position to the end of the line.
 
 @item M-d
 Kill from the cursor to the end of the current word, or, if between
 words, to the end of the next word.
-Word boundaries are the same as those used by @key{M-f}.
+Word boundaries are the same as those used by @kbd{M-f}.
 
-@item M-DEL
-Kill from the cursor the start of the previous word, or, if between
+@item M-@key{DEL}
+Kill from the cursor the start of the current word, or, if between
 words, to the start of the previous word.
-Word boundaries are the same as those used by @key{M-b}.
+Word boundaries are the same as those used by @kbd{M-b}.
 
 @item C-w
 Kill from the cursor to the previous whitespace.  This is different than
-@key{M-DEL} because the word boundaries differ.
+@kbd{M-@key{DEL}} because the word boundaries differ.
 
 @end table
 
 Here is how to @dfn{yank} the text back into the line.  Yanking
 means to copy the most-recently-killed text from the kill buffer.
 
-@table @key
+@table @kbd
 @item C-y
 Yank the most recently killed text back into the buffer at the cursor.
 
 @item M-y
 Rotate the kill-ring, and yank the new top.  You can only do this if
-the prior command is @key{C-y} or @key{M-y}.
+the prior command is @kbd{C-y} or @kbd{M-y}.
 @end table
 
 @node Readline Arguments
@@ -272,7 +272,8 @@ digits before the command.  If the first `digit' typed is a minus
 sign (@samp{-}), then the sign of the argument will be negative.  Once
 you have typed one meta digit to get the argument started, you can type
 the remainder of the digits, and then the command.  For example, to give
-the @key{C-d} command an argument of 10, you could type @samp{M-1 0 C-d}.
+the @kbd{C-d} command an argument of 10, you could type @samp{M-1 0 C-d},
+which will delete the next ten characters on the input line.
 
 @node Searching
 @subsection Searching for Commands in the History
@@ -282,7 +283,7 @@ Readline provides commands for searching through the command history
 (@pxref{Bash History Facilities})
 @end ifset
 for lines containing a specified string.
-There are two search modes:  @var{incremental} and @var{non-incremental}.
+There are two search modes:  @dfn{incremental} and @dfn{non-incremental}.
 
 Incremental searches begin before the user has finished typing the
 search string.
@@ -291,23 +292,29 @@ the next entry from the history matching the string typed so far.
 An incremental search requires only as many characters as needed to
 find the desired history entry.
 To search backward in the history for a particular string, type
-@key{C-r}.  Typing @key{C-s} searches forward through the history.
+@kbd{C-r}.  Typing @kbd{C-s} searches forward through the history.
 The characters present in the value of the @code{isearch-terminators} variable
 are used to terminate an incremental search.
 If that variable has not been assigned a value, the @key{ESC} and
-@key{C-J} characters will terminate an incremental search.
-@key{C-g} will abort an incremental search and restore the original line.
+@kbd{C-J} characters will terminate an incremental search.
+@kbd{C-g} will abort an incremental search and restore the original line.
 When the search is terminated, the history entry containing the
 search string becomes the current line.
 
-To find other matching entries in the history list, type @key{C-r} or
-@key{C-s} as appropriate.
+To find other matching entries in the history list, type @kbd{C-r} or
+@kbd{C-s} as appropriate.
 This will search backward or forward in the history for the next
 entry matching the search string typed so far.
 Any other key sequence bound to a Readline command will terminate
 the search and execute that command.
 For instance, a @key{RET} will terminate the search and accept
 the line, thereby executing the command from the history list.
+A movement command will terminate the search, make the last line found
+the current line, and begin editing.
+
+Readline remembers the last incremental search string.  If two
+@kbd{C-r}s are typed without any intervening characters defining a new
+search string, any remembered search string is used.
 
 Non-incremental searches read the entire search string before starting
 to search for matching history lines.  The search string may be
@@ -324,10 +331,10 @@ Any user can customize programs that use Readline by putting
 commands in an @dfn{inputrc} file, conventionally in his home directory.
 The name of this
 @ifset BashFeatures
-file is taken from the value of the shell variable @code{INPUTRC}.  If
+file is taken from the value of the shell variable @env{INPUTRC}.  If
 @end ifset
 @ifclear BashFeatures
-file is taken from the value of the environment variable @code{INPUTRC}.  If
+file is taken from the value of the environment variable @env{INPUTRC}.  If
 @end ifclear
 that variable is unset, the default is @file{~/.inputrc}.
 
@@ -359,7 +366,15 @@ denote variable settings and key bindings.
 @item Variable Settings
 You can modify the run-time behavior of Readline by
 altering the values of variables in Readline
-using the @code{set} command within the init file.  Here is how to
+using the @code{set} command within the init file.
+The syntax is simple:
+
+@example
+set @var{variable} @var{value}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Here, for example, is how to
 change from the default Emacs-like key binding to use
 @code{vi} line editing commands:
 
@@ -367,6 +382,9 @@ change from the default Emacs-like key binding to use
 set editing-mode vi
 @end example
 
+Variable names and values, where appropriate, are recognized without regard
+to case. 
+
 @ifset BashFeatures
 The @w{@code{bind -V}} command lists the current Readline variable names
 and values.  @xref{Bash Builtins}.
@@ -375,6 +393,7 @@ and values.  @xref{Bash Builtins}.
 A great deal of run-time behavior is changeable with the following
 variables.
 
+@cindex variables, readline
 @table @code
 
 @item bell-style
@@ -402,13 +421,14 @@ The number of possible completions that determines when the user is
 asked whether he wants to see the list of possibilities.  If the
 number of possible completions is greater than this value,
 Readline will ask the user whether or not he wishes to view
-them; otherwise, they are simply listed.  The default limit is
-@code{100}.
+them; otherwise, they are simply listed.
+This variable must be set to an integer value greater than or equal to 0.
+The default limit is @code{100}.
 
 @item convert-meta
 @vindex convert-meta
 If set to @samp{on}, Readline will convert characters with the
-eighth bit set to an ASCII key sequence by stripping the eighth
+eighth bit set to an @sc{ascii} key sequence by stripping the eighth
 bit and prefixing an @key{ESC} character, converting them to a
 meta-prefixed key sequence.  The default value is @samp{on}.
 
@@ -436,6 +456,11 @@ arrow keys.  The default is @samp{off}.
 If set to @samp{on}, tilde expansion is performed when Readline
 attempts word completion.  The default is @samp{off}.
 
+@vindex history-preserve-point
+If set to @samp{on}, the history code attempts to place point at the
+same location on each history line retrived with @code{previous-history}
+or @code{next-history}.
+
 @item horizontal-scroll-mode
 @vindex horizontal-scroll-mode
 This variable can be set to either @samp{on} or @samp{off}.  Setting it
@@ -448,7 +473,7 @@ this variable is set to @samp{off}.
 @vindex input-meta
 @vindex meta-flag
 If set to @samp{on}, Readline will enable eight-bit input (it
-will not strip the eighth bit from the characters it reads),
+will not clear the eighth bit in the characters it reads),
 regardless of what the terminal claims it can support.  The
 default value is @samp{off}.  The name @code{meta-flag} is a
 synonym for this variable.
@@ -458,7 +483,7 @@ synonym for this variable.
 The string of characters that should terminate an incremental search without
 subsequently executing the character as a command (@pxref{Searching}).
 If this variable has not been given a value, the characters @key{ESC} and
-@key{C-J} will terminate an incremental search.
+@kbd{C-J} will terminate an incremental search.
 
 @item keymap
 @vindex keymap
@@ -469,6 +494,7 @@ Acceptable @code{keymap} names are
 @code{emacs-meta},
 @code{emacs-ctlx},
 @code{vi},
+@code{vi-move},
 @code{vi-command}, and
 @code{vi-insert}.
 @code{vi} is equivalent to @code{vi-command}; @code{emacs} is
@@ -486,12 +512,33 @@ This variable, when set to @samp{on}, causes Readline to display an
 asterisk (@samp{*}) at the start of history lines which have been modified.
 This variable is @samp{off} by default.
 
+@item mark-symlinked-directories
+@vindex mark-symlinked-directories
+If set to @samp{on}, completed names which are symbolic links
+to directories have a slash appended (subject to the value of
+@code{mark-directories}).
+The default is @samp{off}.
+
+@item match-hidden-files
+@vindex match-hidden-files
+This variable, when set to @samp{on}, causes Readline to match files whose
+names begin with a @samp{.} (hidden files) when performing filename
+completion, unless the leading @samp{.} is
+supplied by the user in the filename to be completed.
+This variable is @samp{on} by default.
+
 @item output-meta
 @vindex output-meta
 If set to @samp{on}, Readline will display characters with the
 eighth bit set directly rather than as a meta-prefixed escape
 sequence.  The default is @samp{off}.
 
+@item page-completions
+@vindex page-completions
+If set to @samp{on}, Readline uses an internal @code{more}-like pager
+to display a screenful of possible completions at a time.
+This variable is @samp{on} by default.
+
 @item print-completions-horizontally
 If set to @samp{on}, Readline will display completions with matches
 sorted horizontally in alphabetical order, rather than down the screen.
@@ -520,11 +567,15 @@ want to change.  The following sections contain tables of the command
 name, the default keybinding, if any, and a short description of what
 the command does.
 
-Once you know the name of the command, simply place the name of the key
+Once you know the name of the command, simply place on a line
+in the init file the name of the key
 you wish to bind the command to, a colon, and then the name of the
-command on a line in the init file.  The name of the key
-can be expressed in different ways, depending on which is most
-comfortable for you.
+command.  The name of the key
+can be expressed in different ways, depending on what you find most
+comfortable.
+
+In addition to command names, readline allows keys to be bound
+to a string that is inserted when the key is pressed (a @var{macro}).
 
 @ifset BashFeatures
 The @w{@code{bind -p}} command displays Readline function names and
@@ -541,11 +592,28 @@ Meta-Rubout: backward-kill-word
 Control-o: "> output"
 @end example
 
-In the above example, @key{C-u} is bound to the function
-@code{universal-argument}, and @key{C-o} is bound to run the macro
+In the above example, @kbd{C-u} is bound to the function
+@code{universal-argument},
+@kbd{M-DEL} is bound to the function @code{backward-kill-word}, and
+@kbd{C-o} is bound to run the macro
 expressed on the right hand side (that is, to insert the text
 @samp{> output} into the line).
 
+A number of symbolic character names are recognized while
+processing this key binding syntax:
+@var{DEL},
+@var{ESC},
+@var{ESCAPE},
+@var{LFD},
+@var{NEWLINE},
+@var{RET},
+@var{RETURN},
+@var{RUBOUT},
+@var{SPACE},
+@var{SPC},
+and
+@var{TAB}.
+
 @item @w{"@var{keyseq}": @var{function-name} or @var{macro}}
 @var{keyseq} differs from @var{keyname} above in that strings
 denoting an entire key sequence can be specified, by placing
@@ -559,9 +627,9 @@ special character names are not recognized.
 "\e[11~": "Function Key 1"
 @end example
 
-In the above example, @key{C-u} is bound to the function
+In the above example, @kbd{C-u} is again bound to the function
 @code{universal-argument} (just as it was in the first example),
-@samp{@key{C-x} @key{C-r}} is bound to the function @code{re-read-init-file},
+@samp{@kbd{C-x} @kbd{C-r}} is bound to the function @code{re-read-init-file},
 and @samp{@key{ESC} @key{[} @key{1} @key{1} @key{~}} is bound to insert
 the text @samp{Function Key 1}.
 
@@ -606,11 +674,11 @@ horizontal tab
 @item \v
 vertical tab
 @item \@var{nnn}
-the character whose @code{ASCII} code is the octal value @var{nnn}
-(one to three digits)
-@item \x@var{nnn}
-the character whose @code{ASCII} code is the hexadecimal value @var{nnn}
+the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value @var{nnn}
 (one to three digits)
+@item \x@var{HH}
+the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value @var{HH}
+(one or two hex digits)
 @end table
 
 When entering the text of a macro, single or double quotes must
@@ -619,7 +687,7 @@ Unquoted text is assumed to be a function name.
 In the macro body, the backslash escapes described above are expanded.
 Backslash will quote any other character in the macro text,
 including @samp{"} and @samp{'}.
-For example, the following binding will make @samp{C-x \}
+For example, the following binding will make @samp{@kbd{C-x} \}
 insert a single @samp{\} into the line:
 @example
 "\C-x\\": "\\"
@@ -663,7 +731,8 @@ for instance.
 @item application
 The @var{application} construct is used to include
 application-specific settings.  Each program using the Readline
-library sets the @var{application name}, and you can test for it. 
+library sets the @var{application name}, and you can test for
+a particular value. 
 This could be used to bind key sequences to functions useful for
 a specific program.  For instance, the following command adds a
 key sequence that quotes the current or previous word in Bash:
@@ -686,6 +755,7 @@ the test fails.
 @item $include
 This directive takes a single filename as an argument and reads commands
 and bindings from that file.
+For example, the following directive reads from @file{/etc/inputrc}:
 @example
 $include /etc/inputrc
 @end example
@@ -694,20 +764,20 @@ $include /etc/inputrc
 @node Sample Init File
 @subsection Sample Init File
 
-Here is an example of an inputrc file.  This illustrates key
+Here is an example of an @var{inputrc} file.  This illustrates key
 binding, variable assignment, and conditional syntax.
 
 @example
 @page
 # This file controls the behaviour of line input editing for
-# programs that use the Gnu Readline library.  Existing programs
-# include FTP, Bash, and Gdb.
+# programs that use the GNU Readline library.  Existing
+# programs include FTP, Bash, and GDB.
 #
 # You can re-read the inputrc file with C-x C-r.
 # Lines beginning with '#' are comments.
 #
-# First, include any systemwide bindings and variable assignments from
-# /etc/Inputrc
+# First, include any systemwide bindings and variable
+# assignments from /etc/Inputrc
 $include /etc/Inputrc
 
 #
@@ -759,11 +829,12 @@ TAB: complete
 $if Bash
 # edit the path
 "\C-xp": "PATH=$@{PATH@}\e\C-e\C-a\ef\C-f"
-# prepare to type a quoted word -- insert open and close
-# double quotes and move to just after the open quote
+# prepare to type a quoted word --
+# insert open and close double quotes
+# and move to just after the open quote
 "\C-x\"": "\"\"\C-b"
-# insert a backslash (testing backslash escapes in sequences
-# and macros)
+# insert a backslash (testing backslash escapes
+# in sequences and macros)
 "\C-x\\": "\\"
 # Quote the current or previous word
 "\C-xq": "\eb\"\ef\""
@@ -779,16 +850,16 @@ set bell-style visible
 # don't strip characters to 7 bits when reading
 set input-meta on
 
-# allow iso-latin1 characters to be inserted rather than converted to
-# prefix-meta sequences
+# allow iso-latin1 characters to be inserted rather
+# than converted to prefix-meta sequences
 set convert-meta off
 
-# display characters with the eighth bit set directly rather than
-# as meta-prefixed characters
+# display characters with the eighth bit set directly
+# rather than as meta-prefixed characters
 set output-meta on
 
-# if there are more than 150 possible completions for a word, ask the
-# user if he wants to see all of them
+# if there are more than 150 possible completions for
+# a word, ask the user if he wants to see all of them
 set completion-query-items 150
 
 # For FTP
@@ -820,12 +891,12 @@ You can list your key bindings by executing
 @w{@code{bind -P}} or, for a more terse format, suitable for an
 @var{inputrc} file, @w{@code{bind -p}}.  (@xref{Bash Builtins}.)
 @end ifset
-
 Command names without an accompanying key sequence are unbound by default.
-In the following descriptions, @var{point} refers to the current cursor
-position, and @var{mark} refers to a cursor position saved by the
+
+In the following descriptions, @dfn{point} refers to the current cursor
+position, and @dfn{mark} refers to a cursor position saved by the
 @code{set-mark} command.
-The text between the point and mark is referred to as the @var{region}.
+The text between the point and mark is referred to as the @dfn{region}.
 
 @node Commands For Moving
 @subsection Commands For Moving
@@ -863,25 +934,29 @@ Refresh the current line.  By default, this is unbound.
 @subsection Commands For Manipulating The History
 
 @ftable @code
-@item accept-line (Newline, Return)
+@item accept-line (Newline or Return)
 @ifset BashFeatures
-Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is.  If this line is
+Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is.
+If this line is
 non-empty, add it to the history list according to the setting of
-the @code{HISTCONTROL} and @code{HISTIGNORE} variables.
-If this line was a history line, then restore the history line to its
-original state.
+the @env{HISTCONTROL} and @env{HISTIGNORE} variables.
+If this line is a modified history line, then restore the history line
+to its original state.
 @end ifset
 @ifclear BashFeatures
-Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is.  If this line is
-non-empty, add it to the history list.  If this line was a history
-line, then restore the history line to its original state.
+Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is.
+If this line is
+non-empty, it may be added to the history list for future recall with
+@code{add_history()}.
+If this line is a modified history line, the history line is restored
+to its original state.
 @end ifclear
 
 @item previous-history (C-p)
-Move `up' through the history list.
+Move `back' through the history list, fetching the previous command.
 
 @item next-history (C-n)
-Move `down' through the history list.
+Move `forward' through the history list, fetching the next command.
 
 @item beginning-of-history (M-<)
 Move to the first line in the history.
@@ -921,12 +996,13 @@ is a non-incremental search.  By default, this command is unbound.
 
 @item yank-nth-arg (M-C-y)
 Insert the first argument to the previous command (usually
-the second word on the previous line).  With an argument @var{n},
+the second word on the previous line) at point.
+With an argument @var{n},
 insert the @var{n}th word from the previous command (the words
 in the previous command begin with word 0).  A negative argument
 inserts the @var{n}th word from the end of the previous command.
 
-@item yank-last-arg (M-., M-_)
+@item yank-last-arg (M-. or M-_)
 Insert last argument to the previous command (the last word of the
 previous history entry).  With an
 argument, behave exactly like @code{yank-nth-arg}.
@@ -940,10 +1016,10 @@ list, inserting the last argument of each line in turn.
 
 @ftable @code
 @item delete-char (C-d)
-Delete the character under the cursor.  If the cursor is at the
+Delete the character at point.  If point is at the
 beginning of the line, there are no characters in the line, and
 the last character typed was not bound to @code{delete-char}, then
-return @code{EOF}.
+return @sc{eof}.
 
 @item backward-delete-char (Rubout)
 Delete the character behind the cursor.  A numeric argument means
@@ -954,16 +1030,16 @@ Delete the character under the cursor, unless the cursor is at the
 end of the line, in which case the character behind the cursor is
 deleted.  By default, this is not bound to a key.
 
-@item quoted-insert (C-q, C-v)
+@item quoted-insert (C-q or C-v)
 Add the next character typed to the line verbatim.  This is
-how to insert key sequences like @key{C-q}, for example.
+how to insert key sequences like @kbd{C-q}, for example.
 
 @ifclear BashFeatures
-@item tab-insert (M-TAB)
+@item tab-insert (M-@key{TAB})
 Insert a tab character.
 @end ifclear
 
-@item self-insert (a, b, A, 1, !, ...)
+@item self-insert (a, b, A, 1, !, @dots{})
 Insert yourself.
 
 @item transpose-chars (C-t)
@@ -977,6 +1053,8 @@ Negative arguments have no effect.
 @item transpose-words (M-t)
 Drag the word before point past the word after point,
 moving point past that word as well.
+If the insertion point is at the end of the line, this transposes
+the last two words on the line.
 
 @item upcase-word (M-u)
 Uppercase the current (or following) word.  With a negative argument,
@@ -990,6 +1068,20 @@ lowercase the previous word, but do not move the cursor.
 Capitalize the current (or following) word.  With a negative argument,
 capitalize the previous word, but do not move the cursor.
 
+@item overwrite-mode ()
+Toggle overwrite mode.  With an explicit positive numeric argument,
+switches to overwrite mode.  With an explicit non-positive numeric
+argument, switches to insert mode.  This command affects only
+@code{emacs} mode; @code{vi} mode does overwrite differently.
+Each call to @code{readline()} starts in insert mode.
+
+In overwrite mode, characters bound to @code{self-insert} replace
+the text at point rather than pushing the text to the right.
+Characters bound to @code{backward-delete-char} replace the character
+before point with a space.
+
+By default, this command is unbound.
+
 @end ftable
 
 @node Commands For Killing
@@ -1007,7 +1099,7 @@ Kill backward to the beginning of the line.
 Kill backward from the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
 
 @item kill-whole-line ()
-Kill all characters on the current line, no matter point is.
+Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where point is.
 By default, this is unbound.
 
 @item kill-word (M-d)
@@ -1015,7 +1107,7 @@ Kill from point to the end of the current word, or if between
 words, to the end of the next word.
 Word boundaries are the same as @code{forward-word}.
 
-@item backward-kill-word (M-DEL)
+@item backward-kill-word (M-@key{DEL})
 Kill the word behind point.
 Word boundaries are the same as @code{backward-word}.
 
@@ -1045,21 +1137,20 @@ The word boundaries are the same as @code{forward-word}.
 By default, this command is unbound.
 
 @item yank (C-y)
-Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at the current
-cursor position.
+Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point.
 
 @item yank-pop (M-y)
 Rotate the kill-ring, and yank the new top.  You can only do this if
-the prior command is yank or yank-pop.
+the prior command is @code{yank} or @code{yank-pop}.
 @end ftable
 
 @node Numeric Arguments
 @subsection Specifying Numeric Arguments
 @ftable @code
 
-@item digit-argument (M-0, M-1, ... M--)
+@item digit-argument (@kbd{M-0}, @kbd{M-1}, @dots{} @kbd{M--})
 Add this digit to the argument already accumulating, or start a new
-argument.  @key{M--} starts a negative argument.
+argument.  @kbd{M--} starts a negative argument.
 
 @item universal-argument ()
 This is another way to specify an argument.
@@ -1080,13 +1171,9 @@ By default, this is not bound to a key.
 @subsection Letting Readline Type For You
 
 @ftable @code
-@item complete (TAB)
-Attempt to do completion on the text before the cursor.  This is
-application-specific.  Generally, if you are typing a filename
-argument, you can do filename completion; if you are typing a command,
-you can do command completion; if you are typing in a symbol to GDB, you
-can do symbol name completion; if you are typing in a variable to Bash,
-you can do variable name completion, and so on.
+@item complete (@key{TAB})
+Attempt to perform completion on the text before point.
+The actual completion performed is application-specific.
 @ifset BashFeatures
 Bash attempts completion treating the text as a variable (if the
 text begins with @samp{$}), username (if the text begins with
@@ -1094,9 +1181,12 @@ text begins with @samp{$}), username (if the text begins with
 command (including aliases and functions) in turn.  If none 
 of these produces a match, filename completion is attempted.
 @end ifset
+@ifclear BashFeatures
+The default is filename completion.
+@end ifclear
 
 @item possible-completions (M-?)
-List the possible completions of the text before the cursor.
+List the possible completions of the text before point.
 
 @item insert-completions (M-*)
 Insert all completions of the text before point that would have
@@ -1107,12 +1197,13 @@ Similar to @code{complete}, but replaces the word to be completed
 with a single match from the list of possible completions.
 Repeated execution of @code{menu-complete} steps through the list
 of possible completions, inserting each match in turn.
-At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung and the
-original text is restored.
+At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung
+(subject to the setting of @code{bell-style})
+and the original text is restored.
 An argument of @var{n} moves @var{n} positions forward in the list
 of matches; a negative argument may be used to move backward
 through the list.
-This command is intended to be bound to @code{TAB}, but is unbound
+This command is intended to be bound to @key{TAB}, but is unbound
 by default.
 
 @item delete-char-or-list ()
@@ -1165,7 +1256,7 @@ in that order.
 List the possible completions of the text before point,
 treating it as a command name.
 
-@item dynamic-complete-history (M-TAB)
+@item dynamic-complete-history (M-@key{TAB})
 Attempt completion on the text before point, comparing
 the text against lines from the history list for possible
 completion matches.
@@ -1212,12 +1303,12 @@ ring the terminal's bell (subject to the setting of
 If the metafied character @var{x} is lowercase, run the command
 that is bound to the corresponding uppercase character.
 
-@item prefix-meta (ESC)
-Make the next character typed be metafied.  This is for keyboards
-without a meta key.  Typing @samp{ESC f} is equivalent to typing
-@samp{M-f}.
+@item prefix-meta (@key{ESC})
+Metafy the next character typed.  This is for keyboards
+without a meta key.  Typing @samp{@key{ESC} f} is equivalent to typing
+@kbd{M-f}.
 
-@item undo (C-_, C-x C-u)
+@item undo (C-_ or C-x C-u)
 Incremental undo, separately remembered for each line.
 
 @item revert-line (M-r)
@@ -1233,7 +1324,7 @@ command enough times to get back to the beginning.
 Perform tilde expansion on the current word.
 
 @item set-mark (C-@@)
-Set the mark to the current point.  If a
+Set the mark to the point.  If a
 numeric argument is supplied, the mark is set to that position.
 
 @item exchange-point-and-mark (C-x C-x)
@@ -1250,12 +1341,19 @@ of that character.  A negative count searches for subsequent
 occurrences.
 
 @item insert-comment (M-#)
-The value of the @code{comment-begin}
-variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line,
-and the line is accepted as if a newline had been typed.
+Without a numeric argument, the value of the @code{comment-begin}
+variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line.
+If a numeric argument is supplied, this command acts as a toggle:  if
+the characters at the beginning of the line do not match the value
+of @code{comment-begin}, the value is inserted, otherwise
+the characters in @code{comment-begin} are deleted from the beginning of
+the line.
+In either case, the line is accepted as if a newline had been typed.
 @ifset BashFeatures
 The default value of @code{comment-begin} causes this command
 to make the current line a shell comment.
+If a numeric argument causes the comment character to be removed, the line
+will be executed by the shell.
 @end ifset
 
 @item dump-functions ()
@@ -1272,18 +1370,27 @@ of an @var{inputrc} file.  This command is unbound by default.
 
 @item dump-macros ()
 Print all of the Readline key sequences bound to macros and the
-strings they ouput.  If a numeric argument is supplied,
+strings they output.  If a numeric argument is supplied,
 the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part
 of an @var{inputrc} file.  This command is unbound by default.
 
 @ifset BashFeatures
+@item glob-complete-word (M-g)
+The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion,
+with an asterisk implicitly appended.  This pattern is used to
+generate a list of matching file names for possible completions.
+
 @item glob-expand-word (C-x *)
 The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion,
 and the list of matching file names is inserted, replacing the word.
+If a numeric argument is supplied, a @samp{*} is appended before
+pathname expansion.
 
 @item glob-list-expansions (C-x g)
 The list of expansions that would have been generated by
 @code{glob-expand-word} is displayed, and the line is redrawn.
+If a numeric argument is supplied, a @samp{*} is appended before
+pathname expansion.
 
 @item display-shell-version (C-x C-v)
 Display version information about the current instance of Bash.
@@ -1306,7 +1413,7 @@ Perform alias expansion on the current line (@pxref{Aliases}).
 @item history-and-alias-expand-line ()
 Perform history and alias expansion on the current line.
 
-@item insert-last-argument (M-., M-_)
+@item insert-last-argument (M-. or M-_)
 A synonym for @code{yank-last-arg}.
 
 @item operate-and-get-next (C-o)
@@ -1314,13 +1421,26 @@ Accept the current line for execution and fetch the next line
 relative to the current line from the history for editing.  Any
 argument is ignored.
 
-@item emacs-editing-mode (C-e)
-When in @code{vi} editing mode, this causes a switch back to
-@code{emacs} editing mode, as if the command @samp{set -o emacs} had
-been executed.
+@item edit-and-execute-command (C-xC-e)
+Invoke an editor on the current command line, and execute the result as shell
+commands.
+Bash attempts to invoke
+@code{$FCEDIT}, @code{$EDITOR}, and @code{emacs}
+as the editor, in that order.
 
 @end ifset
 
+@ifclear BashFeatures
+@item emacs-editing-mode (C-e)
+When in @code{vi} command mode, this causes a switch to @code{emacs}
+editing mode.
+
+@item vi-editing-mode (M-C-j)
+When in @code{emacs} editing mode, this causes a switch to @code{vi}
+editing mode.
+
+@end ifclear
+
 @end ftable
 
 @node Readline vi Mode
@@ -1329,7 +1449,7 @@ been executed.
 While the Readline library does not have a full set of @code{vi}
 editing functions, it does contain enough to allow simple editing
 of the line.  The Readline @code{vi} mode behaves as specified in
-the @sc{POSIX} 1003.2 standard.
+the @sc{posix} 1003.2 standard.
 
 @ifset BashFeatures
 In order to switch interactively between @code{emacs} and @code{vi}
@@ -1338,7 +1458,8 @@ commands (@pxref{The Set Builtin}).
 @end ifset
 @ifclear BashFeatures
 In order to switch interactively between @code{emacs} and @code{vi}
-editing modes, use the command M-C-j (toggle-editing-mode).
+editing modes, use the command @kbd{M-C-j} (bound to emacs-editing-mode
+when in @code{vi} mode and to vi-editing-mode in @code{emacs} mode).
 @end ifclear
 The Readline default is @code{emacs} mode.
 
@@ -1375,20 +1496,20 @@ described above (@pxref{Commands For Completion}) is performed.
 First, the actions specified by the compspec are used.
 Only matches which are prefixed by the word being completed are
 returned.
-When the @samp{-f} or @samp{-d} option is used for filename or
-directory name completion, the shell variable @code{FIGNORE} is
+When the @option{-f} or @option{-d} option is used for filename or
+directory name completion, the shell variable @env{FIGNORE} is
 used to filter the matches.
-@xref{Bash Variables}, for a description of @code{FIGNORE}.
+@xref{Bash Variables}, for a description of @env{FIGNORE}.
 
 Any completions specified by a filename expansion pattern to the
-@samp{-G} option are generated next.
+@option{-G} option are generated next.
 The words generated by the pattern need not match the word being completed.
-The @code{GLOBIGNORE} shell variable is not used to filter the matches,
-but the @code{FIGNORE} shell variable is used.
+The @env{GLOBIGNORE} shell variable is not used to filter the matches,
+but the @env{FIGNORE} shell variable is used.
 
-Next, the string specified as the argument to the @samp{-W} option
+Next, the string specified as the argument to the @option{-W} option
 is considered.
-The string is first split using the characters in the @code{IFS}
+The string is first split using the characters in the @env{IFS}
 special variable as delimiters.
 Shell quoting is honored.
 Each word is then expanded using
@@ -1401,12 +1522,12 @@ The results of the expansion are prefix-matched against the word being
 completed, and the matching words become the possible completions.
 
 After these matches have been generated, any shell function or command
-specified with the @samp{-F} and @samp{-C} options is invoked.
-When the command or function is invoked, the @code{COMP_LINE} and
-@code{COMP_POINT} variables are assigned values as described above
+specified with the @option{-F} and @option{-C} options is invoked.
+When the command or function is invoked, the @env{COMP_LINE} and
+@env{COMP_POINT} variables are assigned values as described above
 (@pxref{Bash Variables}).
-If a shell function is being invoked, the @code{COMP_WORDS} and
-@code{COMP_CWORD} variables are also set.
+If a shell function is being invoked, the @env{COMP_WORDS} and
+@env{COMP_CWORD} variables are also set.
 When the function or command is invoked, the first argument is the
 name of the command whose arguments are being completed, the
 second argument is the word being completed, and the third argument
@@ -1415,21 +1536,21 @@ No filtering of the generated completions against the word being completed
 is performed; the function or command has complete freedom in generating
 the matches.
 
-Any function specified with @samp{-F} is invoked first.
+Any function specified with @option{-F} is invoked first.
 The function may use any of the shell facilities, including the
 @code{compgen} builtin described below
 (@pxref{Programmable Completion Builtins}), to generate the matches.
-It must put the possible completions in the @code{COMPREPLY} array
+It must put the possible completions in the @env{COMPREPLY} array
 variable.
 
-Next, any command specified with the @samp{-C} option is invoked
+Next, any command specified with the @option{-C} option is invoked
 in an environment equivalent to command substitution.
 It should print a list of completions, one per line, to
 the standard output.
 Backslash may be used to escape a newline, if necessary.
 
 After all of the possible completions are generated, any filter
-specified with the @samp{-X} option is applied to the list.
+specified with the @option{-X} option is applied to the list.
 The filter is a pattern as used for pathname expansion; a @samp{&}
 in the pattern is replaced with the text of the word being completed.
 A literal @samp{&} may be escaped with a backslash; the backslash
@@ -1438,15 +1559,28 @@ Any completion that matches the pattern will be removed from the list.
 A leading @samp{!} negates the pattern; in this case any completion
 not matching the pattern will be removed.
 
-Finally, any prefix and suffix specified with the @samp{-P} and @samp{-S}
+Finally, any prefix and suffix specified with the @option{-P} and @option{-S}
 options are added to each member of the completion list, and the result is
 returned to the Readline completion code as the list of possible
 completions.
 
-If a compspec is found, whatever it generates is returned to the completion
-code as the full set of possible completions.
-The default Bash completions are not attempted, and the Readline
-default of filename completion is disabled.
+If the previously-applied actions do not generate any matches, and the
+@option{-o dirnames} option was supplied to @code{complete} when the
+compspec was defined, directory name completion is attempted. 
+
+By default, if a compspec is found, whatever it generates is returned to
+the completion code as the full set of possible completions.
+The default Bash completions are not attempted, and the Readline default
+of filename completion is disabled.
+If the @option{-o default} option was supplied to @code{complete} when the
+compspec was defined, Readline's default completion will be performed
+if the compspec generates no matches.
+
+When a compspec indicates that directory name completion is desired,
+the programmable completion functions force Readline to append a slash
+to completed names which are symbolic links to directories, subject to
+the value of the @var{mark-directories} Readline variable, regardless
+of the setting of the @var{mark-symlinked-directories} Readline variable.
 
 @node Programmable Completion Builtins
 @section Programmable Completion Builtins
@@ -1465,9 +1599,9 @@ facilities.
 Generate possible completion matches for @var{word} according to
 the @var{option}s, which may be any option accepted by the
 @code{complete}
-builtin with the exception of @samp{-p} and @samp{-r}, and write
+builtin with the exception of @option{-p} and @option{-r}, and write
 the matches to the standard output.
-When using the @samp{-F} or @samp{-C} options, the various shell variables
+When using the @option{-F} or @option{-C} options, the various shell variables
 set by the programmable completion facilities, while available, will not
 have useful values.
 
@@ -1483,17 +1617,17 @@ matches were generated.
 @item complete
 @btindex complete
 @example
-@code{complete [-abcdefjkvu] [-A @var{action}] [-G @var{globpat}] [-W @var{wordlist}]
+@code{complete [-abcdefgjksuv] [-o @var{comp-option}] [-A @var{action}] [-G @var{globpat}] [-W @var{wordlist}]
 [-P @var{prefix}] [-S @var{suffix}] [-X @var{filterpat}] [-F @var{function}]
 [-C @var{command}] @var{name} [@var{name} @dots{}]}
 @code{complete -pr [@var{name} @dots{}]}
 @end example
 
 Specify how arguments to each @var{name} should be completed.
-If the @samp{-p} option is supplied, or if no options are supplied, existing
+If the @option{-p} option is supplied, or if no options are supplied, existing
 completion specifications are printed in a way that allows them to be
 reused as input.
-The @samp{-r} option removes a completion specification for
+The @option{-r} option removes a completion specification for
 each @var{name}, or, if no @var{name}s are supplied, all
 completion specifications.
 
@@ -1501,19 +1635,45 @@ The process of applying these completion specifications when word completion
 is attempted is described above (@pxref{Programmable Completion}).
 
 Other options, if specified, have the following meanings.
-The arguments to the @samp{-G}, @samp{-W}, and @samp{-X} options
-(and, if necessary, the @samp{-P} and @samp{-S} options)
+The arguments to the @option{-G}, @option{-W}, and @option{-X} options
+(and, if necessary, the @option{-P} and @option{-S} options)
 should be quoted to protect them from expansion before the
 @code{complete} builtin is invoked.
 
+
+@table @code
+@item -o @var{comp-option}
+The @var{comp-option} controls several aspects of the compspec's behavior
+beyond the simple generation of completions.
+@var{comp-option} may be one of: 
+
 @table @code
+
+@item default
+Use Readline's default filename completion if the compspec generates
+no matches.
+
+@item dirnames
+Perform directory name completion if the compspec generates no matches.
+
+@item filenames
+Tell Readline that the compspec generates filenames, so it can perform any
+filename\-specific processing (like adding a slash to directory names or
+suppressing trailing spaces).  This option is intended to be used with
+shell functions specified with @option{-F}.
+
+@item nospace
+Tell Readline not to append a space (the default) to words completed at
+the end of the line.
+@end table
+
 @item -A @var{action}
 The @var{action} may be one of the following to generate a list of possible
 completions:
 
 @table @code
 @item alias
-Alias names.  May also be specified as @samp{-a}.
+Alias names.  May also be specified as @option{-a}.
 
 @item arrayvar
 Array variable names.
@@ -1522,13 +1682,13 @@ Array variable names.
 Readline key binding names (@pxref{Bindable Readline Commands}).
 
 @item builtin
-Names of shell builtin commands.  May also be specified as @samp{-b}.
+Names of shell builtin commands.  May also be specified as @option{-b}.
 
 @item command
-Command names.  May also be specified as @samp{-c}.
+Command names.  May also be specified as @option{-c}.
 
 @item directory
-Directory names.  May also be specified as @samp{-d}.
+Directory names.  May also be specified as @option{-d}.
 
 @item disabled
 Names of disabled shell builtins.
@@ -1537,32 +1697,38 @@ Names of disabled shell builtins.
 Names of enabled shell builtins.
 
 @item export
-Names of exported shell variables.  May also be specified as @samp{-e}.
+Names of exported shell variables.  May also be specified as @option{-e}.
 
 @item file
-File names.  May also be specified as @samp{-f}.
+File names.  May also be specified as @option{-f}.
 
 @item function
 Names of shell functions.
 
+@item group
+Group names.  May also be specified as @option{-g}.
+
 @item helptopic
 Help topics as accepted by the @code{help} builtin (@pxref{Bash Builtins}).
 
 @item hostname
 Hostnames, as taken from the file specified by the
-@code{HOSTFILE} shell variable (@pxref{Bash Variables}).
+@env{HOSTFILE} shell variable (@pxref{Bash Variables}).
 
 @item job
-Job names, if job control is active.  May also be specified as @samp{-j}.
+Job names, if job control is active.  May also be specified as @option{-j}.
 
 @item keyword
-Shell reserved words.  May also be specified as @samp{-k}.
+Shell reserved words.  May also be specified as @option{-k}.
 
 @item running
 Names of running jobs, if job control is active.
 
+@item service
+Service names.  May also be specified as @option{-s}.
+
 @item setopt
-Valid arguments for the @samp{-o} option to the @code{set} builtin
+Valid arguments for the @option{-o} option to the @code{set} builtin
 (@pxref{The Set Builtin}).
 
 @item shopt
@@ -1576,10 +1742,10 @@ Signal names.
 Names of stopped jobs, if job control is active.
 
 @item user
-User names.  May also be specified as @samp{-u}.
+User names.  May also be specified as @option{-u}.
 
 @item variable
-Names of all shell variables.  May also be specified as @samp{-v}.
+Names of all shell variables.  May also be specified as @option{-v}.
 @end table
 
 @item -G @var{globpat}
@@ -1588,7 +1754,7 @@ the possible completions.
 
 @item -W @var{wordlist}
 The @var{wordlist} is split using the characters in the
-@code{IFS} special variable as delimiters, and each resultant word
+@env{IFS} special variable as delimiters, and each resultant word
 is expanded.
 The possible completions are the members of the resultant list which
 match the word being completed.
@@ -1601,7 +1767,7 @@ used as the possible completions.
 The shell function @var{function} is executed in the current shell
 environment.
 When it finishes, the possible completions are retrieved from the value
-of the @code{COMPREPLY} array variable.
+of the @env{COMPREPLY} array variable.
 
 @item -X @var{filterpat}
 @var{filterpat} is a pattern as used for filename expansion.
@@ -1621,7 +1787,7 @@ after all other options have been applied.
 @end table
 
 The return value is true unless an invalid option is supplied, an option
-other than @samp{-p} or @samp{-r} is supplied without a @var{name}
+other than @option{-p} or @option{-r} is supplied without a @var{name}
 argument, an attempt is made to remove a completion specification for
 a @var{name} for which no specification exists, or
 an error occurs adding a completion specification.
diff --git a/readline/doc/rluserman.texinfo b/readline/doc/rluserman.texinfo
index e6a3dcd..89abe31 100644
--- a/readline/doc/rluserman.texinfo
+++ b/readline/doc/rluserman.texinfo
@@ -10,14 +10,14 @@
 @ifinfo
 @dircategory Libraries
 @direntry
-* Readline: (readline).       The GNU readline library API
+* RLuserman: (rluserman).       The GNU readline library User's Manual.
 @end direntry
 
 This document describes the end user interface of the GNU Readline Library,
 a utility which aids in the consistency of user interface across discrete
 programs that need to provide a command line interface.
 
-Copyright (C) 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
 by the Free Software Foundation.
 
 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
-Copyright @copyright{} 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright @copyright{} 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 @end titlepage
 
 @ifinfo
diff --git a/readline/doc/texi2dvi b/readline/doc/texi2dvi
index 3d7134d..c186848 100755
--- a/readline/doc/texi2dvi
+++ b/readline/doc/texi2dvi
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 #! /bin/sh
-# texi2dvi --- smartly produce DVI files from texinfo sources
+# texi2dvi --- produce DVI (or PDF) files from Texinfo (or LaTeX) sources.
 # $Id$
 #
-# Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 #
 # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -19,344 +19,550 @@
 # program's maintainer or write to: The Free Software Foundation,
 # Inc.; 59 Temple Place, Suite 330; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
 #
-# Commentary:
-#
-# Author: Noah Friedman <friedman@gnu.org>
+# Original author: Noah Friedman <friedman@gnu.org>.
 #
 # Please send bug reports, etc. to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.
 # If possible, please send a copy of the output of the script called with
 # the `--debug' option when making a bug report.
-#
-# In the interest of general portability, some common bourne shell
-# constructs were avoided because they weren't guaranteed to be available
-# in some earlier implementations.  I've tried to make this program as
-# portable as possible.  Welcome to unix, where the lowest common
-# denominator is rapidly diminishing.
-#
-# Among the more interesting lossages I noticed among Bourne shells:
-#     * No shell functions.
-#     * No `unset' builtin.
-#     * `shift' cannot take a numeric argument, and signals an error if
-#       there are no arguments to shift.
-#
-# Code:
-
-# Name by which this script was invoked.
-progname=`echo "$0" | sed -e 's/[^\/]*\///g'`
 
 # This string is expanded by rcs automatically when this file is checked out.
 rcs_revision='$Revision$'
-version=`set - $rcs_revision; echo $2`
-
-# To prevent hairy quoting and escaping later.
-bq='`'
-eq="'"
+rcs_version=`set - $rcs_revision; echo $2`
+program=`echo $0 | sed -e 's!.*/!!'`
+version="texi2dvi (GNU Texinfo 4.0) $rcs_version
 
-usage="Usage: $0 [OPTION]... FILE...
-Run a Texinfo document through TeX.
+Copyright (C) 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+There is NO warranty.  You may redistribute this software
+under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
+For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING."
 
-Options:
--b, --batch          No interaction (\nonstopmode in TeX).
--c, --clean          Remove all auxiliary files.
--D, --debug          Turn on shell debugging ($bq${bq}set -x$eq$eq).
--t, --texinfo CMD    Insert CMD after @setfilename before running TeX.
---verbose            Report on what is done.
--h, --help           Display this help and exit.
--v, --version        Display version information and exit.
+usage="Usage: $program [OPTION]... FILE...
 
-The values of the TEX, TEXINDEX, and MAKEINFO environment variables are
-used to run those commands, if they are set.
+Run each Texinfo or LaTeX FILE through TeX in turn until all
+cross-references are resolved, building all indices.  The directory
+containing each FILE is searched for included files.  The suffix of FILE
+is used to determine its language (LaTeX or Texinfo).
 
-Email bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org."
+Makeinfo is used to perform Texinfo macro expansion before running TeX
+when needed.
 
-# Initialize variables.
+Options:
+  -@                   Use @input instead of \input; for preloaded Texinfo.
+  -b, --batch          No interaction.
+  -c, --clean          Remove all auxiliary files.
+  -D, --debug          Turn on shell debugging (set -x).
+  -e, --expand         Force macro expansion using makeinfo.
+  -I DIR               Search DIR for Texinfo files.
+  -h, --help           Display this help and exit successfully.
+  -l, --language=LANG  Specify the LANG of FILE: LaTeX or Texinfo.
+  -p, --pdf            Use pdftex or pdflatex for processing.
+  -q, --quiet          No output unless errors (implies --batch).
+  -s, --silent         Same as --quiet.
+  -t, --texinfo=CMD    Insert CMD after @setfilename in copy of input file.
+                       Multiple values accumulate.
+  -v, --version        Display version information and exit successfully.
+  -V, --verbose        Report on what is done.
+
+The values of the BIBTEX, LATEX (or PDFLATEX), MAKEINDEX, MAKEINFO,
+TEX (or PDFTEX), and TEXINDEX environment variables are used to run
+those commands, if they are set.
+
+Email bug reports to <bug-texinfo@gnu.org>,
+general questions and discussion to <help-texinfo@gnu.org>."
+
+# Initialize variables for option overriding and otherwise.
 # Don't use `unset' since old bourne shells don't have this command.
 # Instead, assign them an empty value.
-# Some of these, like TEX and TEXINDEX, may be inherited from the environment.
-backup_extension=.bak # these files get deleted if all goes well.
-batch=
+escape='\'
+batch=false     # eval for batch mode
 clean=
 debug=
-orig_pwd="`pwd`"
+expand=         # t for expansion via makeinfo
+oformat=dvi
+set_language=
+miincludes=     # makeinfo include path
 textra=
-verbose=false
-makeinfo="${MAKEINFO-makeinfo}"
-texindex="${TEXINDEX-texindex}"
-tex="${TEX-tex}"
+tmpdir=${TMPDIR:-/tmp}/t2d$$  # avoid collisions on 8.3 filesystems.
+txincludes=     # TEXINPUTS extensions
+txiprereq=19990129 # minimum texinfo.tex version to have macro expansion
+quiet=          # by default let the tools' message be displayed
+verbose=false   # echo for verbose mode
+
+orig_pwd=`pwd`
+
+# Systems which define $COMSPEC or $ComSpec use semicolons to separate
+# directories in TEXINPUTS.
+if test -n "$COMSPEC$ComSpec"; then
+  path_sep=";"
+else
+  path_sep=":"
+fi
 
 # Save this so we can construct a new TEXINPUTS path for each file.
 TEXINPUTS_orig="$TEXINPUTS"
-export TEXINPUTS
-
+# Unfortunately makeindex does not read TEXINPUTS.
+INDEXSTYLE_orig="$INDEXSTYLE"
+export TEXINPUTS INDEXSTYLE
+
+# Push a token among the arguments that will be used to notice when we
+# ended options/arguments parsing.
+# Use "set dummy ...; shift" rather than 'set - ..." because on
+# Solaris set - turns off set -x (but keeps set -e).
+# Use ${1+"$@"} rather than "$@" because Digital Unix and Ultrix 4.3
+# still expand "$@" to a single argument (the empty string) rather
+# than nothing at all.
+arg_sep="$$--$$"
+set dummy ${1+"$@"} "$arg_sep"; shift
+
+# 
 # Parse command line arguments.
-# Make sure that all wildcarded options are long enough to be unambiguous.
-# It's a good idea to document the full long option name in each case.
-# Long options which take arguments will need a `*' appended to the
-# canonical name to match the value appended after the `=' character.
-while :; do
-  test $# -eq 0 && break
-  
+while test x"$1" != x"$arg_sep"; do
+
+  # Handle --option=value by splitting apart and putting back on argv.
   case "$1" in
-    -b | --batch | --b* ) batch=t; shift ;;
-    -c | --clean | --c* ) clean=t; shift ;;
-    -D | --debug | --d* ) debug=t; shift ;;
-    -h | --help | --h* )   echo "$usage"; exit 0 ;;
-    # OK, we should do real option parsing here, but be lazy for now.
-    -t | --texinfo | --t*) shift; textra="$textra $1"; shift ;; 
-    -v | --vers* )
-      echo "$progname (GNU Texinfo 3.12) $version"
-      echo "Copyright (C) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-There is NO warranty.  You may redistribute this software
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
-For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING."
-      exit 0 ;;
-    --verb* )            verbose=echo; shift ;;
-    -- )     # Stop option processing
+    --*=*)
+      opt=`echo "$1" | sed -e 's/=.*//'`
+      val=`echo "$1" | sed -e 's/[^=]*=//'`
+      shift
+      set dummy "$opt" "$val" ${1+"$@"}; shift
+      ;;
+  esac
+
+  # This recognizes --quark as --quiet.  So what.
+  case "$1" in
+    -@ ) escape=@;;
+    # Silently and without documentation accept -b and --b[atch] as synonyms.
+    -b | --b*) batch=eval;;
+    -q | -s | --q* | --s*) quiet=t; batch=eval;;
+    -c | --c*) clean=t;;
+    -D | --d*) debug=t;;
+    -e | --e*) expand=t;;
+    -h | --h*) echo "$usage"; exit 0;;
+    -I | --I*)
+      shift
+      miincludes="$miincludes -I $1"
+      txincludes="$txincludes$path_sep$1"
+      ;;
+    -l | --l*) shift; set_language=$1;;
+    -p | --p*) oformat=pdf;;
+    -t | --t*) shift; textra="$textra\\
+$1";;
+    -v | --vers*) echo "$version"; exit 0;;
+    -V | --verb*) verbose=echo;;
+    --) # What remains are not options.
       shift
-      break ;;
-    -* )
-      case "$1" in
-        --*=* ) arg=`echo "$1" | sed -e 's/=.*//'` ;;
-        * )     arg="$1" ;;
-      esac
-      exec 1>&2
-      echo "$progname: Unknown or ambiguous option $bq$arg$eq."
-      echo "$progname: Try $bq--help$eq for more information."
-      exit 1 ;;
-    * ) break ;;
+      while test x"$1" != x"$arg_sep"; do
+        set dummy ${1+"$@"} "$1"; shift
+        shift
+      done
+      break;;
+    -*)
+      echo "$0: Unknown or ambiguous option \`$1'." >&2
+      echo "$0: Try \`--help' for more information." >&2
+      exit 1;;
+    *) set dummy ${1+"$@"} "$1"; shift;;
    esac
+   shift
 done
+# Pop the token
+shift
 
-# See if there are any command line args left (which will be interpreted as
-# filename arguments).
-if test $# -eq 0; then
-  exec 1>&2
-  echo "$progname: At least one file name is required as an argument."
-  echo "$progname: Try $bq--help$eq for more information."
+# Interpret remaining command line args as filenames.
+if test $# = 0; then
+  echo "$0: Missing file arguments." >&2
+  echo "$0: Try \`--help' for more information." >&2
   exit 2
 fi
 
+# Prepare the temporary directory.  Remove it at exit, unless debugging.
+if test -z "$debug"; then
+  trap "cd / && rm -rf $tmpdir" 0 1 2 15
+fi
+
+# Create the temporary directory with strict rights
+(umask 077 && mkdir $tmpdir) || exit 1
+
+# Prepare the tools we might need.  This may be extra work in some
+# cases, but improves the readibility of the script.
+utildir=$tmpdir/utils
+mkdir $utildir || exit 1
+
+# A sed script that preprocesses Texinfo sources in order to keep the
+# iftex sections only.  We want to remove non TeX sections, and
+# comment (with `@c texi2dvi') TeX sections so that makeinfo does not
+# try to parse them.  Nevertheless, while commenting TeX sections,
+# don't comment @macro/@end macro so that makeinfo does propagate
+# them.  Unfortunately makeinfo --iftex --no-ifhtml --no-ifinfo
+# doesn't work well enough (yet) to use that, so work around with sed.
+comment_iftex_sed=$utildir/comment.sed
+cat <<EOF >$comment_iftex_sed
+/^@tex/,/^@end tex/{
+  s/^/@c texi2dvi/
+}
+/^@iftex/,/^@end iftex/{
+  s/^/@c texi2dvi/
+  /^@c texi2dvi@macro/,/^@c texi2dvi@end macro/{
+    s/^@c texi2dvi//
+  }
+}
+/^@html/,/^@end html/d
+/^@ifhtml/,/^@end ifhtml/d
+/^@ifnottex/,/^@end ifnottex/d
+/^@ifinfo/,/^@end ifinfo/{
+  /^@node/p
+  /^@menu/,/^@end menu/p
+  d
+}
+EOF
+# Uncommenting is simple: Remove any leading `@c texi2dvi'.
+uncomment_iftex_sed=$utildir/uncomment.sed
+cat <<EOF >$uncomment_iftex_sed
+s/^@c texi2dvi//
+EOF
+
+# A shell script that computes the list of xref files.
+# Takes the filename (without extension) of which we look for xref
+# files as argument.  The index files must be reported last.
+get_xref_files=$utildir/get_xref.sh
+cat <<\EOF >$get_xref_files
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# Get list of xref files (indexes, tables and lists).
+# Find all files having root filename with a two-letter extension,
+# saves the ones that are really Texinfo-related files.  .?o? catches
+# LaTeX tables and lists.
+for this_file in "$1".?o? "$1".aux "$1".?? "$1".idx; do
+  # If file is empty, skip it.
+  test -s "$this_file" || continue
+  # If the file is not suitable to be an index or xref file, don't
+  # process it.  The file can't be if its first character is not a
+  # backslash or single quote.
+  first_character=`sed -n '1s/^\(.\).*$/\1/p;q' $this_file`
+  if test "x$first_character" = "x\\" \
+     || test "x$first_character" = "x'"; then
+    xref_files="$xref_files ./$this_file"
+  fi
+done
+echo "$xref_files"
+EOF
+chmod 500 $get_xref_files
+
+# File descriptor usage:
+# 0 standard input
+# 1 standard output (--verbose messages)
+# 2 standard error
+# 3 some systems may open it to /dev/tty
+# 4 used on the Kubota Titan
+# 5 tools output (turned off by --quiet)
+
+# Tools' output.  If quiet, discard, else redirect to the message flow.
+if test "$quiet" = t; then
+  exec 5>/dev/null
+else
+  exec 5>&1
+fi
+
+# Enable tracing
 test "$debug" = t && set -x
 
-# Texify files
+# 
+# TeXify files.
+
 for command_line_filename in ${1+"$@"}; do
   $verbose "Processing $command_line_filename ..."
 
-  # See if file exists.  If it doesn't we're in trouble since, even
+  # If the COMMAND_LINE_FILENAME is not absolute (e.g., --debug.tex),
+  # prepend `./' in order to avoid that the tools take it as an option.
+  echo "$command_line_filename" | egrep '^(/|[A-z]:/)' >/dev/null \
+  || command_line_filename="./$command_line_filename"
+
+  # See if the file exists.  If it doesn't we're in trouble since, even
   # though the user may be able to reenter a valid filename at the tex
   # prompt (assuming they're attending the terminal), this script won't
-  # be able to find the right index files and so forth.
-  if test ! -r "${command_line_filename}"; then
-    echo "$0: Could not read ${command_line_filename}." >&2
+  # be able to find the right xref files and so forth.
+  if test ! -r "$command_line_filename"; then
+    echo "$0: Could not read $command_line_filename, skipping." >&2
     continue
   fi
 
-  # Roughly equivalent to `dirname ...`, but more portable
-  directory="`echo ${command_line_filename} | sed 's/\/[^\/]*$//'`"
-  filename_texi="`basename ${command_line_filename}`"
-  # Strip off the last extension part (probably .texinfo or .texi)
-  filename_noext="`echo ${filename_texi} | sed 's/\.[^.]*$//'`"
-
-  # Use same basename since we want to generate aux files with the same
-  # basename as the manual.  Use extension .texi for the temp file so
-  # that TeX will ignore it.  Thus, we must use a subdirectory.
-  #
-  # Output the macro-expanded file to here.  The vastly abbreviated
-  # temporary directory name is so we don't have collisions on 8.3 or
-  # 14-character filesystems.
-  tmp_dir=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/txi2d.$$
-  filename_tmp=$tmp_dir/$filename_noext.texi
-  # Output the file with the user's extra commands to here.
-  tmp_dir2=${tmp_dir}.2
-  filename_tmp2=$tmp_dir2/$filename_noext.texi
-  mkdir $tmp_dir $tmp_dir2
-  # Always remove the temporary directories.
-  trap "rm -rf $tmp_dir $tmp_dir2" 1 2 15
-
-  # If directory and file are the same, then it's probably because there's
-  # no pathname component.  Set dirname to `.', the current directory.
-  if test "z${directory}" = "z${command_line_filename}"; then
-    directory=.
-  fi
+  # Get the name of the current directory.  We want the full path
+  # because in clean mode we are in tmp, in which case a relative
+  # path has no meaning.
+  filename_dir=`echo $command_line_filename | sed 's!/[^/]*$!!;s!^$!.!'`
+  filename_dir=`cd "$filename_dir" >/dev/null && pwd`
+
+  # Strip directory part but leave extension.
+  filename_ext=`basename "$command_line_filename"`
+  # Strip extension.
+  filename_noext=`echo "$filename_ext" | sed 's/\.[^.]*$//'`
+  ext=`echo "$filename_ext" | sed 's/^.*\.//'`
+
+  # _src.  Use same basename since we want to generate aux files with
+  # the same basename as the manual.  If --expand, then output the
+  # macro-expanded file to here, else copy the original file.
+  tmpdir_src=$tmpdir/src
+  filename_src=$tmpdir_src/$filename_noext.$ext
+
+  # _xtr.  The file with the user's extra commands.
+  tmpdir_xtr=$tmpdir/xtr
+  filename_xtr=$tmpdir_xtr/$filename_noext.$ext
+
+  # _bak.  Copies of the previous xref files (another round is run if
+  # they differ from the new one).
+  tmpdir_bak=$tmpdir/bak
+
+  # Make all those directories and give up if we can't succeed.
+  mkdir $tmpdir_src $tmpdir_xtr $tmpdir_bak || exit 1
 
-  # Source file might @include additional texinfo sources.  Put `.' and
+  # Source file might include additional sources.  Put `.' and
   # directory where source file(s) reside in TEXINPUTS before anything
-  # else.  `.' goes first to ensure that any old .aux, .cps, etc. files in
-  # ${directory} don't get used in preference to fresher files in `.'.
-  TEXINPUTS=".:${directory}:${TEXINPUTS_orig}"
+  # else.  `.' goes first to ensure that any old .aux, .cps,
+  # etc. files in ${directory} don't get used in preference to fresher
+  # files in `.'.  Include orig_pwd in case we are in clean mode, where
+  # we've cd'd to a temp directory.
+  common=".$path_sep$orig_pwd$path_sep$filename_dir$path_sep$txincludes$path_sep"
+   TEXINPUTS="$common$TEXINPUTS_orig"
+  INDEXSTYLE="$common$INDEXSTYLE_orig"
+
+  # If the user explicitly specified the language, use that.
+  # Otherwise, if the first line is \input texinfo, assume it's texinfo.
+  # Otherwise, guess from the file extension.
+  if test -n "$set_language"; then
+    language=$set_language
+  elif sed 1q "$command_line_filename" | fgrep 'input texinfo' >/dev/null; then
+    language=texinfo
+  else
+    language=
+  fi
+
+  # Get the type of the file (latex or texinfo) from the given language
+  # we just guessed, or from the file extension if not set yet.
+  case ${language:-$filename_ext} in
+    [lL]a[tT]e[xX] | *.ltx | *.tex)
+      # Assume a LaTeX file.  LaTeX needs bibtex and uses latex for
+      # compilation.  No makeinfo.
+      bibtex=${BIBTEX:-bibtex}
+      makeinfo= # no point in running makeinfo on latex source.
+      texindex=${MAKEINDEX:-makeindex}
+      if test $oformat = dvi; then
+        tex=${LATEX:-latex}
+      else
+        tex=${PDFLATEX:-pdflatex}
+      fi
+      ;;
+
+    *)
+      # Assume a Texinfo file.  Texinfo files need makeinfo, texindex and tex.
+      bibtex=
+      texindex=${TEXINDEX:-texindex}
+      if test $oformat = dvi; then
+        tex=${TEX:-tex}
+      else
+        tex=${PDFTEX:-pdftex}
+      fi
+      # Unless required by the user, makeinfo expansion is wanted only
+      # if texinfo.tex is too old.
+      if test "$expand" = t; then
+        makeinfo=${MAKEINFO:-makeinfo}
+      else
+        # Check if texinfo.tex performs macro expansion by looking for
+        # its version.  The version is a date of the form YEAR-MO-DA.
+        # We don't need to use [0-9] to match the digits since anyway
+        # the comparison with $txiprereq, a number, will fail with non
+        # digits.
+        txiversion_tex=txiversion.tex
+        echo '\input texinfo.tex @bye' >$tmpdir/$txiversion_tex
+        # Run in the tmpdir to avoid leaving files.
+        eval `cd $tmpdir >/dev/null \
+                    && $tex $txiversion_tex 2>/dev/null \
+| sed -n 's/^.*\[\(.*\)version \(....\)-\(..\)-\(..\).*$/txiformat=\1 txiversion="\2\3\4"/p'`
+        $verbose "texinfo.tex preloaded as \`$txiformat', version is \`$txiversion' ..."
+        if test "$txiprereq" -le "$txiversion" >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+          makeinfo=
+        else
+          makeinfo=${MAKEINFO:-makeinfo}
+        fi
+        # As long as we had to run TeX, offer the user this convenience
+        if test "$txiformat" = Texinfo; then
+          escape=@
+        fi
+      fi
+      ;;
+  esac
 
-  # Expand macro commands in the original source file using Makeinfo;
-  #   the macro syntax bfox implemented is impossible to implement in TeX.
+  # Expand macro commands in the original source file using Makeinfo.
   # Always use `end' footnote style, since the `separate' style
   #   generates different output (arguably this is a bug in -E).
   # Discard main info output, the user asked to run TeX, not makeinfo.
-  # Redirect output to /dev/null to throw away `Making info file...' msg.
-  $verbose "Macro-expanding $command_line_filename to $filename_tmp ..."
-  $makeinfo --footnote-style=end -E $filename_tmp -o /dev/null \
-    $command_line_filename >/dev/null
-
-  # But if there were no macros, or makeinfo failed for some reason,
-  # just use the original file.  (It shouldn't make any difference, but
-  # let's be safe.)
-  if test $? -ne 0 || cmp -s $filename_tmp $command_line_filename; then
+  if test -n "$makeinfo"; then
+    $verbose "Macro-expanding $command_line_filename to $filename_src ..."
+    sed -f $comment_iftex_sed "$command_line_filename" \
+      | $makeinfo --footnote-style=end -I "$filename_dir" $miincludes \
+        -o /dev/null --macro-expand=- \
+      | sed -f $uncomment_iftex_sed >"$filename_src"
+    filename_input=$filename_src
+  fi
+
+  # If makeinfo failed (or was not even run), use the original file as input.
+  if test $? -ne 0 \
+     || test ! -r "$filename_src"; then
     $verbose "Reverting to $command_line_filename ..."
-    cp -p $command_line_filename $filename_tmp
+    filename_input=$filename_dir/$filename_ext
   fi
-  filename_input=$filename_tmp
-  dirname_input=$tmp_dir
 
   # Used most commonly for @finalout, @smallbook, etc.
   if test -n "$textra"; then
-    $verbose "Inserting extra commands: $textra."
+    $verbose "Inserting extra commands: $textra"
     sed '/^@setfilename/a\
-'"$textra" $filename_input >$filename_tmp2
-   filename_input=$filename_tmp2
-   dirname_input=$tmp_dir2
+'"$textra" "$filename_input" >$filename_xtr
+    filename_input=$filename_xtr
   fi
 
   # If clean mode was specified, then move to the temporary directory.
   if test "$clean" = t; then
-    $verbose "cd $dirname_input"
-    cd $dirname_input || exit 1
-    filename_input=`basename $filename_input`
+    $verbose "cd $tmpdir_src"
+    cd "$tmpdir_src" || exit 1
   fi
 
-  while true; do # will break out of loop below
-    # "Unset" variables that might have values from previous iterations and
-    # which won't be completely reset later.
-    definite_index_files=
-
-    # Find all files having root filename with a two-letter extension,
-    # determine whether they're really index files, and save them.  Foo.aux
-    # is actually the cross-references file, but we need to keep track of
-    # that too.
-    possible_index_files="`eval echo ${filename_noext}.?? ${filename_noext}.aux`"
-    for this_file in ${possible_index_files}; do
-      # If file is empty, forget it.
-      test -s "${this_file}" || continue
-
-      # Examine first character of file.  If it's not suitable to be an
-      # index or xref file, don't process it.
-      first_character="`sed -n '1s/^\(.\).*$/\1/p;q' ${this_file}`"
-      if test "x${first_character}" = "x\\" \
-         || test "x${first_character}" = "x'"; then
-        definite_index_files="${definite_index_files} ${this_file}"
+  while :; do # will break out of loop below
+    orig_xref_files=`$get_xref_files "$filename_noext"`
+
+    # Save copies of originals for later comparison.
+    if test -n "$orig_xref_files"; then
+      $verbose "Backing up xref files: `echo $orig_xref_files | sed 's|\./||g'`"
+      cp $orig_xref_files $tmpdir_bak
+    fi
+
+    # Run bibtex on current file.
+    # - If its input (AUX) exists.
+    # - If AUX contains both `\bibdata' and `\bibstyle'.
+    # - If some citations are missing (LOG contains `Citation').
+    #   or the LOG complains of a missing .bbl
+    #
+    # We run bibtex first, because I can see reasons for the indexes
+    # to change after bibtex is run, but I see no reason for the
+    # converse.
+    #
+    # Don't try to be too smart.  Running bibtex only if the bbl file
+    # exists and is older than the LaTeX file is wrong, since the
+    # document might include files that have changed.  Because there
+    # can be several AUX (if there are \include's), but a single LOG,
+    # looking for missing citations in LOG is easier, though we take
+    # the risk to match false messages.
+    if test -n "$bibtex" \
+       && test -r "$filename_noext.aux" \
+       && test -r "$filename_noext.log" \
+       && (grep '^\\bibdata[{]'  "$filename_noext.aux" \
+           && grep '^\\bibstyle[{]' "$filename_noext.aux" \
+           && (grep 'Warning:.*Citation.*undefined' "$filename_noext.log" \
+               || grep 'No file .*\.bbl\.' "$filename_noext.log")) \
+          >/dev/null 2>&1; \
+    then
+      $verbose "Running $bibtex $filename_noext ..."
+      if $bibtex "$filename_noext" >&5; then :; else
+        echo "$0: $bibtex exited with bad status, quitting." >&2
+        exit 1
+      fi
+    fi
+
+    # What we'll run texindex on -- exclude non-index files.
+    # Since we know index files are last, it is correct to remove everything
+    # before .aux and .?o?.
+    index_files=`echo "$orig_xref_files" \
+                 | sed "s!.*\.aux!!g;
+                        s!./$filename_noext\..o.!!g;
+                        s/^[ ]*//;s/[ ]*$//"`
+    # Run texindex (or makeindex) on current index files.  If they
+    # already exist, and after running TeX a first time the index
+    # files don't change, then there's no reason to run TeX again.
+    # But we won't know that if the index files are out of date or
+    # nonexistent.
+    if test -n "$texindex" && test -n "$index_files"; then
+      $verbose "Running $texindex $index_files ..."
+      if $texindex $index_files 2>&5 1>&2; then :; else
+         echo "$0: $texindex exited with bad status, quitting." >&2
+         exit 1
       fi
-    done
-    orig_index_files="${definite_index_files}"
-    orig_index_files_sans_aux="`echo ${definite_index_files} \
-                                 | sed 's/'${filename_noext}'\.aux//;
-                                        s/^[ ]*//;s/[ ]*$//;'`"
-
-    # Now save copies of original index files so we have some means of
-    # comparison later.
-    $verbose "Backing up current index files: $orig_index_files ..."  
-    for index_file_to_save in ${orig_index_files}; do
-      cp "${index_file_to_save}" "${index_file_to_save}${backup_extension}"
-    done
-
-    # Run texindex on current index files.  If they already exist, and
-    # after running TeX a first time the index files don't change, then
-    # there's no reason to run TeX again.  But we won't know that if the
-    # index files are out of date or nonexistent.
-    if test -n "${orig_index_files_sans_aux}"; then
-      $verbose "Running $texindex $orig_index_files_sans_aux ..."
-      ${texindex} ${orig_index_files_sans_aux}
     fi
 
     # Finally, run TeX.
-    if test "$batch" = t; then
-      tex_mode='\nonstopmode'
-    else
-      tex_mode=
+    # Prevent $ESCAPE from being interpreted by the shell if it happens
+    # to be `/'.
+    $batch tex_args="\\${escape}nonstopmode\ \\${escape}input"
+    $verbose "Running $cmd ..."
+    cmd="$tex $tex_args $filename_input"
+    if $cmd >&5; then :; else
+      echo "$0: $tex exited with bad status, quitting." >&2
+      echo "$0: see $filename_noext.log for errors." >&2
+      test "$clean" = t \
+        && cp "$filename_noext.log" "$orig_pwd"
+      exit 1
     fi
-    $verbose "Running $tex $filename_input ..."
-    cmd="$tex $tex_mode \\input $filename_input"
-    $cmd
-
-    # Check if index files changed.
-    # 
-    definite_index_files=
-    # Get list of new index files.
-    possible_index_files="`eval echo ${filename_noext}.?? ${filename_noext}.aux`"
-    for this_file in ${possible_index_files}; do
-       # If file is empty, forget it.
-       test -s "${this_file}" || continue
-
-       # Examine first character of file.  If it's not a backslash or
-       # single quote, then it's definitely not an index or xref file.
-       # (Will have to check for @ when we switch to Texinfo syntax in
-       # all these files...)
-       first_character="`sed -n '1s/^\(.\).*$/\1/p;q' ${this_file}`"
-       if test "x${first_character}" = "x\\" \
-          || test "x${first_character}" = "x'"; then
-         definite_index_files="${definite_index_files} ${this_file}"
-       fi
-    done
-    new_index_files="${definite_index_files}"
-    new_index_files_sans_aux="`echo ${definite_index_files} \
-                               | sed 's/'${filename_noext}'\.aux//;
-                                      s/^[ ]*//;s/[ ]*$//;'`"
-
-    # If old and new list don't at least have the same file list, then one
-    # file or another has definitely changed.
-    $verbose "Original index files =$orig_index_files"
-    $verbose "New index files =$new_index_files"
-    if test "z${orig_index_files}" != "z${new_index_files}"; then
-      index_files_changed_p=t
-    else
-      # File list is the same.  We must compare each file until we find a
-      # difference.
-      index_files_changed_p=
-      for this_file in ${new_index_files}; do
-        $verbose "Comparing index file $this_file ..."
-        # cmp -s will return nonzero exit status if files differ.
-        cmp -s "${this_file}" "${this_file}${backup_extension}"
-        if test $? -ne 0; then
-          # We only need to keep comparing until we find *one* that
-          # differs, because we'll have to run texindex & tex no
-          # matter what.
-          index_files_changed_p=t
-          $verbose "Index file $this_file differed:"
-          test $verbose = echo \
-          && diff -c "${this_file}${backup_extension}" "${this_file}"
+
+
+    # Decide if looping again is needed.
+    finished=t
+
+    # LaTeX (and the package changebar) report in the LOG file if it
+    # should be rerun.  This is needed for files included from
+    # subdirs, since texi2dvi does not try to compare xref files in
+    # subdirs.  Performing xref files test is still good since LaTeX
+    # does not report changes in xref files.
+    if fgrep "Rerun to get" "$filename_noext.log" >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+      finished=
+    fi
+
+    # Check if xref files changed.
+    new_xref_files=`$get_xref_files "$filename_noext"`
+    $verbose "Original xref files = `echo $orig_xref_files | sed 's|\./||g'`"
+    $verbose "New xref files      = `echo $new_xref_files | sed 's|\./||g'`"
+
+    # If old and new lists don't at least have the same file list,
+    # then one file or another has definitely changed.
+    test "x$orig_xref_files" != "x$new_xref_files" && finished=
+
+    # File list is the same.  We must compare each file until we find
+    # a difference.
+    if test -n "$finished"; then
+      for this_file in $new_xref_files; do
+        $verbose "Comparing xref file `echo $this_file | sed 's|\./||g'` ..."
+        # cmp -s returns nonzero exit status if files differ.
+        if cmp -s "$this_file" "$tmpdir_bak/$this_file"; then :; else
+          # We only need to keep comparing until we find one that
+          # differs, because we'll have to run texindex & tex again no
+          # matter how many more there might be.
+          finished=
+          $verbose "xref file `echo $this_file | sed 's|\./||g'` differed ..."
+          test "$debug" = t && diff -c "$tmpdir_bak/$this_file" "$this_file"
           break
         fi
       done
     fi
 
-    # If index files have changed since TeX has been run, or if the aux
-    # file wasn't present originally, run texindex and TeX again.
-    if test "${index_files_changed_p}"; then :; else
-      # Nothing changed.  We're done with TeX.
-      break
-    fi
+    # If finished, exit the loop, else rerun the loop.
+    test -n "$finished" && break
   done
 
   # If we were in clean mode, compilation was in a tmp directory.
-  # Copy the DVI file into the directory where the compilation
+  # Copy the DVI (or PDF) file into the directory where the compilation
   # has been done.  (The temp dir is about to get removed anyway.)
   # We also return to the original directory so that
   # - the next file is processed in correct conditions
   # - the temporary file can be removed
   if test -n "$clean"; then
-    $verbose "Copying DVI file from `pwd` to $orig_pwd"
-    cp -p $filename_noext.dvi $orig_pwd
+    $verbose "Copying $oformat file from `pwd` to $orig_pwd"
+    cp -p "./$filename_noext.$oformat" "$orig_pwd"
+    cd / # in case $orig_pwd is on a different drive (for DOS)
     cd $orig_pwd || exit 1
   fi
 
-  # Generate list of files to delete, then call rm once with the entire
-  # list.  This is significantly faster than multiple executions of rm.
-  file_list=
-  for file in ${orig_index_files}; do
-    file_list="${file_list} ${file}${backup_extension}"
-  done
-  if test -n "${file_list}"; then
-    $verbose "Removing $file_list $tmp_dir $tmp_dir2 ..."
-    rm -f ${file_list}
-    rm -rf $tmp_dir $tmp_dir2
+  # Remove temporary files.
+  if test "x$debug" = "x"; then
+    $verbose "Removing $tmpdir_src $tmpdir_xtr $tmpdir_bak ..."
+    cd /
+    rm -rf $tmpdir_src $tmpdir_xtr $tmpdir_bak
   fi
 done
 
 $verbose "$0 done."
-true # exit successfully.
+exit 0 # exit successfully, not however we ended the loop.
diff --git a/readline/doc/texi2html b/readline/doc/texi2html
index 4beec01..7bb8493 100755
--- a/readline/doc/texi2html
+++ b/readline/doc/texi2html
@@ -1,19 +1,1733 @@
-#!/usr/local/bin/perl
+#! /usr/bin/perl
 'di ';
 'ig 00 ';
 #+##############################################################################
-#                                                                              #
-# File: texi2html                                                              #
-#                                                                              #
-# Description: Program to transform most Texinfo documents to HTML             #
-#                                                                              #
+#
+# texi2html: Program to transform Texinfo documents to HTML
+#
+#    Copyright (C) 1999, 2000  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+#    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+#    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+#    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+#    (at your option) any later version.
+#
+#    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+#    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+#    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+#    GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+#    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+#    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+#    Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+# 
 #-##############################################################################
 
-# @(#)texi2html	1.52 01/05/98	Written (mainly) by Lionel Cons, Lionel.Cons@cern.ch
+# This requires perl version 5 or higher
+require 5.0;
+
+#++##############################################################################
+#
+# NOTE FOR DEBUGGING THIS SCRIPT:
+# You can run 'perl texi2html.pl' directly, provided you have
+# the environment variable T2H_HOME set to the directory containing
+# the texi2html.init file
+#
+#--##############################################################################
+
+# CVS version:
+# $Id$
 
+# Homepage:
+$T2H_HOMEPAGE = <<EOT;
+http://www.mathematik.uni-kl.de/~obachman/Texi2html
+EOT
+
+# Authors:  
+$T2H_AUTHORS = <<EOT;
+Written by: Lionel Cons <Lionel.Cons\@cern.ch> (original author)
+            Karl Berry  <karl\@freefriends.org>
+            Olaf Bachmann <obachman\@mathematik.uni-kl.de>
+            and many others.
+Maintained by: Olaf Bachmann <obachman\@mathematik.uni-kl.de>
+Send bugs and suggestions to <texi2html\@mathematik.uni-kl.de>
+EOT
+
+# Version: set in configure.in
+$THISVERSION = '1.64';
+$THISPROG = "texi2html $THISVERSION";	# program name and version
+  
 # The man page for this program is included at the end of this file and can be
 # viewed using the command 'nroff -man texi2html'.
-# Please read the copyright at the end of the man page.
+
+# Identity:
+
+$T2H_TODAY = &pretty_date;		# like "20 September 1993"
+# the eval prevents this from breaking on system which do not have
+# a proper getpwuid implemented
+eval { ($T2H_USER = (getpwuid ($<))[6]) =~ s/,.*//;}; # Who am i
+
+#+++############################################################################
+#                                                                              #
+# Initialization                                                               #
+# Pasted content of File $(srcdir)/texi2html.init: Default initializations     # 
+#                                                                              #
+#---############################################################################
+
+# leave this within comments, and keep the require statement
+# This way, you can directly run texi2html.pl, if $ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init
+# exists.
+
+# 
+# -*-perl-*-
+######################################################################
+# File: texi2html.init
+#
+# Sets default values for command-line arguments and for various customizable
+# procedures
+#
+# A copy of this file is pasted into the beginning of texi2html by
+# 'make texi2html'
+#
+# Copy this file and make changes to it, if you like.
+# Afterwards, either, load it with command-line option -init_file <your_init_file>
+#
+# $Id$
+
+######################################################################
+# stuff which can also be set by command-line options
+#
+#
+# Note: values set here, overwrite values set by the command-line
+# options before -init_file and might still be overwritten by
+# command-line arguments following the -init_file option
+#
+
+# T2H_OPTIONS is a hash whose keys are the (long) names of valid
+# command-line options and whose values are a hash with the following keys:
+# type    ==> one of !|=i|:i|=s|:s (see GetOpt::Long for more info)
+# linkage ==> ref to scalar, array, or subroutine (see GetOpt::Long for more info)
+# verbose ==> short description of option (displayed by -h)
+# noHelp  ==> if 1 -> for "not so important options": only print description on -h 1
+#                2 -> for obsolete options: only print description on -h 2
+
+$T2H_DEBUG = 0;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {debug} =
+{
+ type => '=i',
+ linkage => \$main::T2H_DEBUG,
+ verbose => 'output HTML with debuging information',
+};
+
+$T2H_DOCTYPE = '<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">'; 
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {doctype} = 
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$main::T2H_DOCTYPE,
+ verbose => 'document type which is output in header of HTML files',
+ noHelp => 1
+};
+
+$T2H_CHECK = 0;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {check} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$main::T2H_CHECK,
+ verbose => 'if set, only check files and output all things that may be Texinfo commands',
+ noHelp => 1
+};
+
+# -expand
+# if set to "tex" (or, "info") expand @iftex and @tex (or, @ifinfo) sections
+# else, neither expand @iftex, @tex, nor @ifinfo sections
+$T2H_EXPAND = "info";
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {expand} = 
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_EXPAND,
+ verbose => 'Expand info|tex|none section of texinfo source',
+};
+
+# - glossary
+#if set, uses section named `Footnotes' for glossary
+$T2H_USE_GLOSSARY = 0;
+T2H_OPTIONS -> {glossary} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_USE_GLOSSARY,
+ verbose => "if set, uses section named `Footnotes' for glossary",
+ noHelp  => 1,
+};
+
+
+# -invisible
+# $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK is the text used to create invisible destination
+# anchors for index links (you can for instance use the invisible.xbm
+# file shipped with this program). This is a workaround for a known
+# bug of many WWW browsers, including netscape.
+# For me, it works fine without it -- on the contrary: if there, it
+# inserts space between headers and start of text (obachman 3/99)
+$T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK = '';
+# $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK = '&#160;';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {invisible} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK,
+ verbose => 'use text in invisble anchot',
+ noHelp  => 1,
+};
+
+# -iso
+# if set, ISO8879 characters are used for special symbols (like copyright, etc)
+$T2H_USE_ISO = 0;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {iso} =
+{
+ type => 'iso',
+ linkage => \$T2H_USE_ISO,
+ verbose => 'if set, ISO8879 characters are used for special symbols (like copyright, etc)',
+ noHelp => 1,
+};
+
+# -I
+# list directories where @include files are searched for (besides the
+# directory of the doc file) additional '-I' args add to this list
+@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS = (".");
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {I} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS,
+ verbose => 'append $s to the @include search path',
+};
+
+# -top_file
+# uses file of this name for top-level file
+# extension is manipulated appropriately, if necessary.
+# If empty, <basename of document>.html is used
+# Typically, you would set this to "index.html".
+$T2H_TOP_FILE = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {top_file} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_TOP_FILE,
+ verbose => 'use $s as top file, instead of <docname>.html',
+};
+
+
+# -toc_file
+# uses file of this name for table of contents file
+# extension is manipulated appropriately, if necessary.
+# If empty, <basename of document>_toc.html is used
+$T2H_TOC_FILE = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {toc_file} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_TOC_FILE,
+ verbose => 'use $s as ToC file, instead of <docname>_toc.html',
+};
+
+# -frames
+# if set, output two additional files which use HTML 4.0 "frames".
+$T2H_FRAMES = 0;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {frames} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_FRAMES,
+ verbose => 'output files which use HTML 4.0 frames (experimental)',
+ noHelp => 1,
+};
+
+
+# -menu | -nomenu
+# if set, show the Texinfo menus
+$T2H_SHOW_MENU = 1;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {menu} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_SHOW_MENU,
+ verbose => 'ouput Texinfo menus',
+};
+
+# -number | -nonumber
+# if set, number sections and show section names and numbers in references 
+# and menus
+$T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS = 1;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {number} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS,
+ verbose => 'use numbered sections'
+};
+
+# if set, and T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS is set, then use node names in menu
+# entries, instead of section names
+$T2H_NODE_NAME_IN_MENU = 0;
+
+# if set and menu entry equals menu descr, then do not print menu descr.
+# Likewise, if node name equals entry name, do not print entry name.
+$T2H_AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY = 1;
+
+# -split section|chapter|none 
+# if set to 'section' (resp. 'chapter') create one html file per (sub)section
+# (resp. chapter) and separate pages for Top, ToC, Overview, Index,
+# Glossary, About.
+# otherwise, create monolithic html file which contains whole document
+#$T2H_SPLIT = 'section';
+$T2H_SPLIT = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {split} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_SPLIT,
+ verbose => 'split document on section|chapter else no splitting',
+};
+
+# -section_navigation|-no-section_navigation
+# if set, then navigation panels are printed at the beginning of each section
+# and, possibly at the end (depending on whether or not there were more than 
+# $T2H_WORDS_IN_PAGE  words on page
+# This is most useful if you do not want to have section navigation 
+# on -split chapter
+$T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION = 1;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {sec_nav} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION,
+ verbose => 'output navigation panels for each section',
+};
+
+# -subdir
+# if set put result files in this directory
+# if not set result files are put into current directory
+#$T2H_SUBDIR = 'html';
+$T2H_SUBDIR = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {subdir} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_SUBDIR,
+ verbose => 'put HTML files in directory $s, instead of $cwd',
+};
+
+# -short_extn
+# If this is set all HTML file will have extension ".htm" instead of
+# ".html". This is helpful when shipping the document to PC systems.
+$T2H_SHORTEXTN = 0;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {short_ext} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_SHORTEXTN,
+ verbose => 'use "htm" extension for output HTML files',
+};
+
+
+# -prefix
+# Set the output file prefix, prepended to all .html, .gif and .pl files.
+# By default, this is the basename of the document
+$T2H_PREFIX = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {prefix} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_PREFIX,
+ verbose => 'use as prefix for output files, instead of <docname>',
+};
+
+# -o filename
+# If set, generate monolithic document output html into $filename
+$T2H_OUT = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {out_file} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => sub {$main::T2H_OUT = @_[1]; $T2H_SPLIT = '';},
+ verbose => 'if set, all HTML output goes into file $s',
+};
+
+# -short_ref
+#if set cross-references are given without section numbers
+$T2H_SHORT_REF = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {short_ref} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_SHORT_REF,
+ verbose => 'if set, references are without section numbers',
+};
+
+# -idx_sum
+# if value is set, then for each @prinindex $what
+# $docu_name_$what.idx is created which contains lines of the form
+# $key\t$ref sorted alphabetically (case matters)
+$T2H_IDX_SUMMARY = 0;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {idx_sum} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_IDX_SUMMARY,
+ verbose => 'if set, also output index summary',
+ noHelp  => 1,
+};
+
+# -verbose
+# if set, chatter about what we are doing
+$T2H_VERBOSE = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {Verbose} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_VERBOSE,
+ verbose => 'print progress info to stdout',
+};
+
+# -lang
+# For page titles use $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{...} as title.
+# To add a new language, supply list of titles (see $T2H_WORDS below).
+# and use ISO 639 language codes (see e.g. perl module Locale-Codes-1.02 
+# for  definitions)
+# Default's to 'en' if not set or no @documentlanguage is specified
+$T2H_LANG = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {lang} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => sub {SetDocumentLanguage($_[1])},
+ verbose => 'use $s as document language (ISO 639 encoding)',
+};
+
+# -l2h
+# if set, uses latex2html for generation of math content 
+$T2H_L2H = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_L2H,
+ verbose => 'if set, uses latex2html for @math and @tex',
+};
+
+######################
+# The following options are only relevant if $T2H_L2H is set
+#
+# -l2h_l2h
+# name/location of latex2html progam
+$T2H_L2H_L2H = "latex2html";
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_l2h} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_L2H_L2H,
+ verbose => 'program to use for latex2html translation',
+ noHelp => 1,
+};
+
+# -l2h_skip
+# if set, skips actual call to latex2html tries to reuse previously generated 
+# content, instead
+$T2H_L2H_SKIP = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_skip} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_L2H_SKIP,
+ verbose => 'if set, tries to reuse previously latex2html output',
+ noHelp => 1,
+};
+
+# -l2h_tmp
+# if set, l2h uses this directory for temporarary files. The path
+# leading to this directory may not contain a dot (i.e., a "."),
+# otherwise, l2h will fail
+$T2H_L2H_TMP = '';
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_tmp} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \$T2H_L2H_TMP,
+ verbose => 'if set, uses $s as temporary latex2html directory',
+ noHelp => 1,
+};
+
+# if set, cleans intermediate files (they all have the prefix $doc_l2h_) 
+# of l2h 
+$T2H_L2H_CLEAN = 1;
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {l2h_clean} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_L2H_CLEAN,
+ verbose => 'if set, do not keep intermediate latex2html files for later reuse',
+ noHelp => 1,
+};
+
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {D} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => sub {$main::value{@_[1]} = 1;},
+ verbose => 'equivalent to Texinfo "@set $s 1"',
+ noHelp => 1,
+};
+
+$T2H_OPTIONS -> {init_file} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => \&LoadInitFile,
+ verbose => 'load init file $s'
+};
+
+
+##############################################################################
+#
+# The following can only be set in the init file
+#
+##############################################################################
+
+# if set, center @image by default
+# otherwise, do not center by default
+$T2H_CENTER_IMAGE = 1;
+
+# used as identation for block enclosing command @example, etc
+# If not empty, must be enclosed in <td></td>
+$T2H_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL = '<td>&nbsp;</td>';
+# same as above, only for @small
+$T2H_SMALL_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL = '<td>&nbsp;</td>';
+# font size for @small
+$T2H_SMALL_FONT_SIZE = '-1';
+
+# if non-empty, and no @..heading appeared in Top node, then
+# use this as header for top node/section, otherwise use value of 
+# @settitle or @shorttitle (in that order)
+$T2H_TOP_HEADING = '';
+
+# if set, use this chapter for 'Index' button, else
+# use first chapter whose name matches 'index' (case insensitive)
+$T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER = '';
+
+# if set and $T2H_SPLIT is set, then split index pages at the next letter
+# after they have more than that many entries
+$T2H_SPLIT_INDEX = 100;
+
+# if set (e.g., to index.html) replace hrefs to this file 
+# (i.e., to index.html) by ./
+$T2H_HREF_DIR_INSTEAD_FILE = '';
+
+########################################################################
+# Language dependencies: 
+# To add a new language extend T2H_WORDS hash and create $T2H_<...>_WORDS hash
+# To redefine one word, simply do:
+# $T2H_WORDS->{<language>}->{<word>} = 'whatever' in your personal init file.
+#
+$T2H_WORDS_EN =
+{
+ # titles  of pages
+ 'ToC_Title' => 'Table of Contents',
+ 'Overview_Title' => 'Short Table of Contents',
+ 'Index_Title' => 'Index',
+ 'About_Title' => 'About this document',
+ 'Footnotes_Title' => 'Footnotes',
+ 'See' => 'See',
+ 'see' => 'see',
+ 'section' => 'section',
+# If necessary, we could extend this as follows: 
+#  # text for buttons
+#  'Top_Button' => 'Top',
+#  'ToC_Button' => 'Contents',
+#  'Overview_Button' => 'Overview',
+#  'Index_button' => 'Index',
+#  'Back_Button' => 'Back',
+#  'FastBack_Button' => 'FastBack',
+#  'Prev_Button' => 'Prev',
+#  'Up_Button' => 'Up',
+#  'Next_Button' => 'Next',
+#  'Forward_Button' =>'Forward',
+#  'FastWorward_Button' => 'FastForward',
+#  'First_Button' => 'First',
+#  'Last_Button' => 'Last',
+#  'About_Button' => 'About'
+};
+
+$T2H_WORD_DE =
+{
+ 'ToC_Title' => 'Inhaltsverzeichniss',
+ 'Overview_Title' => 'Kurzes Inhaltsverzeichniss',
+ 'Index_Title' => 'Index',
+ 'About_Title' => '&Uuml;ber dieses Dokument',
+ 'Footnotes_Title' => 'Fu&szlig;noten',
+ 'See' => 'Siehe',
+ 'see' => 'siehe',
+ 'section' => 'Abschnitt',
+};
+
+$T2H_WORD_NL =
+{
+ 'ToC_Title' => 'Inhoudsopgave',
+ 'Overview_Title' => 'Korte inhoudsopgave',
+ 'Index_Title' => 'Index', #Not sure ;-)
+ 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available!
+ 'Footnotes_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available!
+ 'See' => 'Zie',
+ 'see' => 'zie',
+ 'section' => 'sectie',
+};
+
+$T2H_WORD_ES =
+{
+ 'ToC_Title' => '&iacute;ndice General',
+ 'Overview_Title' => 'Resumen del Contenido',
+ 'Index_Title' => 'Index', #Not sure ;-)
+ 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available!
+ 'Footnotes_Title' => 'Fu&szlig;noten',
+ 'See' => 'V&eacute;ase',
+ 'see' => 'v&eacute;ase',
+ 'section' => 'secci&oacute;n',
+};
+
+$T2H_WORD_NO =
+{
+ 'ToC_Title' => 'Innholdsfortegnelse',
+ 'Overview_Title' => 'Kort innholdsfortegnelse',
+ 'Index_Title' => 'Indeks', #Not sure ;-)
+ 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available!
+ 'Footnotes_Title' => 'No translation available!',
+ 'See' => 'Se',
+ 'see' => 'se',
+ 'section' => 'avsnitt',
+};
+
+$T2H_WORD_PT =
+{
+ 'ToC_Title' => 'Sum&aacute;rio',
+ 'Overview_Title' => 'Breve Sum&aacute;rio',
+ 'Index_Title' => '&Iacute;ndice', #Not sure ;-)
+ 'About_Title' => 'No translation available!', #No translation available!
+ 'Footnotes_Title' => 'No translation available!',
+ 'See' => 'Veja',
+ 'see' => 'veja',
+ 'section' => 'Se&ccedil;&atilde;o',
+};
+
+$T2H_WORDS =
+{
+ 'en' => $T2H_WORDS_EN,
+ 'de' => $T2H_WORDS_DE,
+ 'nl' => $T2H_WORDS_NL,
+ 'es' => $T2H_WORDS_ES,
+ 'no' => $T2H_WORDS_NO,
+ 'pt' => $T2H_WORDS_PT
+};
+
+@MONTH_NAMES_EN =
+(
+ 'January', 'February', 'March', 'April', 'May',
+ 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September', 'October',
+ 'November', 'December'
+);
+
+@MONTH_NAMES_DE =
+(
+ 'Januar', 'Februar', 'M&auml;rz', 'April', 'Mai',
+ 'Juni', 'Juli', 'August', 'September', 'Oktober',
+ 'November', 'Dezember'
+);
+
+@MONTH_NAMES_NL =
+(
+ 'Januari', 'Februari', 'Maart', 'April', 'Mei',
+ 'Juni', 'Juli', 'Augustus', 'September', 'Oktober',
+ 'November', 'December'
+);
+
+@MONTH_NAMES_ES =
+(
+ 'enero', 'febrero', 'marzo', 'abril', 'mayo',
+ 'junio', 'julio', 'agosto', 'septiembre', 'octubre',
+ 'noviembre', 'diciembre'
+);
+
+@MONTH_NAMES_NO =
+(
+
+ 'januar', 'februar', 'mars', 'april', 'mai',
+ 'juni', 'juli', 'august', 'september', 'oktober',
+ 'november', 'desember'
+);
+
+@MONTH_NAMES_PT =
+(
+ 'Janeiro', 'Fevereiro', 'Mar&ccedil;o', 'Abril', 'Maio',
+ 'Junho', 'Julho', 'Agosto', 'Setembro', 'Outubro',
+ 'Novembro', 'Dezembro'
+);
+
+
+$MONTH_NAMES =
+{
+    'en' => \@MONTH_NAMES_EN,
+    'de' => \@MONTH_NAMES_DE,
+    'es' => \@MONTH_NAMES_ES,
+    'nl' => \@MONTH_NAMES_NL,
+    'no' => \@MONTH_NAMES_NO,
+    'pt' => \@MONTH_NAMES_PT
+};
+########################################################################
+# Control of Page layout:
+# You can make changes of the Page layout at two levels:
+# 1.) For small changes, it is often enough to change the value of
+#     some global string/hash/array variables
+# 2.) For larger changes, reimplement one of the T2H_DEFAULT_<fnc>* routines,
+#     give them another name, and assign them to the respective
+#     $T2H_<fnc> variable.
+
+# As a general interface, the hashes T2H_HREF, T2H_NAME, T2H_NODE hold 
+# href, html-name, node-name of
+# This     -- current section (resp. html page)
+# Top      -- top page ($T2H_TOP_FILE)
+# Contents -- Table of contents
+# Overview -- Short table of contents
+# Index    -- Index page
+# About    -- page which explain "navigation buttons"
+# First    -- first node 
+# Last     -- last node
+#
+# Whether or not the following hash values are set, depends on the context 
+# (all values are w.r.t. 'This' section)
+# Next        -- next node of texinfo
+# Prev        -- previous node of texinfo
+# Up          -- up node of texinfo
+# Forward     -- next node in reading order
+# Back        -- previous node in reading order
+# FastForward -- if leave node, up and next, else next node
+# FastBackward-- if leave node, up and prev, else prev node
+#
+# Furthermore, the following global variabels are set:
+# $T2H_THISDOC{title}     -- title as set by @setttile
+# $T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle} -- full title as set by @title...
+# $T2H_THISDOC{subtitle}  -- subtitle as set by @subtitle
+# $T2H_THISDOC{author}    -- author as set by @author
+# 
+# and pointer to arrays of lines which need to be printed by t2h_print_lines 
+# $T2H_OVERVIEW      -- lines of short table of contents
+# $T2H_TOC           -- lines of table of contents
+# $T2H_TOP           -- lines of Top texinfo node 
+# $T2H_THIS_SECTION  -- lines of 'This' section
+
+#
+# There are the following subs which control the layout:
+#
+$T2H_print_section            = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_section;
+$T2H_print_Top_header         = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_header;       
+$T2H_print_Top_footer	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_footer;       
+$T2H_print_Top		      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top;              
+$T2H_print_Toc		      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Toc;              
+$T2H_print_Overview	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Overview;         
+$T2H_print_Footnotes	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_Footnotes;        
+$T2H_print_About	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_About;            
+$T2H_print_misc_header	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_header;      
+$T2H_print_misc_footer	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_footer;      
+$T2H_print_misc		      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc;
+$T2H_print_chapter_header     = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_header;      
+$T2H_print_chapter_footer     = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_footer;      
+$T2H_print_page_head	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_head;        
+$T2H_print_page_foot	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_foot;        
+$T2H_print_head_navigation    = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_head_navigation;  
+$T2H_print_foot_navigation    = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_foot_navigation;  
+$T2H_button_icon_img	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_button_icon_img;        
+$T2H_print_navigation	      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_navigation;       
+$T2H_about_body		      = \&T2H_DEFAULT_about_body;            
+$T2H_print_frame              = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_frame;
+$T2H_print_toc_frame          = \&T2H_DEFAULT_print_toc_frame;
+
+########################################################################
+# Layout for html for every sections
+#
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_section
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_SECTION_BUTTONS;
+  &$T2H_print_head_navigation($fh) if $T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION;
+  my $nw = t2h_print_lines($fh);
+  if ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section' && $T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION)
+  {
+    &$T2H_print_foot_navigation($fh, $nw);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    print $fh '<HR SIZE="6">' . "\n";
+  }
+}
+
+###################################################################
+# Layout of top-page I recommend that you use @ifnothtml, @ifhtml,
+# @html within the Top texinfo node to specify content of top-level
+# page. 
+#
+# If you enclose everything in @ifnothtml, then title, subtitle,
+# author and overview is printed
+# T2H_HREF of Next, Prev, Up, Forward, Back are not defined
+# if $T2H_SPLIT then Top page is in its own html file
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_header
+{
+  &$T2H_print_page_head(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT;
+  t2h_print_label(@_); # this needs to be called, otherwise no label set
+  &$T2H_print_head_navigation(@_);
+}
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top_footer
+{
+  &$T2H_print_foot_navigation(@_);
+  &$T2H_print_page_foot(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT; 
+}
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Top
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+
+  # for redefining navigation buttons use:
+  # local $T2H_BUTTONS = [...];
+  # as it is, 'Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About' are printed
+  local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_MISC_BUTTONS;
+  &$T2H_print_Top_header($fh);
+  if ($T2H_THIS_SECTION)
+  {
+    # if top-level node has content, then print it with extra header
+    print $fh "<H1>$T2H_NAME{Top}</H1>"
+      unless ($T2H_HAS_TOP_HEADING);
+    t2h_print_lines($fh, $T2H_THIS_SECTION)
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    # top-level node is fully enclosed in @ifnothtml
+    # print fulltitle, subtitle, author, Overview
+    print $fh 
+      "<CENTER>\n<H1>" .
+      join("</H1>\n<H1>", split(/\n/,  $T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle})) .
+      "</H1>\n";
+    print $fh "<H2>$T2H_THISDOC{subtitle}</H2>\n" if $T2H_THISDOC{subtitle};
+    print $fh "$T2H_THISDOC{author}\n" if $T2H_THISDOC{author};
+    print $fh <<EOT;
+</CENTER>
+<HR>
+<P></P>  
+<H2> Overview: </H2>
+<BLOCKQUOTE>  
+EOT
+    t2h_print_lines($fh, $T2H_OVERVIEW);
+    print $fh "</BLOCKQUOTE>\n";
+  }
+  &$T2H_print_Top_footer($fh);
+}
+
+###################################################################
+# Layout of Toc, Overview, and Footnotes pages
+# By default, we use "normal" layout 
+# T2H_HREF of Next, Prev, Up, Forward, Back, etc are not defined
+# use: local $T2H_BUTTONS = [...] to redefine navigation buttons
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Toc
+{
+  return &$T2H_print_misc(@_);
+}
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Overview
+{
+  return &$T2H_print_misc(@_);
+}
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_Footnotes
+{
+  return &$T2H_print_misc(@_);
+}
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_About
+{
+  return &$T2H_print_misc(@_);
+}
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_header
+{
+  &$T2H_print_page_head(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT;
+  # this needs to be called, otherwise, no labels are set
+  t2h_print_label(@_); 
+  &$T2H_print_head_navigation(@_);
+}
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc_footer
+{
+  &$T2H_print_foot_navigation(@_);
+  &$T2H_print_page_foot(@_) if $T2H_SPLIT; 
+}
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_misc
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_MISC_BUTTONS;
+  &$T2H_print_misc_header($fh);
+  print $fh "<H1>$T2H_NAME{This}</H1>\n";
+  t2h_print_lines($fh);
+  &$T2H_print_misc_footer($fh);
+}
+
+###################################################################
+# chapter_header and chapter_footer are only called if
+# T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter'
+# chapter_header: after print_page_header, before print_section
+# chapter_footer: after print_section of last section, before print_page_footer
+# 
+# If you want to get rid of navigation stuff after each section,
+# redefine print_section such that it does not call print_navigation,
+# and put print_navigation into print_chapter_header
+@T2H_CHAPTER_BUTTONS =
+  (
+   'FastBack', 'FastForward', ' ', 
+   ' ', ' ', ' ', ' ',
+   'Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About', 
+  );
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_header
+{
+  # nothing to do there, by default
+  if (! $T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION)
+  {
+    my $fh = shift;
+    local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_CHAPTER_BUTTONS;
+    &$T2H_print_navigation($fh);
+    print $fh "\n<HR SIZE=2>\n";
+  }
+}
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_chapter_footer
+{
+  local $T2H_BUTTONS = \@T2H_CHAPTER_BUTTONS;
+  &$T2H_print_navigation(@_);
+}
+###################################################################
+$T2H_TODAY = &pretty_date;		# like "20 September 1993"
+
+sub pretty_date {
+    local($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst);
+
+    ($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst) = localtime(time);
+    $year += ($year < 70) ? 2000 : 1900;
+    # obachman: Let's do it as the Americans do
+    return($MONTH_NAMES->{$T2H_LANG}[$mon] . ", " . $mday . " " . $year);
+}
+
+
+###################################################################
+# Layout of standard header and footer
+#
+
+# Set the default body text, inserted between <BODY ... > 
+###$T2H_BODYTEXT = 'LANG="EN" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" TEXT="#000000" LINK="#0000FF" VLINK="#800080" ALINK="#FF0000"';
+$T2H_BODYTEXT = 'LANG="' . $T2H_LANG . '" BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF" TEXT="#000000" LINK="#0000FF" VLINK="#800080" ALINK="#FF0000"';
+# text inserted after <BODY ...>
+$T2H_AFTER_BODY_OPEN = '';
+#text inserted before </BODY>
+$T2H_PRE_BODY_CLOSE = '';
+# this is used in footer
+$T2H_ADDRESS = "by <I>$T2H_USER</I> " if $T2H_USER;
+$T2H_ADDRESS .= "on <I>$T2H_TODAY</I>";
+# this is added inside <HEAD></HEAD> after <TITLE> and some META NAME stuff
+# can be used for <style> <script>, <meta> tags
+$T2H_EXTRA_HEAD = '';
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_head
+{
+  my $fh = shift; 
+  my $longtitle = "$T2H_THISDOC{title}: $T2H_NAME{This}";
+  print $fh <<EOT;
+<HTML>
+$T2H_DOCTYPE
+<!-- Created on $T2H_TODAY by $THISPROG -->
+<!-- 
+$T2H_AUTHORS 
+-->
+<HEAD>
+<TITLE>$longtitle</TITLE>
+
+<META NAME="description" CONTENT="$longtitle">
+<META NAME="keywords" CONTENT="$longtitle">
+<META NAME="resource-type" CONTENT="document">
+<META NAME="distribution" CONTENT="global">
+<META NAME="Generator" CONTENT="$THISPROG">
+$T2H_EXTRA_HEAD
+</HEAD>
+
+<BODY $T2H_BODYTEXT>
+$T2H_AFTER_BODY_OPEN
+EOT
+}
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_page_foot
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  print $fh <<EOT;
+<BR>  
+<FONT SIZE="-1">
+This document was generated
+$T2H_ADDRESS
+using <A HREF="$T2H_HOMEPAGE"><I>texi2html</I></A>
+$T2H_PRE_BODY_CLOSE
+</BODY>
+</HTML>
+EOT
+}
+
+###################################################################
+# Layout of navigation panel
+
+# if this is set, then a vertical navigation panel is used
+$T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION = 0;
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_head_navigation
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  if ($T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION)
+  {
+    print $fh <<EOT;
+<TABLE BORDER="0" CELLPADDING="0" CELLSPACING="0">
+<TR VALIGN="TOP">
+<TD ALIGN="LEFT">
+EOT
+  }
+  &$T2H_print_navigation($fh, $T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION);
+  if ($T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION)
+  {
+    print $fh <<EOT;
+</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="LEFT">
+EOT
+  }
+  elsif ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section')
+  {
+    print $fh "<HR SIZE=1>\n";
+  }
+}
+
+# Specifies the minimum page length required before a navigation panel
+# is placed at the bottom of a page (the default is that of latex2html)
+# T2H_THIS_WORDS_IN_PAGE holds number of words of current page
+$T2H_WORDS_IN_PAGE = 300;
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_foot_navigation
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  my $nwords = shift;
+  if ($T2H_VERTICAL_HEAD_NAVIGATION)
+  {
+    print $fh <<EOT;
+</TD>
+</TR>
+</TABLE>
+EOT
+  }
+  print $fh "<HR SIZE=1>\n";
+  &$T2H_print_navigation($fh) if ($nwords >= $T2H_WORDS_IN_PAGE)
+}
+
+######################################################################
+# navigation panel
+#
+# specify in this array which "buttons" should appear in which order
+# in the navigation panel for sections; use ' ' for empty buttons (space)
+@T2H_SECTION_BUTTONS =
+  (
+   'Back', 'Forward', ' ', 'FastBack', 'Up', 'FastForward',  
+   ' ', ' ', ' ', ' ',
+   'Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About', 
+  );
+
+# buttons for misc stuff
+@T2H_MISC_BUTTONS = ('Top', 'Contents', 'Index', 'About');
+
+# insert here name of icon images for buttons 
+# Icons are used, if $T2H_ICONS and resp. value are set
+%T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS =
+  (
+   'Top',      '',
+   'Contents', '',
+   'Overview', '',
+   'Index',    '',
+   'Back',     '',
+   'FastBack', '',
+   'Prev',     '',
+   'Up',       '',
+   'Next',     '',
+   'Forward',  '',
+   'FastForward', '',
+   'About' ,    '',
+   'First',    '',
+   'Last',     '',
+   ' ',        ''
+  );
+
+# insert here name of icon images for these, if button is inactive
+%T2H_PASSIVE_ICONS =
+  (
+   'Top',      '',
+   'Contents', '',
+   'Overview', '',
+   'Index',    '',
+   'Back',     '',
+   'FastBack', '',
+   'Prev',     '',
+   'Up',       '',
+   'Next',     '',
+   'Forward',  '',
+   'FastForward', '',
+   'About',     '',
+   'First',    '',
+   'Last',     '',
+  );
+
+# how to create IMG tag
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_button_icon_img
+{
+  my $button = shift;
+  my $icon = shift;
+  my $name = shift;
+  return qq{<IMG SRC="$icon" BORDER="0" ALT="$button: $name" ALIGN="MIDDLE">};
+}
+
+# Names of text as alternative for icons
+%T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT =
+  (
+   'Top',      'Top',
+   'Contents', 'Contents',
+   'Overview', 'Overview',
+   'Index',    'Index',
+   ' ',        ' &nbsp; ',
+   'Back',     ' &lt; ',
+   'FastBack', ' &lt;&lt; ',
+   'Prev',     'Prev',
+   'Up',       ' Up ',
+   'Next',     'Next',
+   'Forward',  ' &gt; ',
+   'FastForward',  ' &gt;&gt; ',
+   'About',     ' ? ',
+   'First',    ' |&lt; ',
+   'Last',     ' &gt;| '
+  );
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_navigation
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  my $vertical = shift;
+  my $spacing = 1;
+  print $fh "<TABLE CELLPADDING=$spacing CELLSPACING=$spacing BORDER=0>\n";
+
+  print $fh "<TR>" unless $vertical;
+  for $button (@$T2H_BUTTONS)
+  {
+    print $fh qq{<TR VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="LEFT">\n} if $vertical;
+    print $fh qq{<TD VALIGN="MIDDLE" ALIGN="LEFT">};
+
+    if (ref($button) eq 'CODE')
+    {
+      &$button($fh, $vertical);
+    }
+    elsif ($button eq ' ')
+    { # handle space button
+      print $fh 
+	$T2H_ICONS && $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{' '} ? 
+	 &$T2H_button_icon_img($button, $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{' '}) :
+	 $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{' '};
+      next;
+    }
+    elsif ($T2H_HREF{$button})
+    { # button is active
+      print $fh   
+	 $T2H_ICONS && $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button} ? # use icon ? 
+	   t2h_anchor('', $T2H_HREF{$button},  # yes
+		    &$T2H_button_icon_img($button,
+					$T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button},
+					$T2H_NAME{$button})) 
+	 : # use text
+	 "[" . 
+	 t2h_anchor('', $T2H_HREF{$button}, $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{$button}) .
+	 "]";  
+    }
+    else
+    { # button is passive 
+      print $fh 
+	$T2H_ICONS && $T2H_PASSIVE_ICONS{$button} ?
+	 &$T2H_button_icon_img($button,
+			       $T2H_PASSIVE_ICONS{$button},
+			       $T2H_NAME{$button}) :
+	 
+	 "[" . $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{$button} . "]";
+    }
+    print $fh "</TD>\n";
+    print $fh "</TR>\n" if $vertical;
+  }
+  print $fh "</TR>" unless $vertical;
+  print $fh "</TABLE>\n";
+}
+
+######################################################################
+# Frames: this is from "Richard Y. Kim" <ryk@coho.net>
+# Should be improved to be more conforming to other _print* functions
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_frame
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  print $fh <<EOT;
+<HTML>
+<HEAD><TITLE>$T2H_THISDOC{title}</TITLE></HEAD>
+<FRAMESET cols="140,*"> 
+  <FRAME name=toc  src="$docu_toc_frame_file">
+  <FRAME name=main src="$docu_doc">
+</FRAMESET> 
+</HTML>
+EOT
+}
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_print_toc_frame
+{
+  my $fh = shift;
+  &$T2H_print_page_head($fh);
+  print $fh <<EOT;
+<H2>Content</H2>
+EOT
+  print $fh map {s/HREF=/target=\"main\" HREF=/; $_;} @stoc_lines;
+  print $fh "</BODY></HTML>\n";
+}
+
+######################################################################
+# About page
+#
+
+# T2H_PRE_ABOUT might be a function
+$T2H_PRE_ABOUT = <<EOT;
+This document was generated $T2H_ADDRESS
+using <A HREF="$T2H_HOMEPAGE"><I>texi2html</I></A>
+<P></P>  
+EOT
+$T2H_AFTER_ABOUT = '';
+
+sub T2H_DEFAULT_about_body
+{
+  my $about;
+  if (ref($T2H_PRE_ABOUT) eq 'CODE')
+  {
+    $about = &$T2H_PRE_ABOUT();
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    $about = $T2H_PRE_ABOUT;
+  }
+  $about .= <<EOT;
+The buttons in the navigation panels have the following meaning:
+<P></P>
+<table border = "1">
+<TR>
+<TH> Button </TH>
+<TH> Name </TH>
+<TH> Go to </TH>
+<TH> From 1.2.3 go to</TH>
+</TR>
+EOT
+  
+  for $button (@T2H_SECTION_BUTTONS)
+  {
+    next if $button eq ' ' || ref($button) eq 'CODE';
+    $about .= <<EOT;
+<TR>
+<TD ALIGN="CENTER">
+EOT
+    $about .= 	
+      ($T2H_ICONS && $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button} ?
+       &$T2H_button_icon_img($button, $T2H_ACTIVE_ICONS{$button}) :
+       " [" . $T2H_NAVIGATION_TEXT{$button} . "] ");
+    $about .= <<EOT;
+</TD>
+<TD ALIGN="CENTER">
+$button
+</TD>
+<TD>
+$T2H_BUTTONS_GOTO{$button}
+</TD>
+<TD>
+$T2H_BUTTONS_EXAMPLE{$button}
+</TD>
+</TR>
+EOT
+  }
+
+  $about .= <<EOT;
+</TABLE>
+<P></P>
+where the <STRONG> Example </STRONG> assumes that the current position 
+is at <STRONG> Subsubsection One-Two-Three </STRONG> of a document of 
+the following structure:
+<UL>
+<LI> 1. Section One  </LI>
+<UL>
+<LI>1.1 Subsection One-One</LI>
+<UL>
+<LI> ... </LI>
+</UL>
+<LI>1.2 Subsection One-Two</LI>
+<UL>
+<LI>1.2.1 Subsubsection One-Two-One
+</LI><LI>1.2.2 Subsubsection One-Two-Two
+</LI><LI>1.2.3 Subsubsection One-Two-Three &nbsp; &nbsp; <STRONG>
+&lt;== Current Position </STRONG>
+</LI><LI>1.2.4 Subsubsection One-Two-Four
+</LI></UL>
+<LI>1.3 Subsection One-Three</LI>
+<UL>
+<LI> ... </LI>
+</UL>
+<LI>1.4 Subsection One-Four</LI>
+</UL>
+</UL>
+$T2H_AFTER_ABOUT
+EOT
+  return $about;  
+}
+
+  
+%T2H_BUTTONS_GOTO =
+  (
+   'Top',      'cover (top) of document',
+   'Contents', 'table of contents',
+   'Overview', 'short table of contents',
+   'Index',    'concept index',
+   'Back',     'previous section in reading order',
+   'FastBack', 'previous or up-and-previous section ',
+   'Prev',     'previous section same level',
+   'Up',       'up section',
+   'Next',     'next section same level',
+   'Forward',  'next section in reading order',
+   'FastForward', 'next or up-and-next section',
+   'About' ,    'this page',
+   'First',    'first section in reading order',
+   'Last',     'last section in reading order',
+  );
+
+%T2H_BUTTONS_EXAMPLE = 
+(
+   'Top',      ' &nbsp; ',
+   'Contents', ' &nbsp; ',
+   'Overview', ' &nbsp; ',
+   'Index',    ' &nbsp; ',
+   'Back',     '1.2.2',
+   'FastBack', '1.1',
+   'Prev',     '1.2.2',
+   'Up',       '1.2',
+   'Next',     '1.2.4',
+   'Forward',  '1.2.4',
+   'FastForward', '1.3',
+   'About',     ' &nbsp; ',
+   'First',    '1.',
+   'Last',     '1.2.4',
+);
+
+
+######################################################################
+# from here on, its l2h init stuff 
+#
+
+## initialization for latex2html as for Singular manual generation
+## obachman 3/99
+
+#
+# Options controlling Titles, File-Names, Tracing and Sectioning
+#
+$TITLE = '';
+
+$SHORTEXTN = 0;
+
+$LONG_TITLES = 0;
+
+$DESTDIR = ''; # should be overwritten by cmd-line argument
+
+$NO_SUBDIR = 0;# should be overwritten by cmd-line argument
+
+$PREFIX = '';  # should be overwritten by cmd-line argument
+
+$AUTO_PREFIX = 0; # this is needed, so that prefix settings are used
+
+$AUTO_LINK = 0; 
+
+$SPLIT = 0;
+
+$MAX_LINK_DEPTH = 0;
+
+$TMP = ''; # should be overwritten by cmd-line argument
+
+$DEBUG = 0;
+
+$VERBOSE = 1;
+
+#
+# Options controlling Extensions and Special Features 
+#
+$HTML_VERSION = "3.2";
+
+$TEXDEFS = 1; # we absolutely need that
+
+$EXTERNAL_FILE = '';
+
+$SCALABLE_FONTS = 1;
+
+$NO_SIMPLE_MATH = 1;
+
+$LOCAL_ICONS = 1;
+
+$SHORT_INDEX = 0;
+
+$NO_FOOTNODE = 1;
+
+$ADDRESS = '';
+
+$INFO = '';
+
+#
+# Switches controlling Image Generation 
+#
+$ASCII_MODE = 0;
+
+$NOLATEX = 0;
+
+$EXTERNAL_IMAGES = 0;
+
+$PS_IMAGES = 0;
+
+$NO_IMAGES = 0;
+
+$IMAGES_ONLY = 0;
+
+$REUSE = 2;
+
+$ANTI_ALIAS = 1;
+
+$ANTI_ALIAS_TEXT = 1;
+
+#
+#Switches controlling Navigation Panels
+#
+$NO_NAVIGATION = 1;
+$ADDRESS = '';
+$INFO = 0;              # 0 = do not make a "About this document..." section 
+
+#
+#Switches for Linking to other documents 
+#
+# actuall -- we don't care
+
+$MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH = 0;	# Stop making separate files at this depth
+
+$MAX_LINK_DEPTH = 0;    # Stop showing child nodes at this depth   
+
+$NOLATEX = 0;           # 1 = do not pass unknown environments to Latex
+
+$EXTERNAL_IMAGES = 0;   # 1 = leave the images outside the document 
+
+$ASCII_MODE = 0;        # 1 = do not use any icons or internal images
+
+# 1 =  use links to external postscript images rather than inlined bitmap
+# images.
+$PS_IMAGES = 0;
+$SHOW_SECTION_NUMBERS = 0;
+
+### Other global variables ###############################################
+$CHILDLINE = "";
+
+# This is the line width measured in pixels and it is used to right justify
+# equations and equation arrays; 
+$LINE_WIDTH = 500;		
+
+# Used in conjunction with AUTO_NAVIGATION
+$WORDS_IN_PAGE = 300;	
+
+# Affects ONLY the way accents are processed 
+$default_language = 'english';	
+
+# The value of this variable determines how many words to use in each 
+# title that is added to the navigation panel (see below)
+# 
+$WORDS_IN_NAVIGATION_PANEL_TITLES = 0;
+
+# This number will determine the size of the equations, special characters,
+# and anything which will be converted into an inlined image
+# *except* "image generating environments" such as "figure", "table" 
+# or "minipage".
+# Effective values are those greater than 0.
+# Sensible values are between 0.1 - 4.
+$MATH_SCALE_FACTOR = 1.5;
+
+# This number will determine the size of 
+# image generating environments such as "figure", "table" or "minipage".
+# Effective values are those greater than 0.
+# Sensible values are between 0.1 - 4.
+$FIGURE_SCALE_FACTOR = 1.6;
+
+
+#  If both of the following two variables are set then the "Up" button
+#  of the navigation panel in the first node/page of a converted document
+#  will point to $EXTERNAL_UP_LINK. $EXTERNAL_UP_TITLE should be set
+#  to some text which describes this external link.
+$EXTERNAL_UP_LINK = "";
+$EXTERNAL_UP_TITLE = "";
+
+# If this is set then the resulting HTML will look marginally better if viewed 
+# with Netscape.
+$NETSCAPE_HTML = 1;
+
+# Valid paper sizes are "letter", "legal", "a4","a3","a2" and "a0"
+# Paper sizes has no effect other than in the time it takes to create inlined
+# images and in whether large images can be created at all ie
+#  - larger paper sizes *MAY* help with large image problems 
+#  - smaller paper sizes are quicker to handle
+$PAPERSIZE = "a4";
+
+# Replace "english" with another language in order to tell LaTeX2HTML that you 
+# want some generated section titles (eg "Table of Contents" or "References")
+# to appear in a different language. Currently only "english" and "french"
+# is supported but it is very easy to add your own. See the example in the
+# file "latex2html.config" 
+$TITLES_LANGUAGE = "english";
+
+1;	# This must be the last non-comment line
+
+# End File texi2html.init
+######################################################################
+
+
+require "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init" 
+  if ($0 =~ /\.pl$/ &&
+      -e "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init" && -r "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init");
+
+#+++############################################################################
+#                                                                              #
+# Initialization                                                               #
+# Pasted content of File $(srcdir)/MySimple.pm: Command-line processing        #
+#                                                                              #
+#---############################################################################
+
+# leave this within comments, and keep the require statement
+# This way, you can directly run texi2html.pl, if $ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init
+# exists.
+
+# 
+package Getopt::MySimple;
+
+# Name:
+#	Getopt::MySimple.
+#
+# Documentation:
+#	POD-style (incomplete) documentation is in file MySimple.pod
+#
+# Tabs:
+#	4 spaces || die.
+#
+# Author:
+#	Ron Savage	rpsavage@ozemail.com.au.
+#	1.00	19-Aug-97	Initial version.
+#	1.10	13-Oct-97	Add arrays of switches (eg '=s@').
+#	1.20	 3-Dec-97	Add 'Help' on a per-switch basis.
+#	1.30	11-Dec-97	Change 'Help' to 'verbose'. Make all hash keys lowercase.
+#	1.40	10-Nov-98	Change width of help report. Restructure tests.
+#               1-Jul-00        Modifications for Texi2html
+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Locally modified by obachman (Display type instead of env, order by cmp)
+# $Id$
+
+# use strict;
+# no strict 'refs';
+
+use vars qw(@EXPORT @EXPORT_OK @ISA);
+use vars qw($fieldWidth $opt $VERSION);
+
+use Exporter();
+use Getopt::Long;
+
+@ISA		= qw(Exporter);
+@EXPORT		= qw();
+@EXPORT_OK	= qw($opt);	# An alias for $self -> {'opt'}.
+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+$fieldWidth	= 20;
+$VERSION	= '1.41';
+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+sub byOrder
+{
+	my($self) = @_;
+	
+	return uc($a) cmp (uc($b));
+}
+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+sub dumpOptions
+{
+	my($self) = @_;
+
+	print 'Option', ' ' x ($fieldWidth - length('Option') ), "Value\n";
+
+	for (sort byOrder keys(%{$self -> {'opt'} }) )
+	{
+	  print "-$_", ' ' x ($fieldWidth - (1 + length) ), "${$self->{'opt'} }{$_}\n";
+	}
+
+	print "\n";
+
+}	# End of dumpOptions.
+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Return:
+#	0 -> Error.
+#	1 -> Ok.
+
+sub getOptions
+{
+	push(@_, 0) if ($#_ == 2);	# Default for $ignoreCase is 0.
+	push(@_, 1) if ($#_ == 3);	# Default for $helpThenExit is 1.
+
+	my($self, $default, $helpText, $versionText, 
+	   $helpThenExit, $versionThenExit, $ignoreCase) = @_;
+	
+	$helpThenExit = 1 unless (defined($helpThenExit));
+	$versionThenExit = 1 unless (defined($versionThenExit));
+	$ignoreCase = 0 unless (defined($ignoreCase));
+
+	$self -> {'default'}		= $default;
+	$self -> {'helpText'}		= $helpText;
+	$self -> {'versionText'}        = $versionText;
+	$Getopt::Long::ignorecase	= $ignoreCase;
+
+	unless (defined($self -> {'default'}{'help'}))
+	{
+	  $self -> {'default'}{'help'} = 
+	  { 
+	   type => ':i', 
+	   default => '',
+	   linkage => sub {$self->helpOptions($_[1]); exit (0) if $helpThenExit;},
+	   verbose => "print help and exit"
+	  };
+	}
+
+	unless (defined($self -> {'default'}{'version'}))
+	{
+	  $self -> {'default'}{'version'} = 
+	  { 
+	   type => '', 
+	   default => '',
+	   linkage => sub {print $self->{'versionText'};  exit (0) if versionTheExit;},
+	   verbose => "print version and exit"
+	  };
+	}
+
+	for (keys(%{$self -> {'default'} }) )
+	{
+	  my $type = ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'type'};
+	  push(@{$self -> {'type'} }, "$_$type");
+	  $self->{'opt'}->{$_} =  ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'linkage'}
+            if ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'linkage'};
+	}
+
+	my($result) = &GetOptions($self -> {'opt'}, @{$self -> {'type'} });
+
+        return $result unless $result;
+
+	for (keys(%{$self -> {'default'} }) )
+	{
+ 	   if (! defined(${$self -> {'opt'} }{$_})) #{
+            {
+ 	     ${$self -> {'opt'} }{$_} = ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'default'};
+            }
+	}
+
+	$result;
+}	# End of getOptions.
+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+sub helpOptions
+{
+	my($self) = shift;
+	my($noHelp) = shift;
+	$noHelp = 0 unless $noHelp;
+	my($optwidth, $typewidth, $defaultwidth, $maxlinewidth, $valind, $valwidth) 
+	  = (10, 5, 9, 78, 4, 11);
+
+	print "$self->{'helpText'}" if ($self -> {'helpText'});
+
+	print ' Option', ' ' x ($optwidth - length('Option') -1 ),
+		'Type', ' ' x ($typewidth - length('Type') + 1),
+		'Default', ' ' x ($defaultwidth - length('Default') ),
+	        "Description\n";
+
+	for (sort byOrder keys(%{$self -> {'default'} }) )
+	{
+	  my($line, $help, $option, $val);
+	  $option = $_;
+	  next if ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'noHelp'} && ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'noHelp'} > $noHelp;
+		$line = " -$_ " . ' ' x ($optwidth - (2 + length) ) .
+			"${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'type'} ".
+			' ' x ($typewidth - (1+length(${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'type'}) ));
+
+                 $val = ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'linkage'};
+                if ($val)
+                {
+                  if (ref($val) eq 'SCALAR')
+		  {
+		    $val = $$val; 
+		  }
+		  else
+		  {
+		    $val = '';
+		  }
+                }
+		else
+		{
+		  $val = ${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'default'};
+		}
+	        $line .= "$val  ";
+		$line .= ' ' x ($optwidth + $typewidth + $defaultwidth + 1 - length($line));
+		
+		if (defined(${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'verbose'}) &&
+		  ${$self -> {'default'} }{$_}{'verbose'} ne '')
+	      {
+		$help = "${$self->{'default'} }{$_}{'verbose'}";
+	      }
+	      else
+	      {
+		$help = ' ';
+	      }
+	      if ((length("$line") + length($help)) < $maxlinewidth)
+	      {
+		print $line , $help, "\n";
+	      }
+	      else
+	      {
+		print $line, "\n", ' ' x $valind, $help, "\n";
+	      }
+	      for $val (sort byOrder keys(%{${$self->{'default'}}{$option}{'values'}}))
+	      {
+	        print ' ' x ($valind + 2);
+	        print $val, '  ', ' ' x ($valwidth - length($val) - 2);
+	        print ${$self->{'default'}}{$option}{'values'}{$val}, "\n";
+	      }
+	}
+
+	print <<EOT;
+Note: 'Options' may be abbreviated. 'Type' specifications mean:
+ <none>| !    no argument: variable is set to 1 on -foo (or, to 0 on -nofoo)
+    =s | :s   mandatory (or, optional)  string argument
+    =i | :i   mandatory (or, optional)  integer argument
+EOT
+}	# End of helpOptions.
+
+#-------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+sub new
+{
+	my($class)				= @_;
+	my($self)				= {};
+	$self -> {'default'}	= {};
+	$self -> {'helpText'}	= '';
+	$self -> {'opt'}		= {};
+	$opt					= $self -> {'opt'};	 # An alias for $self -> {'opt'}.
+	$self -> {'type'}		= ();
+
+	return bless $self, $class;
+
+}	# End of new.
+
+# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+1;
+
+# End MySimple.pm
+
+require "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/MySimple.pm" 
+  if ($0 =~ /\.pl$/ &&
+      -e "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init" && -r "$ENV{T2H_HOME}/texi2html.init");
+
+package main;
 
 #+++############################################################################
 #                                                                              #
@@ -28,36 +1742,41 @@ $DEBUG_GLOSS =  8;
 $DEBUG_DEF   = 16;
 $DEBUG_HTML  = 32;
 $DEBUG_USER  = 64;
+$DEBUG_L2H   = 128;
+
 
 $BIBRE = '\[[\w\/-]+\]';		# RE for a bibliography reference
 $FILERE = '[\/\w.+-]+';			# RE for a file name
 $VARRE = '[^\s\{\}]+';			# RE for a variable name
-$NODERE = '[^@{}:\'`",]+';		# RE for a node name
-$NODESRE = '[^@{}:\'`"]+';		# RE for a list of node names
-$XREFRE = '[^@{}]+';			# RE for a xref (should use NODERE)
-
-$ERROR = "***";			        # prefix for errors and warnings
-$THISPROG = "texi2html 1.52";			# program name and version
-$HOMEPAGE = "http://wwwinfo.cern.ch/dis/texi2html/"; # program home page
-$TODAY = &pretty_date;			# like "20 September 1993"
-$SPLITTAG = "<!-- SPLIT HERE -->\n";	# tag to know where to split
+$NODERE = '[^,:]+';		        # RE for a node name
+$NODESRE = '[^:]+';		        # RE for a list of node names
+
+$ERROR = "***";			        # prefix for errors 
+$WARN  = "**";                          # prefix for warnings
+  
+                                        # program home page
 $PROTECTTAG = "_ThisIsProtected_";	# tag to recognize protected sections
-$html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//EN">';
 
-#
-# language dependent constants
-#
-#$LDC_SEE = 'see';
-#$LDC_SECTION = 'section';
-#$LDC_IN = 'in';
-#$LDC_TOC = 'Table of Contents';
-#$LDC_GOTO = 'Go to the';
-#$LDC_FOOT = 'Footnotes';
-# TODO: @def* shortcuts
+$CHAPTEREND = "<!-- End chapter -->\n"; # to know where a chpater ends
+$SECTIONEND = "<!-- End section -->\n"; # to know where section ends
+$TOPEND     = "<!-- End top     -->\n"; # to know where top ends
+
+  
 
 #
 # pre-defined indices
 #
+$index_properties =
+{
+ 'c' => { name => 'cp'},
+ 'f' => { name => 'fn', code => 1},
+ 'v' => { name => 'vr', code => 1},
+ 'k' => { name => 'ky', code => 1},
+ 'p' => { name => 'pg', code => 1},
+ 't' => { name => 'tp', code => 1}
+};
+
+
 %predefined_index = (
 		    'cp', 'c',
 		    'fn', 'f',
@@ -122,8 +1841,11 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	       # cf. makeinfo.c
 	       "*", "<BR>",		# HTML+
 	       " ", " ",
+	       "\t", " ",
+  	       "-", "&#173;",	# soft hyphen
 	       "\n", "\n",
 	       "|", "",
+	       'tab', '<\/TD><TD>',
 	       # spacing commands
 	       ":", "",
 	       "!", "!",
@@ -140,7 +1862,8 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	       'br', '<P>',		# paragraph break
 	       'bullet', '*',
 	       'copyright', '(C)',
-	       'dots', '...',
+	       'dots', '<small>...<\/small>',
+	       'enddots', '<small>....<\/small>',
 	       'equiv', '==',
 	       'error', 'error-->',
 	       'expansion', '==>',
@@ -148,27 +1871,45 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	       'point', '-!-',
 	       'print', '-|',
 	       'result', '=>',
-	       'today', $TODAY,
+	       'today', $T2H_TODAY,
+	       'aa', '&aring;',
+	       'AA', '&Aring;',
+	       'ae', '&aelig;',
+	       'oe', '&#156;',
+	       'AE', '&AElig;',
+	       'OE', '&#140;',
+	       'o',  '&oslash;',
+	       'O',  '&Oslash;',
+	       'ss', '&szlig;',
+	       'l', '\/l',
+	       'L', '\/L',
+	       'exclamdown', '&iexcl;',
+	       'questiondown', '&iquest;',
+	       'pounds', '&pound;'
 	       );
 
 #
 # texinfo styles (@foo{bar}) to HTML ones
 #
 %style_map = (
+	      'acronym', '&do_acronym',
 	      'asis', '',
 	      'b', 'B',
 	      'cite', 'CITE',
 	      'code', 'CODE',
+	      'command', 'CODE',
 	      'ctrl', '&do_ctrl',	# special case
 	      'dfn', 'EM',		# DFN tag is illegal in the standard
 	      'dmn', '',		# useless
 	      'email', '&do_email',     # insert a clickable email address
 	      'emph', 'EM',
+	      'env', 'CODE',
 	      'file', '"TT',		# will put quotes, cf. &apply_style
 	      'i', 'I',
 	      'kbd', 'KBD',
 	      'key', 'KBD',
-	      'math', 'EM',
+	      'math', '&do_math',
+	      'option', '"SAMP',        # will put quotes, cf. &apply_style
 	      'r', '',			# unsupported
 	      'samp', '"SAMP',		# will put quotes, cf. &apply_style
 	      'sc', '&do_sc',		# special case
@@ -179,19 +1920,23 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	      'url', '&do_url',         # insert a clickable URL
 	      'var', 'VAR',
 	      'w', '',			# unsupported
+	      'H', '&do_accent',
+	      'dotaccent', '&do_accent',
+	      'ringaccent','&do_accent',
+	      'tieaccent', '&do_accent',
+	      'u','&do_accent',
+	      'ubaraccent','&do_accent',
+	      'udotaccent','&do_accent',
+	      'v', '&do_accent',
+	      ',', '&do_accent',
+	      'dotless', '&do_accent'
 	      );
 
 #
 # texinfo format (@foo/@end foo) to HTML ones
 #
 %format_map = (
-	       'display', 'PRE',
-	       'example', 'PRE',
-	       'format', 'PRE',
-	       'lisp', 'PRE',
 	       'quotation', 'BLOCKQUOTE',
-	       'smallexample', 'PRE',
-	       'smalllisp', 'PRE',
 	       # lists
 	       'itemize', 'UL',
 	       'enumerate', 'OL',
@@ -201,6 +1946,38 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	       );
 
 #
+# an eval of these $complex_format_map->{what}->[0] yields beginning
+# an eval of these $complex_format_map->{what}->[1] yieleds end
+$complex_format_map =
+{
+ example => 
+ [
+  q{"<TABLE><tr>$T2H_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL<td class=example><pre>"},
+  q{'</pre></td></tr></table>'}
+ ],
+ smallexample => 
+ [
+  q{"<TABLE><tr>$T2H_SMALL_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL<td class=smallexample><FONT SIZE=$T2H_SMALL_FONT_SIZE><pre>"},
+  q{'</FONT></pre></td></tr></table>'}
+ ],
+ display =>
+ [
+  q{"<TABLE><tr>$T2H_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL<td class=display><pre " . 'style="font-family: serif">'},
+  q{'</pre></td></tr></table>'}
+ ],
+ smalldisplay =>
+ [
+  q{"<TABLE><tr>$T2H_SMALL_EXAMPLE_INDENT_CELL<td class=smalldisplay><FONT SIZE=$T2H_SMALL_FONT_SIZE><pre " . 'style="font-family: serif">'},
+  q{'</pre></FONT></td></tr></table>'}
+ ]
+};
+
+$complex_format_map->{lisp} = $complex_format_map->{example};
+$complex_format_map->{smalllisp} = $complex_format_map->{smallexample};
+$complex_format_map->{format} = $complex_format_map->{display};
+$complex_format_map->{smallformat} = $complex_format_map->{smalldisplay};
+
+#
 # texinfo definition shortcuts to real ones
 #
 %def_map = (
@@ -229,7 +2006,9 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	    'deftypefun', 'deftypefn Function',
 	    'deftypevar', 'deftypevr Variable',
 	    'defivar', 'defcv {Instance Variable}',
+	    'deftypeivar', 'defcv {Instance Variable}', # NEW: FIXME
 	    'defmethod', 'defop Method',
+	    'deftypemethod', 'defop Method', # NEW:FIXME
 	    # x shortcuts
 	    'defunx', 'deffnx Function',
 	    'defmacx', 'deffnx Macro',
@@ -249,7 +2028,15 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	    # comments
 	    'c', 1,
 	    'comment', 1,
+            'ifnotinfo', 1,
+            'ifnottex', 1,
+	    'ifhtml', 1,
+	    'end ifhtml', 1,
+            'end ifnotinfo', 1,
+            'end ifnottex', 1,
 	    # useless
+	    'detailmenu', 1,
+            'direntry', 1,
 	    'contents', 1,
 	    'shortcontents', 1,
 	    'summarycontents', 1,
@@ -263,6 +2050,7 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 	    'cropmarks', 1,
 	    'finalout', 1,
 	    'headings', 1,
+            'sp', 1,
 	    'need', 1,
 	    'page', 1,
 	    'setchapternewpage', 1,
@@ -289,88 +2077,221 @@ $html2_doctype = '<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML 2.0 Strict Level 2//E
 #                                                                              #
 #---############################################################################
 
-%value = ();				# hold texinfo variables, see also -D
+#
+# flush stdout and stderr after every write
+#
+select(STDERR);
+$| = 1;
+select(STDOUT);
+$| = 1;
+
 
+%value = ();				# hold texinfo variables, see also -D
 $use_bibliography = 1;
-$use_acc = 0;
-$debug = 0;
-$doctype = '';
-$check = 0;
-$expandinfo = 0;
-$use_glossary = 0;
-$invisible_mark = '';
-$use_iso = 0;
-@include_dirs = ();
-$show_menu = 0;
-$number_sections = 0;
-$split_node = 0;
-$split_chapter = 0;
-$monolithic = 0;
-$verbose = 0;
-$usage = <<EOT;
-This is $THISPROG
-To convert a Texinfo file to HMTL: $0 [options] file
-  where options can be:
-    -expandinfo    : use \@ifinfo sections, not \@iftex
-    -glossary      : handle a glossary
-    -invisible name: use 'name' as an invisible anchor
-    -Dname         : define name like with \@set
-    -I dir         : search also for files in 'dir'
-    -menu          : handle menus
-    -monolithic    : output only one file including ToC
-    -number        : number sections
-    -split_chapter : split on main sections
-    -split_node    : split on nodes
-    -usage         : print usage instructions
-    -verbose       : verbose output
-To check converted files: $0 -check [-verbose] files
-EOT
+$use_acc = 1;
 
-while (@ARGV && $ARGV[0] =~ /^-/) {
-    $_ = shift(@ARGV);
-    if (/^-acc$/)            { $use_acc = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-d(ebug)?(\d+)?$/) { $debug = $2 || shift(@ARGV); next; }
-    if (/^-doctype$/)        { $doctype = shift(@ARGV); next; }
-    if (/^-c(heck)?$/)       { $check = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-e(xpandinfo)?$/)  { $expandinfo = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-g(lossary)?$/)    { $use_glossary = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-i(nvisible)?$/)   { $invisible_mark = shift(@ARGV); next; }
-    if (/^-iso$/)            { $use_iso = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-D(.+)?$/)         { $value{$1 || shift(@ARGV)} = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-I(.+)?$/)         { push(@include_dirs, $1 || shift(@ARGV)); next; }
-    if (/^-m(enu)?$/)        { $show_menu = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-mono(lithic)?$/)  { $monolithic = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-n(umber)?$/)      { $number_sections = 1; next; }
-    if (/^-s(plit)?_?(n(ode)?|c(hapter)?)?$/) {
-	if ($2 =~ /^n/) {
-	    $split_node = 1;
-	} else {
-	    $split_chapter = 1;
-	}
-	next;
+#
+# called on -init-file
+sub LoadInitFile
+{
+  my $init_file = shift;
+  # second argument is value of options
+  $init_file = shift;
+  if (-f $init_file)
+  {
+    print "# reading initialization file from $init_file\n" 
+      if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    require($init_file);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    print "$ERROR Error: can't read init file $int_file\n";
+    $init_file = '';
+  }
+}
+
+#
+# called on -lang
+sub SetDocumentLanguage
+{
+  my $lang = shift;
+  if (! exists($T2H_WORDS->{$lang}))
+  {
+    warn "$ERROR: Language specs for '$lang' do not exists. Reverting to '" . 
+      ($T2H_LANG ? T2H_LANG : "en") . "'\n";
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    print "# using '$lang' as document language\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    $T2H_LANG = $lang;
+  }
+}
+
+##
+## obsolete cmd line options
+##
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {'no-section_navigation'} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => sub {$main::T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION = 0;},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use -nosec_nav',
+ noHelp => 2,
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {use_acc} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$use_acc,
+ verbose => 'obsolete',
+ noHelp => 2
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {expandinfo} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => sub {$main::T2H_EXPAND = 'info';},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use "-expand info" instead',
+ noHelp => 2,
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {expandtex} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => sub {$main::T2H_EXPAND = 'tex';},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use "-expand tex" instead',
+ noHelp => 2,
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {monolithic} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => sub {$main::T2H_SPLIT = '';},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use "-split no" instead',
+ noHelp => 2
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {split_node} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => sub{$main::T2H_SPLIT = 'section';},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use "-split section" instead',
+ noHelp => 2,
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {split_chapter} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => sub{$main::T2H_SPLIT = 'chapter';},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use "-split chapter" instead',
+ noHelp => 2,
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {no_verbose} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => sub {$main::T2H_VERBOSE = 0;},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use -noverbose instead',
+ noHelp => 2,
+};
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {output_file} =
+{
+ type => '=s',
+ linkage => sub {$main::T2H_OUT = @_[1]; $T2H_SPLIT = '';},
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use -out_file instead',
+ noHelp => 2
+};
+
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {section_navigation} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_SECTION_NAVIGATION,
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use -sec_nav instead',
+ noHelp => 2,
+};
+
+$T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS -> {verbose} =
+{
+ type => '!',
+ linkage => \$T2H_VERBOSE,
+ verbose => 'obsolete, use -Verbose instead',
+ noHelp => 2
+};
+
+# read initialzation from $sysconfdir/texi2htmlrc or $HOME/.texi2htmlrc
+my $home = $ENV{HOME};
+defined($home) or $home = '';
+foreach $i ('/usr/local/etc/texi2htmlrc', "$home/.texi2htmlrc") {
+    if (-f $i) {
+	print "# reading initialization file from $i\n" 
+	    if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+	require($i);
     }
-    if (/^-v(erbose)?$/)     { $verbose = 1; next; }
-    die $usage;
 }
-if ($check) {
-    die $usage unless @ARGV > 0;
+
+
+#+++############################################################################
+#                                                                              #
+# parse command-line options
+#                                                                              #
+#---############################################################################
+$T2H_USAGE_TEXT = <<EOT;
+Usage: texi2html  [OPTIONS] TEXINFO-FILE
+Translates Texinfo source documentation to HTML.
+EOT
+$T2H_FAILURE_TEXT = <<EOT;
+Try 'texi2html -help' for usage instructions.
+EOT
+$options = new Getopt::MySimple;
+
+# some older version of GetOpt::Long don't have 
+# Getopt::Long::Configure("pass_through")
+eval {Getopt::Long::Configure("pass_through");};
+$Configure_failed = $@ && <<EOT;
+**WARNING: Parsing of obsolete command-line options could have failed. 
+           Consider to use only documented command-line options (run
+           'texi2html -help 2' for a complete list) or upgrade to perl 
+           version 5.005 or higher.
+EOT
+
+if (! $options->getOptions($T2H_OPTIONS, $T2H_USAGE_TEXT, "$THISVERSION\n"))
+{
+  print $Configure_failed if $Configure_failed;
+  die $T2H_FAILURE_TEXT;
+}
+
+if (@ARGV > 1)
+{
+  eval {Getopt::Long::Configure("no_pass_through");};
+  if (! $options->getOptions($T2H_OBSOLETE_OPTIONS, $T2H_USAGE_TEXT, "$THISVERSION\n"))
+  {
+    print $Configure_failed if $Configure_failed;
+    die $T2H_FAILURE_TEXT;
+  }
+}
+
+if ($T2H_CHECK) {
+    die "Need file to check\n$T2H_FAILURE_TEXT" unless @ARGV > 0;
     &check;
     exit;
 }
 
-if (($split_node || $split_chapter) && $monolithic) {
-    warn "Can't use -monolithic with -split, -monolithic ignored.\n";
-    $monolithic = 0;
-}
-if ($expandinfo) {
-    $to_skip{'ifinfo'}++;
-    $to_skip{'end ifinfo'}++;
-} else {
-    $to_skip{'iftex'}++;
-    $to_skip{'end iftex'}++;
+#+++############################################################################
+#                                                                              #
+# evaluation of cmd line options
+#                                                                              #
+#---############################################################################
+
+if ($T2H_EXPAND eq 'info') 
+{
+  $to_skip{'ifinfo'} = 1;
+  $to_skip{'end ifinfo'} = 1;
+} 
+elsif ($T2H_EXPAND eq 'tex')
+{
+  $to_skip{'iftex'} = 1;
+  $to_skip{'end iftex'} = 1;
+  
 }
-$invisible_mark = '<IMG SRC="invisible.xbm">' if $invisible_mark eq 'xbm';
-die $usage unless @ARGV == 1;
+
+$T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK = '<IMG SRC="invisible.xbm">' if $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK eq 'xbm';
+
+#
+# file name buisness
+#
+die "Need exactly one file to translate\n$T2H_FAILURE_TEXT" unless @ARGV == 1;
 $docu = shift(@ARGV);
 if ($docu =~ /.*\//) {
     chop($docu_dir = $&);
@@ -379,29 +2300,123 @@ if ($docu =~ /.*\//) {
     $docu_dir = '.';
     $docu_name = $docu;
 }
-unshift(@include_dirs, $docu_dir);
+unshift(@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS, $docu_dir);
 $docu_name =~ s/\.te?x(i|info)?$//;	# basename of the document
+$docu_name = $T2H_PREFIX if ($T2H_PREFIX);
 
-$docu_doc = "$docu_name.html";		# document's contents
-if ($monolithic) {
-    $docu_toc = $docu_foot = $docu_doc;
-} else {
-    $docu_toc  = "${docu_name}_toc.html";  # document's table of contents
-    $docu_foot = "${docu_name}_foot.html"; # document's footnotes
+# subdir
+if ($T2H_SUBDIR && ! $T2H_OUT)
+{
+  $T2H_SUBDIR =~ s|/*$||;
+  unless (-d "$T2H_SUBDIR" && -w "$T2H_SUBDIR")
+  {
+    if ( mkdir($T2H_SUBDIR, oct(755)))
+    {
+      print "# created directory $T2H_SUBDIR\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      warn "$ERROR can't create directory $T2H_SUBDIR. Put results into current directory\n";
+      $T2H_SUBDIR = '';
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+if ($T2H_SUBDIR && ! $T2H_OUT)
+{
+  $docu_rdir = "$T2H_SUBDIR/";
+  print "# putting result files into directory $docu_rdir\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+}
+else
+{
+  if ($T2H_OUT && $T2H_OUT =~ m|(.*)/|)
+  {
+    $docu_rdir = "$1/";
+    print "# putting result files into directory $docu_rdir\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    print "# putting result files into current directory \n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    $docu_rdir = '';
+  }
+}
+
+# extension
+if ($T2H_SHORTEXTN)
+{
+  $docu_ext = "htm";
+}
+else
+{
+  $docu_ext = "html";
+}
+if ($T2H_TOP_FILE =~ /\..*$/)
+{
+  $T2H_TOP_FILE = $`.".$docu_ext";
 }
 
+# result files
+if (! $T2H_OUT && ($T2H_SPLIT =~ /section/i || $T2H_SPLIT =~ /node/i))
+{
+  $T2H_SPLIT = 'section';
+}
+elsif (! $T2H_OUT && $T2H_SPLIT =~ /chapter/i)
+{
+  $T2H_SPLIT = 'chapter'
+}
+else
+{
+  undef $T2H_SPLIT;
+}
+
+$docu_doc = "$docu_name.$docu_ext";		# document's contents
+$docu_doc_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_doc";
+if ($T2H_SPLIT) 
+{
+  $docu_toc  = $T2H_TOC_FILE || "${docu_name}_toc.$docu_ext"; # document's table of contents
+  $docu_stoc = "${docu_name}_ovr.$docu_ext"; # document's short toc
+  $docu_foot = "${docu_name}_fot.$docu_ext"; # document's footnotes
+  $docu_about = "${docu_name}_abt.$docu_ext"; # about this document
+  $docu_top  = $T2H_TOP_FILE || $docu_doc;
+}
+else
+{
+  if ($T2H_OUT)
+  {
+    $docu_doc = $T2H_OUT;
+    $docu_doc =~ s|.*/||;
+  }
+  $docu_toc = $docu_foot = $docu_stoc = $docu_about = $docu_top = $docu_doc;
+}
+
+$docu_toc_file  = "$docu_rdir$docu_toc";
+$docu_stoc_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_stoc";
+$docu_foot_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_foot";
+$docu_about_file = "$docu_rdir$docu_about";
+$docu_top_file  = "$docu_rdir$docu_top";
+
+$docu_frame_file =     "$docu_rdir${docu_name}_frame.$docu_ext";
+$docu_toc_frame_file = "$docu_rdir${docu_name}_toc_frame.$docu_ext";
+
 #
 # variables
 #
 $value{'html'} = 1;			# predefine html (the output format)
-$value{'texi2html'} = '1.52';		# predefine texi2html (the translator)
+$value{'texi2html'} = $THISVERSION;	# predefine texi2html (the translator)
 # _foo: internal to track @foo
 foreach ('_author', '_title', '_subtitle',
-	 '_settitle', '_setfilename') {
+	 '_settitle', '_setfilename', '_shorttitle') {
     $value{$_} = '';		        # prevent -w warnings
 }
 %node2sec = ();				# node to section name
+%sec2node = ();				# section to node name
+%sec2number = ();                       # section to number
+%number2sec = ();                       # number to section 
+%idx2node = ();                         # index keys to node
 %node2href = ();			# node to HREF
+%node2next = ();			# node to next
+%node2prev = ();			# node to prev
+%node2up   = ();			# node to up
 %bib2href = ();				# bibliography reference to HREF
 %gloss2href = ();			# glossary term to HREF
 @sections = ();				# list of sections
@@ -421,7 +2436,7 @@ $html_num = 0;
 #
 # can I use ISO8879 characters? (HTML+)
 #
-if ($use_iso) {
+if ($T2H_USE_ISO) {
     $things_map{'bullet'} = "&bull;";
     $things_map{'copyright'} = "&copy;";
     $things_map{'dots'} = "&hellip;";
@@ -436,19 +2451,487 @@ if ($use_iso) {
 #
 $extensions = 'texi2html.ext'; # extensions in working directory
 if (-f $extensions) {
-    print "# reading extensions from $extensions\n" if $verbose;
+    print "# reading extensions from $extensions\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
     require($extensions);
 }
 ($progdir = $0) =~ s/[^\/]+$//;
 if ($progdir && ($progdir ne './')) {
     $extensions = "${progdir}texi2html.ext"; # extensions in texi2html directory
     if (-f $extensions) {
-	print "# reading extensions from $extensions\n" if $verbose;
+	print "# reading extensions from $extensions\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
 	require($extensions);
     }
 }
 
-print "# reading from $docu\n" if $verbose;
+
+print "# reading from $docu\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+
+#########################################################################
+#
+# latex2html stuff
+# 
+# latex2html conversions consist of three stages:
+# 1) ToLatex: Put "latex" code into a latex file
+# 2) ToHtml: Use latex2html to generate corresponding html code and images
+# 3) FromHtml: Extract generated code and images from latex2html run
+#
+
+##########################
+# default settings
+#
+
+# defaults for files and names
+
+sub l2h_Init 
+{
+  local($root) = @_;
+  
+  return 0 unless ($root);
+  
+  $l2h_name =  "${root}_l2h";
+  
+  $l2h_latex_file = "$docu_rdir${l2h_name}.tex";
+  $l2h_cache_file = "${docu_rdir}l2h_cache.pm";
+  $T2H_L2H_L2H = "latex2html" unless ($T2H_L2H_L2H);
+  
+  # destination dir -- generated images are put there, should be the same
+  # as dir of enclosing html document -- 
+  $l2h_html_file = "$docu_rdir${l2h_name}.html";
+  $l2h_prefix = "${l2h_name}_";
+  return 1;
+}
+
+
+##########################
+# 
+# First stage: Generation of Latex file
+# Initialize with: l2h_InitToLatex
+# Add content with: l2h_ToLatex($text) --> HTML placeholder comment
+# Finish with: l2h_FinishToLatex
+# 
+
+$l2h_latex_preample = <<EOT;
+% This document was automatically generated by the l2h extenstion of texi2html
+% DO NOT EDIT !!!
+\\documentclass{article}
+\\usepackage{html}
+\\begin{document}
+EOT
+
+$l2h_latex_closing = <<EOT;
+\\end{document}
+EOT
+
+# return used latex 1, if l2h could be initalized properly, 0 otherwise
+sub l2h_InitToLatex
+{
+  %l2h_to_latex = ();
+  unless ($T2H_L2H_SKIP)
+  {
+    unless (open(L2H_LATEX, ">$l2h_latex_file"))
+    {
+      warn "$ERROR Error l2h: Can't open latex file '$latex_file' for writing\n";
+      return 0;
+    }  
+    print "# l2h: use ${l2h_latex_file} as latex file\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    print L2H_LATEX $l2h_latex_preample;
+  }
+  # open database for caching
+  l2h_InitCache();
+  $l2h_latex_count = 0;
+  $l2h_to_latex_count = 0;
+  $l2h_cached_count = 0;
+  return  1;
+}
+
+# print text (1st arg) into latex file (if not already there), return
+# HTML commentary which can be later on replaced by the latex2html
+# generated text
+sub l2h_ToLatex
+{
+  my($text) = @_;
+  my($count);
+  
+  $l2h_to_latex_count++;
+  $text =~ s/(\s*)$//;
+  
+  # try whether we can cache it
+  my $cached_text = l2h_FromCache($text);
+  if ($cached_text)
+  {
+    $l2h_cached_count++;
+    return $cached_text;
+  }
+  
+  # try whether we have text already on things to do
+  unless ($count = $l2h_to_latex{$text})
+  {
+    $count = $l2h_latex_count;
+    $l2h_latex_count++;
+    $l2h_to_latex{$text} = $count;
+    $l2h_to_latex[$count] = $text;
+    unless ($T2H_L2H_SKIP)
+    {
+      print L2H_LATEX "\\begin{rawhtml}\n";
+      print L2H_LATEX "<!-- l2h_begin ${l2h_name} ${count} -->\n";
+      print L2H_LATEX "\\end{rawhtml}\n";
+      
+      print L2H_LATEX "$text\n";
+      
+      print L2H_LATEX "\\begin{rawhtml}\n";
+      print L2H_LATEX "<!-- l2h_end ${l2h_name} ${count} -->\n";
+      print L2H_LATEX "\\end{rawhtml}\n";
+    }
+  }
+  return "<!-- l2h_replace ${l2h_name} ${count} -->"; 
+}
+
+# print closing into latex file and close it
+sub l2h_FinishToLatex
+{
+  local ($reused);
+  
+  $reused = $l2h_to_latex_count - $l2h_latex_count - $l2h_cached_count;
+  unless ($T2H_L2H_SKIP)
+  {
+    print L2H_LATEX $l2h_latex_closing;
+    close(L2H_LATEX);
+  }
+  print "# l2h: finished to latex ($l2h_cached_count cached, $reused reused, $l2h_latex_count contents)\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+  unless ($l2h_latex_count)
+  {
+    l2h_Finish();
+    return 0;
+  }
+  return 1;
+}
+
+###################################
+# Second stage: Use latex2html to generate corresponding html code and images
+#
+# l2h_ToHtml([$l2h_latex_file, [$l2h_html_dir]]):
+#   Call latex2html on $l2h_latex_file
+#   Put images (prefixed with $l2h_name."_") and html file(s) in $l2h_html_dir
+#   Return 1, on success
+#          0, otherwise
+#
+sub l2h_ToHtml
+{
+  local($call, $ext, $root, $dotbug);
+  
+  if ($T2H_L2H_SKIP)
+  {
+    print "# l2h: skipping latex2html run\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    return 1;
+  }
+  
+  # Check for dot in directory where dvips will work
+  if ($T2H_L2H_TMP)
+  {
+    if ($T2H_L2H_TMP =~ /\./)
+    {
+      warn "$ERROR Warning l2h: l2h_tmp dir contains a dot. Use /tmp, instead\n";
+      $dotbug = 1;
+    }
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    if (&getcwd =~ /\./)
+    {
+     warn "$ERROR Warning l2h: current dir contains a dot. Use /tmp as l2h_tmp dir \n";
+     $dotbug = 1;
+   }
+  }
+  # fix it, if necessary and hope that it works 
+  $T2H_L2H_TMP = "/tmp" if ($dotbug);
+    
+  $call = $T2H_L2H_L2H;
+  # use init file, if specified
+  $call = $call . " -init_file " . $init_file if ($init_file && -f $init_file);
+  # set output dir
+  $call .=  ($docu_rdir ? " -dir $docu_rdir" : " -no_subdir");
+  # use l2h_tmp, if specified
+  $call = $call . " -tmp $T2H_L2H_TMP" if ($T2H_L2H_TMP);
+  # options we want to be sure of
+  $call = $call ." -address 0 -info 0 -split 0 -no_navigation -no_auto_link";
+  $call = $call ." -prefix ${l2h_prefix} $l2h_latex_file"; 
+
+  print "# l2h: executing '$call'\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+  if (system($call))
+  {
+    warn "l2h ***Error: '${call}' did not succeed\n";
+    return 0;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    print "# l2h: latex2html finished successfully\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    return 1;
+  }
+}
+
+# this is directly pasted over from latex2html
+sub getcwd {
+    local($_) = `pwd`;
+
+    die "'pwd' failed (out of memory?)\n"
+	unless length;
+    chop;
+    $_;
+}
+
+
+##########################
+# Third stage: Extract generated contents from latex2html run
+# Initialize with: l2h_InitFromHtml
+#   open $l2h_html_file for reading
+#   reads in contents into array indexed by numbers
+#   return 1,  on success -- 0, otherwise
+# Extract Html code with: l2h_FromHtml($text)
+#   replaces in $text all previosuly inserted comments by generated html code
+#   returns (possibly changed) $text
+# Finish with: l2h_FinishFromHtml
+#   closes $l2h_html_dir/$l2h_name.".$docu_ext" 
+
+sub l2h_InitFromHtml
+{
+  local($h_line, $h_content, $count, %l2h_img);
+
+  if (! open(L2H_HTML, "<${l2h_html_file}"))
+  {
+    print "$ERROR Error l2h: Can't open ${l2h_html_file} for reading\n";
+    return 0;
+  }
+  print "# l2h: use ${l2h_html_file} as html file\n" if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+
+  $l2h_html_count = 0;
+  
+  while ($h_line = <L2H_HTML>)
+  {
+    if ($h_line =~ /^<!-- l2h_begin $l2h_name ([0-9]+) -->/)
+    {
+      $count = $1;
+      $h_content = "";
+      while ($h_line = <L2H_HTML>)
+      {
+	if ($h_line =~ /^<!-- l2h_end $l2h_name $count -->/)
+	{
+	  chomp $h_content;
+	  chomp $h_content;
+	  $l2h_html_count++;
+	  $h_content = l2h_ToCache($count, $h_content);
+	  $l2h_from_html[$count] = $h_content;
+	  $h_content = '';
+	  last;
+	}
+	$h_content = $h_content.$h_line;
+      }
+      if ($hcontent)
+      {
+	print "$ERROR Warning l2h: l2h_end $l2h_name $count not found\n" 
+	  if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+	close(L2H_HTML);
+	return 0;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  print "# l2h: Got $l2h_html_count of $l2h_latex_count html contents\n"
+    if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+
+  close(L2H_HTML);
+  return 1;
+}
+
+sub l2h_FromHtml
+{
+  local($text) = @_;
+  local($done, $to_do, $count);
+  
+  $to_do = $text;
+  
+  while ($to_do =~ /([^\000]*)<!-- l2h_replace $l2h_name ([0-9]+) -->([^\000]*)/)
+  {
+    $to_do = $1;
+    $count = $2;
+    $done = $3.$done;
+    
+    $done = "<!-- l2h_end $l2h_name $count -->".$done
+      if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H);
+
+    $done = &l2h_ExtractFromHtml($count) . $done;
+
+    $done = "<!-- l2h_begin $l2h_name $count -->".$done
+      if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H);
+  }
+  return $to_do.$done;
+}
+
+
+sub l2h_ExtractFromHtml
+{
+  local($count) = @_;
+  
+  return $l2h_from_html[$count] if ($l2h_from_html[$count]);
+  
+  if ($count >= 0 && $count < $l2h_latex_count)
+  {
+    # now we are in trouble
+    local($l_l2h, $_);
+
+    $l2h_extract_error++;
+    print "$ERROR l2h: can't extract content $count from html\n" 
+      if ($T2H_VERBOSE);
+    # try simple (ordinary) substition (without l2h)
+    $l_l2h = $T2H_L2H;
+    $T2H_L2H = 0;
+    $_ = $l2h_to_latex{$count};
+    $_ = &substitute_style($_); 
+    &unprotect_texi;
+    $_ = "<!-- l2h: ". __LINE__ . " use texi2html -->" . $_
+      if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H);
+    $T2H_L2H = $l_l2h;
+    return $_;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    # now we have been incorrectly called
+    $l2h_range_error++;
+    print "$ERROR l2h: Request of $count content which is out of valide range [0,$l2h_latex_count)\n";
+    return "<!-- l2h: ". __LINE__ . " out of range count $count -->"
+      if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_L2H);
+    return "<!-- l2h: out of range count $count -->";
+  }
+}
+    
+sub l2h_FinishFromHtml
+{
+  if ($T2H_VERBOSE)
+  {
+    if ($l2h_extract_error + $l2h_range_error)
+    {
+      print "# l2h: finished from html ($l2h_extract_error extract and $l2h_range_error errors)\n";
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      print "# l2h: finished from html (no errors)\n";
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+sub l2h_Finish
+{
+  l2h_StoreCache();
+  if ($T2H_L2H_CLEAN)
+  {
+    print "# l2h: removing temporary files generated by l2h extension\n"
+      if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+    while (<"$docu_rdir$l2h_name"*>)
+    {
+      unlink $_;
+    }
+  }
+  print "# l2h: Finished\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  return 1;
+}
+
+##############################
+# stuff for l2h caching
+#
+
+# I tried doing this with a dbm data base, but it did not store all
+# keys/values. Hence, I did as latex2html does it
+sub l2h_InitCache
+{
+  if (-r "$l2h_cache_file")
+  {
+    my $rdo = do "$l2h_cache_file";
+    warn("$ERROR l2h Error: could not load $docu_rdir$l2h_cache_file: $@\n")
+      unless ($rdo);
+  }
+}
+
+sub l2h_StoreCache
+{
+  return unless $l2h_latex_count;
+  
+  my ($key, $value);
+  open(FH, ">$l2h_cache_file") || return warn"$ERROR l2h Error: could not open $docu_rdir$l2h_cache_file for writing: $!\n";
+
+  
+  while (($key, $value) = each %l2h_cache)
+  {
+    # escape stuff
+    $key =~ s|/|\\/|g;
+    $key =~ s|\\\\/|\\/|g;
+    # weird, a \ at the end of the key results in an error
+    # maybe this also broke the dbm database stuff
+    $key =~ s|\\$|\\\\|;
+    $value =~ s/\|/\\\|/g; 
+    $value =~ s/\\\\\|/\\\|/g; 
+    $value =~ s|\\\\|\\\\\\\\|g;
+    print FH "\n\$l2h_cache_key = q/$key/;\n";
+    print FH "\$l2h_cache{\$l2h_cache_key} = q|$value|;\n";
+  }
+  print FH "1;";
+  close(FH);
+}
+
+# return cached html, if it exists for text, and if all pictures
+# are there, as well
+sub l2h_FromCache
+{
+  my $text = shift;
+  my $cached = $l2h_cache{$text};
+  if ($cached)
+  {
+    while ($cached =~ m/SRC="(.*?)"/g)
+    {
+      unless (-e "$docu_rdir$1")
+      {
+	return undef;
+      }
+    }
+    return $cached;
+  }
+  return undef;
+}
+
+# insert generated html into cache, move away images, 
+# return transformed html
+$maximage = 1;
+sub l2h_ToCache
+{
+  my $count = shift;
+  my $content = shift;
+  my @images = ($content =~ /SRC="(.*?)"/g);
+  my ($src, $dest);
+
+  for $src (@images)
+  {
+    $dest = $l2h_img{$src};
+    unless ($dest)
+    {
+      my $ext;
+      if ($src =~ /.*\.(.*)$/ && $1 ne $docu_ext)
+      {
+	$ext = $1;
+      }
+      else
+      {
+	warn "$ERROR: L2h image $src has invalid extension\n";
+	next;
+      }
+      while (-e "$docu_rdir${docu_name}_$maximage.$ext") { $maximage++;}
+      $dest = "${docu_name}_$maximage.$ext";
+      system("cp -f $docu_rdir$src $docu_rdir$dest");
+      $l2h_img{$src} = $dest;
+      unlink "$docu_rdir$src" unless ($DEBUG & DEBUG_L2H);
+    }
+    $content =~ s/$src/$dest/g;
+  }
+  $l2h_cache{$l2h_to_latex[$count]} = $content;
+  return $content;
+}
+
 
 #+++############################################################################
 #                                                                              #
@@ -458,25 +2941,34 @@ print "# reading from $docu\n" if $verbose;
 
 @lines = ();				# whole document
 @toc_lines = ();			# table of contents
-$toplevel = 0;			        # top level seen in hierarchy
+@stoc_lines = ();			# table of contents
 $curlevel = 0;				# current level in TOC
 $node = '';				# current node name
+$node_next = '';                        # current node next name               
+$node_prev = '';                        # current node prev name
+$node_up = '';                          # current node up name
 $in_table = 0;				# am I inside a table
 $table_type = '';			# type of table ('', 'f', 'v', 'multi')
 @tables = ();			        # nested table support
 $in_bibliography = 0;			# am I inside a bibliography
 $in_glossary = 0;			# am I inside a glossary
 $in_top = 0;				# am I inside the top node
+$has_top = 0;				# did I see a top node?
+$has_top_command = 0;			# did I see @top for automatic pointers?
 $in_pre = 0;				# am I inside a preformatted section
 $in_list = 0;				# am I inside a list
 $in_html = 0;				# am I inside an HTML section
 $first_line = 1;		        # is it the first line
 $dont_html = 0;				# don't protect HTML on this line
-$split_num = 0;				# split index
 $deferred_ref = '';			# deferred reference for indexes
 @html_stack = ();			# HTML elements stack
 $html_element = '';			# current HTML element
 &html_reset;
+%macros = ();                           # macros
+
+# init l2h
+$T2H_L2H = &l2h_Init($docu_name) if ($T2H_L2H);
+$T2H_L2H = &l2h_InitToLatex      if ($T2H_L2H);    
 
 # build code for simple substitutions
 # the maps used (%simple_map and %things_map) MUST be aware of this
@@ -499,13 +2991,13 @@ if ($use_acc) {
 	} else {
 	    $subst_code .= "s/\\\@\\$_";
 	}
-	$subst_code .= "([aeiou])/&\${1}$accent_map{$_};/gi;\n";
+	$subst_code .= "([a-z])/&\${1}$accent_map{$_};/gi;\n";
     }
 }
 eval("sub simple_substitutions { $subst_code }");
 
 &init_input;
-while ($_ = &next_line) {
+INPUT_LINE: while ($_ = &next_line) {
     #
     # remove \input on the first lines only
     #
@@ -513,56 +3005,123 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	next if /^\\input/;
 	$first_line = 0;
     }
+    # non-@ substitutions cf. texinfmt.el
     #
     # parse texinfo tags
     #
     $tag = '';
     $end_tag = '';
-    if (/^\@end\s+(\w+)\b/) {
+    if (/^\s*\@end\s+(\w+)\b/) {
 	$end_tag = $1;
-    } elsif (/^\@(\w+)\b/) {
+    } elsif (/^\s*\@(\w+)\b/) {
 	$tag = $1;
     }
     #
-    # handle @ifhtml / @end ifhtml
+    # handle @html / @end html
     #
     if ($in_html) {
-	if ($end_tag eq 'ifhtml') {
+	if ($end_tag eq 'html') {
 	    $in_html = 0;
 	} else {
 	    $tag2pro{$in_html} .= $_;
 	}
 	next;
-    } elsif ($tag eq 'ifhtml') {
+    } elsif ($tag eq 'html') {
 	$in_html = $PROTECTTAG . ++$html_num;
 	push(@lines, $in_html);
 	next;
     }
+
+    #
+    # try to remove inlined comments
+    # syntax from tex-mode.el comment-start-skip
+    #
+    s/((^|[^\@])(\@\@)*)\@c(omment | |\{|$).*/$1/;
+
+# Sometimes I use @c right at the end of  a line ( to suppress the line feed )
+#    s/((^|[^\@])(\@\@)*)\@c(omment)?$/$1/;
+#     s/((^|[^\@])(\@\@)*)\@c(omment)? .*/$1/;
+#     s/(.*)\@c{.*?}(.*)/$1$2/;
+#     s/(.*)\@comment{.*?}(.*)/$1$2/;
+#     s/^(.*)\@c /$1/;
+#     s/^(.*)\@comment /$1/;
+
+    #############################################################
+    # value substitution before macro expansion, so that
+    # it works in macro arguments			    
+    s/\@value{($VARRE)}/$value{$1}/eg;
+			    
+    #############################################################
+    # macro substitution
+    while (/\@(\w+)/g)
+    {
+      if (exists($macros->{$1}))    
+      {
+	my $before = $`;
+	my $name = $1;
+	my $after = $';
+	my @args;
+	my $args;
+	if ($after =~ /^\s*{(.*?[^\\])}(.*)/)  
+	{
+	  $args = $1;
+	  $after = $2;
+	}
+	elsif (@{$macros->{$name}->{Args}} == 1)
+	{
+	  $args = $after;
+	  $args =~ s/^\s*//;
+	  $args =~ s/\s*$//;
+	  $after = '';
+	}
+	$args =~ s|\\\\|\\|g;
+	$args =~ s|\\{|{|g;
+        $args =~ s|\\}|}|g;
+	if (@{$macros->{$name}->{Args}} > 1)
+	{
+	  $args =~ s/(^|[^\\]),/$1$;/g ;
+	  $args =~ s|\\,|,|g;
+	  @args = split(/$;\s*/, $args) if (@{$macros->{$name}->{Args}} > 1);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+	  $args =~ s|\\,|,|g;
+	  @args = ($args);
+	}
+	my $macrobody = $macros->{$name}->{Body};
+	for ($i=0; $i<=$#args; $i++)
+	{
+	  $macrobody =~ s|\\$macros->{$name}->{Args}->[$i]\\|$args[$i]|g;
+	}
+	$macrobody =~ s|\\\\|\\|g;
+	$_ = $before . $macrobody . $after;
+	unshift @input_spool, map {$_ = $_."\n"} split(/\n/, $_);
+	next INPUT_LINE;
+      }
+    }				#
+			    
+    
     #
     # try to skip the line
     #
     if ($end_tag) {
+        $in_titlepage = 0 if $end_tag eq 'titlepage';
 	next if $to_skip{"end $end_tag"};
     } elsif ($tag) {
-	next if $to_skip{$tag};
-	last if $tag eq 'bye';
+      $in_titlepage = 1 if $tag eq 'titlepage';
+      next if $to_skip{$tag};
+      last if $tag eq 'bye';
     }
     if ($in_top) {
 	# parsing the top node
-	if ($tag eq 'node' || $tag eq 'include' || $sec2level{$tag}) {
+	if ($tag eq 'node' || 
+	    ($sec2level{$tag} && $tag !~ /unnumbered/ && $tag !~ /heading/))
+	{
 	    # no more in top
 	    $in_top = 0;
-	} else {
-	    # skip it
-	    next;
+	    push(@lines, $TOPEND);
 	}
     }
-    #
-    # try to remove inlined comments
-    # syntax from tex-mode.el comment-start-skip
-    #
-    s/((^|[^\@])(\@\@)*)\@c(omment)? .*/$1/;
-    # non-@ substitutions cf. texinfmt.el
     unless ($in_pre) {
 	s/``/\"/g;
 	s/''/\"/g;
@@ -574,12 +3133,33 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
     if ($tag) {
 	# skip lines
 	&skip_until($tag), next if $tag eq 'ignore';
-	if ($expandinfo) {
-	    &skip_until($tag), next if $tag eq 'iftex';
-	} else {
-	    &skip_until($tag), next if $tag eq 'ifinfo';
+	&skip_until($tag), next if $tag eq 'ifnothtml';
+	if ($tag eq 'ifinfo')
+	{
+	  &skip_until($tag), next unless $T2H_EXPAND eq 'info';
+	}
+	if ($tag eq 'iftex')
+	{
+	  &skip_until($tag), next unless $T2H_EXPAND eq 'tex';
+	} 
+	if ($tag eq 'tex')
+	{
+	  # add to latex2html file
+	  if ($T2H_EXPAND eq 'tex' && $T2H_L2H && ! $in_pre)
+	  {
+	    # add space to the end -- tex(i2dvi) does this, as well 
+	    push(@lines, &l2h_ToLatex(&string_until($tag) . " "));
+	  }
+	  else
+	  {
+	    &skip_until($tag);
+	  }
+	  next;
+	}
+	if ($tag eq 'titlepage')
+	{
+	  next;
 	}
-	&skip_until($tag), next if $tag eq 'tex';
 	# handle special tables
 	if ($tag =~ /^(|f|v|multi)table$/) {
 	    $table_type = $1;
@@ -588,35 +3168,37 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	# special cases
 	if ($tag eq 'top' || ($tag eq 'node' && /^\@node\s+top\s*,/i)) {
 	    $in_top = 1;
+	    $has_top = 1;
+	    $has_top_command = 1 if $tag eq 'top';
 	    @lines = (); # ignore all lines before top (title page garbage)
 	    next;
 	} elsif ($tag eq 'node') {
+	  if ($in_top)
+	  {
 	    $in_top = 0;
-	    warn "$ERROR Bad node line: $_" unless $_ =~ /^\@node\s$NODESRE$/o;
-	    $_ = &protect_html($_); # if node contains '&' for instance
-	    s/^\@node\s+//;
-	    ($node) = split(/,/);
-	    &normalise_node($node);
-	    if ($split_node) {
-		&next_doc;
-		push(@lines, $SPLITTAG) if $split_num++;
-		push(@sections, $node);
-	    }
-	    next;
+	    push(@lines, $TOPEND);
+	  }
+	  warn "$ERROR Bad node line: $_" unless $_ =~ /^\@node\s$NODESRE$/o;
+	  # request of "Richard Y. Kim" <ryk@ap.com>
+	  s/^\@node\s+//;
+	  $_ = &protect_html($_); # if node contains '&' for instance
+	  ($node, $node_next, $node_prev, $node_up) = split(/,/);
+	  &normalise_node($node);
+	  &normalise_node($node_next);
+	  &normalise_node($node_prev);
+	  &normalise_node($node_up);
+	  $node =~ /\"/ ?
+	    push @lines, &html_debug("<A NAME='$node'></A>\n", __LINE__) :
+	    push @lines, &html_debug("<A NAME=\"$node\"></A>\n", __LINE__);
+	  next;
 	} elsif ($tag eq 'include') {
 	    if (/^\@include\s+($FILERE)\s*$/o) {
-		$file = $1;
-		unless (-e $file) {
-		    foreach $dir (@include_dirs) {
-			$file = "$dir/$1";
-			last if -e $file;
-		    }
-		}
-		if (-e $file) {
+		$file = LocateIncludeFile($1);
+		if ($file && -e $file) {
 		    &open($file);
-		    print "# including $file\n" if $verbose;
+		    print "# including $file\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
 		} else {
-		    warn "$ERROR Can't find $file, skipping";
+		    warn "$ERROR Can't find $1, skipping";
 		}
 	    } else {
 		warn "$ERROR Bad include line: $_";
@@ -639,45 +3221,110 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	    }
 	    next;
 	} elsif ($tag eq 'menu') {
-	    unless ($show_menu) {
+	    unless ($T2H_SHOW_MENU) {
 		&skip_until($tag);
 		next;
 	    }
 	    &html_push_if($tag);
-	    push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
+	    push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__));
 	} elsif ($format_map{$tag}) {
 	    $in_pre = 1 if $format_map{$tag} eq 'PRE';
 	    &html_push_if($format_map{$tag});
-	    push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
+	    push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__));
 	    $in_list++ if $format_map{$tag} eq 'UL' || $format_map{$tag} eq 'OL' ;
-	    push(@lines, &debug("<$format_map{$tag}>\n", __LINE__));
+#	    push(@lines, &debug("<BLOCKQUOTE>\n", __LINE__))
+#	      if $tag =~ /example/i;
+	    # sunshine@sunshineco.com: <PRE>bla</PRE> looks better than
+	    # <PRE>\nbla</PRE> (at least on NeXTstep browser
+	    push(@lines, &debug("<$format_map{$tag}>" . 
+				($in_pre ? '' : "\n"), __LINE__));
 	    next;
+	}
+	elsif (exists $complex_format_map->{$tag})
+	{
+	  my $start = eval $complex_format_map->{$tag}->[0];
+	  if ($@)
+	  {
+	    print "$ERROR: eval of complex_format_map->{$tag}->[0] $complex_format_map->{$tag}->[0]: $@";
+	    $start = '<pre>'
+	  }
+	  $in_pre = 1 if $start =~ /<pre/;
+	  push(@lines, html_debug($start. ($in_pre ? '' : "\n"), __LINE__));
+	  next;
 	} elsif ($tag eq 'table') {
-	    if (/^\@(|f|v|multi)table\s+\@(\w+)/) {
+	  # anorland@hem2.passagen.se
+	  # if (/^\s*\@(|f|v|multi)table\s+\@(\w+)/) {
+	     if (/^\s*\@(|f|v|multi)table\s+\@(\w+)|(\{[^\}]*\})/) {
 		$in_table = $2;
 		unshift(@tables, join($;, $table_type, $in_table));
 		if ($table_type eq "multi") {
-		    push(@lines, &debug("<TABLE BORDER>\n", __LINE__));
+		    # don't use borders -- gets confused by empty cells
+		    push(@lines, &debug("<TABLE>\n", __LINE__));
 		    &html_push_if('TABLE');
 		} else {
 		    push(@lines, &debug("<DL COMPACT>\n", __LINE__));
 		    &html_push_if('DL');
 		}
-		push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
+		push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__));
 	    } else {
 		warn "$ERROR Bad table line: $_";
 	    }
 	    next;
-	} elsif ($tag eq 'synindex' || $tag eq 'syncodeindex') {
-	    if (/^\@$tag\s+(\w)\w\s+(\w)\w\s*$/) {
-		eval("*${1}index = *${2}index");
-	    } else {
-		warn "$ERROR Bad syn*index line: $_";
+	} 
+	elsif ($tag eq 'synindex' || $tag eq 'syncodeindex') 
+	{
+	  if (/^\@$tag\s+(\w+)\s+(\w+)\s*$/) 
+	  {
+	    my $from = $1;
+	    my $to = $2;
+	    my $prefix_from = IndexName2Prefix($from);
+	    my $prefix_to = IndexName2Prefix($to);
+
+	    warn("$ERROR unknown from index name $from ind syn*index line: $_"), next
+	      unless $prefix_from;
+	    warn("$ERROR unknown to index name $to ind syn*index line: $_"), next
+	      unless $prefix_to;
+
+	    if ($tag eq 'syncodeindex')
+	    {
+	      $index_properties->{$prefix_to}->{'from_code'}->{$prefix_from} = 1;
 	    }
-	    next;
-	} elsif ($tag eq 'sp') {
+	    else
+	    {
+	       $index_properties->{$prefix_to}->{'from'}->{$prefix_from} = 1;
+	    }
+	  } 
+	  else 
+	  {
+	    warn "$ERROR Bad syn*index line: $_";
+	  }
+	  next;
+	} 
+	elsif ($tag eq 'defindex' || $tag eq 'defcodeindex') 
+	{
+	  if (/^\@$tag\s+(\w+)\s*$/) 
+	  {
+	    my $name = $1;
+	    $index_properties->{$name}->{name} = $name;
+	    $index_properties->{$name}->{code} = 1 if $tag eq 'defcodeindex';
+	  } 
+	  else 
+	  {
+	    warn "$ERROR Bad defindex line: $_";
+	  }
+	  next;
+	}
+	elsif (/^\@printindex/)
+	{
+	  push (@lines, "<!--::${section}::-->$_");
+	  next;
+	}
+	elsif ($tag eq 'sp') {
 	    push(@lines, &debug("<P>\n", __LINE__));
 	    next;
+	} elsif ($tag eq 'center') {
+	    push(@lines, &debug("<center>\n", __LINE__));
+	    s/\@center//;
 	} elsif ($tag eq 'setref') {
 	    &protect_html; # if setref contains '&' for instance
 	    if (/^\@$tag\s*{($NODERE)}\s*$/) {
@@ -685,19 +3332,60 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 		$setref =~ s/\s+/ /g; # normalize
 		$setref =~ s/ $//;
 		$node2sec{$setref} = $name;
+		$sec2node{$name} = $setref;
 		$node2href{$setref} = "$docu_doc#$docid";
 	    } else {
 		warn "$ERROR Bad setref line: $_";
 	    }
 	    next;
-	} elsif ($tag eq 'defindex' || $tag eq 'defcodeindex') {
-	    if (/^\@$tag\s+(\w\w)\s*$/) {
-		$valid_index{$1} = 1;
-	    } else {
-		warn "$ERROR Bad defindex line: $_";
+	} elsif ($tag eq 'lowersections') {
+	    local ($sec, $level);
+	    while (($sec, $level) = each %sec2level) {
+		$sec2level{$sec} = $level + 1;
+	    }
+	    next;
+	} elsif ($tag eq 'raisesections') {
+	    local ($sec, $level);
+	    while (($sec, $level) = each %sec2level) {
+		$sec2level{$sec} = $level - 1;
 	    }
 	    next;
-	} elsif (defined($def_map{$tag})) {
+	}
+	elsif ($tag eq 'macro' || $tag eq 'rmacro')
+	{
+	  if (/^\@$tag\s*(\w+)\s*(.*)/)
+	  {
+	    my $name = $1;
+	    my @args;
+	    @args = split(/\s*,\s*/ , $1)
+	      if ($2 =~ /^\s*{(.*)}\s*/);
+	    
+	    $macros->{$name}->{Args} = \@args;
+	    $macros->{$name}->{Body} = '';
+	    while (($_ = &next_line) && $_ !~ /\@end $tag/)
+	    {
+	      $macros->{$name}->{Body} .= $_;
+	    }
+	    die "ERROR: No closing '\@end $tag' found for macro definition of '$name'\n"
+	      unless (/\@end $tag/);
+	    chomp $macros->{$name}->{Body};
+	  }
+	  else
+	  {
+	    warn "$ERROR: Bad macro defintion $_"
+	  }
+	  next;
+	}
+	elsif ($tag eq 'unmacro')
+	{
+	  delete $macros->{$1} if (/^\@unmacro\s*(\w+)/);
+	  next;
+	}
+	elsif ($tag eq 'documentlanguage')
+	{
+	  SetDocumentLanguage($1) if (!$T2H_LANG && /documentlanguage\s*(\w+)/);
+	}
+	elsif (defined($def_map{$tag})) {
 	    if ($def_map{$tag}) {
 		s/^\@$tag\s+//;
 		$tag = $def_map{$tag};
@@ -707,7 +3395,7 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	} elsif (defined($user_sub{$tag})) {
 	    s/^\@$tag\s+//;
 	    $sub = $user_sub{$tag};
-	    print "# user $tag = $sub, arg: $_" if $debug & $DEBUG_USER;
+	    print "# user $tag = $sub, arg: $_" if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_USER;
 	    if (defined(&$sub)) {
 		chop($_);
 		&$sub($_);
@@ -715,7 +3403,7 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 		warn "$ERROR Bad user sub for $tag: $sub\n";
 	    }
 	    next;
-	}
+	  } 
 	if (defined($def_map{$tag})) {
 	    s/^\@$tag\s+//;
 	    if ($tag =~ /x$/) {
@@ -742,9 +3430,9 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	    $type = shift(@args);
 	    $type =~ s/^\{(.*)\}$/$1/;
 	    print "# def ($tag): {$type} ", join(', ', @args), "\n"
-		if $debug & $DEBUG_DEF;
+		if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_DEF;
 	    $type .= ':'; # it's nicer like this
-	    $name = shift(@args);
+	    my $name = shift(@args);
 	    $name =~ s/^\{(.*)\}$/$1/;
 	    if ($is_extra) {
 		$_ = &debug("<DT>", __LINE__);
@@ -769,13 +3457,17 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
  	    $_ .= &debug("\n<DD>", __LINE__);
 	    $name = &unprotect_html($name);
 	    if ($tag eq 'deffn' || $tag eq 'deftypefn') {
-		unshift(@input_spool, "\@findex $name\n");
+	      EnterIndexEntry('f', $name, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines);
+#		unshift(@input_spool, "\@findex $name\n");
 	    } elsif ($tag eq 'defop') {
-		unshift(@input_spool, "\@findex $name on $ftype\n");
+	      EnterIndexEntry('f', "$name on $ftype", $docu_doc, $section, \@lines);
+#		unshift(@input_spool, "\@findex $name on $ftype\n");
 	    } elsif ($tag eq 'defvr' || $tag eq 'deftypevr' || $tag eq 'defcv') {
-		unshift(@input_spool, "\@vindex $name\n");
+	      EnterIndexEntry('v', $name, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines);
+#		unshift(@input_spool, "\@vindex $name\n");
 	    } else {
-		unshift(@input_spool, "\@tindex $name\n");
+	      EnterIndexEntry('t', $name, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines);
+#		unshift(@input_spool, "\@tindex $name\n");
 	    }
 	    $dont_html = 1;
 	}
@@ -783,15 +3475,28 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	if ($format_map{$end_tag}) {
 	    $in_pre = 0 if $format_map{$end_tag} eq 'PRE';
 	    $in_list-- if $format_map{$end_tag} eq 'UL' || $format_map{$end_tag} eq 'OL' ;
-	    &html_pop_if('LI', 'P');
+	    &html_pop_if('P');
+	    &html_pop_if('LI');
 	    &html_pop_if();
 	    push(@lines, &debug("</$format_map{$end_tag}>\n", __LINE__));
-	    push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
+	    push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__));
+	}
+	elsif (exists $complex_format_map->{$end_tag})
+	{
+	  my $end = eval $complex_format_map->{$end_tag}->[1];
+	  if ($@)
+	  {
+	    print "$ERROR: eval of complex_format_map->{$end_tag}->[1] $complex_format_map->{$end_tag}->[0]: $@";
+	    $end = '</pre>'
+	  }
+	  $in_pre = 0 if $end =~ m|</pre>|;
+	  push(@lines, html_debug($end, __LINE__));
 	} elsif ($end_tag =~ /^(|f|v|multi)table$/) {
 	    unless (@tables) {
 		warn "$ERROR \@end $end_tag without \@*table\n";
 		next;
 	    }
+	    &html_pop_if('P');
 	    ($table_type, $in_table) = split($;, shift(@tables));
 	    unless ($1 eq $table_type) {
 		warn "$ERROR \@end $end_tag without matching \@$end_tag\n";
@@ -815,103 +3520,154 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	} elsif ($end_tag eq 'menu') {
 	    &html_pop_if();
 	    push(@lines, $_); # must keep it for pass 2
-	}
+	} 
 	next;
     }
-    #
-    # misc things
+    #############################################################
+    # anchor insertion
+    while (/\@anchor\s*\{(.*?)\}/)
+    {
+      $_ = $`.$';
+      my $anchor = $1;
+      $anchor = &normalise_node($anchor);
+      push @lines, &html_debug("<A NAME=\"$anchor\"></A>\n");
+      $node2href{$anchor} = "$docu_doc#$anchor";
+      next INPUT_LINE if $_ =~ /^\s*$/;
+    }
+
+    #############################################################
+    # index entry generation, after value substitutions
+    if (/^\@(\w+?)index\s+/)
+    {
+      EnterIndexEntry($1, $', $docu_doc, $section, \@lines);
+      next;
+    }
     #
     # protect texi and HTML things
     &protect_texi;
     $_ = &protect_html($_) unless $dont_html;
     $dont_html = 0;
     # substitution (unsupported things)
-    s/^\@center\s+//g;
     s/^\@exdent\s+//g;
     s/\@noindent\s+//g;
     s/\@refill\s+//g;
     # other substitutions
     &simple_substitutions;
-    s/\@value{($VARRE)}/$value{$1}/eg;
     s/\@footnote\{/\@footnote$docu_doc\{/g; # mark footnotes, cf. pass 4
     #
     # analyze the tag again
     #
     if ($tag) {
-	if (defined($sec2level{$tag}) && $sec2level{$tag} > 0) {
+      if (defined($sec2level{$tag}) && $sec2level{$tag} > 0) {
 	    if (/^\@$tag\s+(.+)$/) {
 		$name = $1;
-		$name =~ s/\s+$//;
+		$name = &normalise_node($name);
 		$level = $sec2level{$tag};
-		$name = &update_sec_num($tag, $level) . "  $name"
-		    if $number_sections && $tag !~ /^unnumbered/;
-		if ($tag =~ /heading$/) {
-		    push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
-		    if ($html_element ne 'body') {
-			# We are in a nice pickle here. We are trying to get a H? heading
-			# even though we are not in the body level. So, we convert it to a
-			# nice, bold, line by itself.
-			$_ = &debug("\n\n<P><STRONG>$name</STRONG></P>\n\n", __LINE__);
-		    } else {
-			$_ = &debug("<H$level>$name</H$level>\n", __LINE__);
-			&html_push_if('body');
+		# check for index
+		$first_index_chapter = $name
+		  if ($level == 1 && !$first_index_chapter && 
+		      $name =~ /index/i);
+		if ($in_top && /heading/){
+		    $T2H_HAS_TOP_HEADING = 1;
+                    $_ = &debug("<H$level>$name</H$level>\n", __LINE__);
+		    &html_push_if('body');
+		    print "# top heading, section $name, level $level\n"
+			if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_TOC;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+		  unless (/^\@\w*heading/)
+		  {
+		    unless (/^\@unnumbered/)
+		    {
+		      my $number = &update_sec_num($tag, $level);
+		      $name = $number. ' ' . $name if $T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS;
+		      $sec2number{$name} = $number;
+		      $number2sec{$number} = $name;
 		    }
-		    print "# heading, section $name, level $level\n"
-			if $debug & $DEBUG_TOC;
-		} else {
-		    if ($split_chapter) {
-			unless ($toplevel) {
-			    # first time we see a "section"
-			    unless ($level == 1) {
-				warn "$ERROR The first section found is not of level 1: $_";
-				warn "$ERROR I'll split on sections of level $level...\n";
-			    }
-			    $toplevel = $level;
-			}
-			if ($level == $toplevel) {
-			    &next_doc;
-			    push(@lines, $SPLITTAG) if $split_num++;
-			    push(@sections, $name);
-			}
+		    if (defined($toplevel))
+		    {
+		      push @lines, ($level==$toplevel ? $CHAPTEREND : $SECTIONEND);
 		    }
-		    $sec_num++;
-		    $docid = "SEC$sec_num";
-		    $tocid = "TOC$sec_num";
-		    # check biblio and glossary
-		    $in_bibliography = ($name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)?(\.\d+)*\s*bibliography$/i);
-		    $in_glossary = ($name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)?(\.\d+)*\s*glossary$/i);
-		    # check node
-		    if ($node) {
-			if ($node2sec{$node}) {
-			    warn "$ERROR Duplicate node found: $node\n";
-			} else {
-			    $node2sec{$node} = $name;
-			    $node2href{$node} = "$docu_doc#$docid";
-			    print "# node $node, section $name, level $level\n"
-				if $debug & $DEBUG_TOC;
-			}
-			$node = '';
-		    } else {
-			print "# no node, section $name, level $level\n"
-			    if $debug & $DEBUG_TOC;
+		    else
+		    {
+		      # first time we see a "section"
+		      unless ($level == 1) 
+		      {
+			warn "$WARN The first section found is not of level 1: $_";
+		      }
+		      $toplevel = $level;
 		    }
+		    push(@sections, $name);
+		    next_doc() if ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section' ||
+				   $T2H_SPLIT && $level == $toplevel);
+		  }
+		  $sec_num++;
+		  $docid = "SEC$sec_num";
+		  $tocid = (/^\@\w*heading/ ? undef : "TOC$sec_num");
+		  # check biblio and glossary
+		  $in_bibliography = ($name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)?(\.\d+)*\s*bibliography$/i);
+		  $in_glossary = ($name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)?(\.\d+)*\s*glossary$/i);
+		  # check node
+		  if ($node)
+		  {
+		    warn "$ERROR Duplicate node found: $node\n"
+		      if ($node2sec{$node});
+		  }
+		  else
+		  {
+		    $name .= ' ' while ($node2sec{$name});
+		    $node = $name;
+		  }
+		  $name .= ' ' while ($sec2node{$name});
+		  $section = $name; 
+		  $node2sec{$node} = $name;
+		  $sec2node{$name} = $node;
+		  $node2href{$node} = "$docu_doc#$docid";
+		  $node2next{$node} = $node_next;
+		  $node2prev{$node} = $node_prev;
+		  $node2up{$node} = $node_up;
+		  print "# node $node, section $name, level $level\n"
+		    if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_TOC;
+
+		  $node = '';
+		  $node_next = '';
+		  $node_prev = '';
+		  $node_next = '';
+		  if ($tocid)
+		  {
 		    # update TOC
 		    while ($level > $curlevel) {
-			$curlevel++;
-			push(@toc_lines, "<UL>\n");
+		      $curlevel++;
+		      push(@toc_lines, "<UL>\n");
 		    }
 		    while ($level < $curlevel) {
-			$curlevel--;
-			push(@toc_lines, "</UL>\n");
+		      $curlevel--;
+		      push(@toc_lines, "</UL>\n");
+		    }
+		    $_ = &t2h_anchor($tocid, "$docu_doc#$docid", $name, 1);
+		    $_ = &substitute_style($_);
+		    push(@stoc_lines, "$_<BR>\n") if ($level == 1);
+		    if ($T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS)
+		    {
+		      push(@toc_lines, $_ . "<BR>\n")
+		    }
+		    else
+		    {
+		      push(@toc_lines, "<LI>" . $_ ."</LI>");
 		    }
-		    $_ = "<LI>" . &anchor($tocid, "$docu_doc#$docid", $name, 1);
-		    push(@toc_lines, &substitute_style($_));
-		    # update DOC
-		    push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
-		    &html_reset;
-		    $_ =  "<H$level>".&anchor($docid, "$docu_toc#$tocid", $name)."</H$level>\n";
-		    $_ = &debug($_, __LINE__);
-		    push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
+		  }
+		  else
+		  {
+		    push(@lines, &html_debug("<A NAME=\"$docid\"></A>\n", 
+					   __LINE__));
+		  }
+		  # update DOC
+		  push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__));
+		  &html_reset;
+		  $_ =  "<H$level> $name </H$level>\n<!--docid::${docid}::-->\n";
+		  $_ = &debug($_, __LINE__);
+		  push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__));
 		}
 		# update DOC
 		foreach $line (split(/\n+/, $_)) {
@@ -923,59 +3679,18 @@ while ($_ = &next_line) {
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    # track variables
-	    $value{$1} = $2, next if /^\@set\s+($VARRE)\s+(.*)$/o;
+	    $value{$1} = Unprotect_texi($2), next if /^\@set\s+($VARRE)\s+(.*)$/o;
 	    delete $value{$1}, next if /^\@clear\s+($VARRE)\s*$/o;
 	    # store things
-	    $value{'_setfilename'}   = $1, next if /^\@setfilename\s+(.*)$/;
-	    $value{'_settitle'}      = $1, next if /^\@settitle\s+(.*)$/;
-	    $value{'_author'}   .= "$1\n", next if /^\@author\s+(.*)$/;
-	    $value{'_subtitle'} .= "$1\n", next if /^\@subtitle\s+(.*)$/;
-	    $value{'_title'}    .= "$1\n", next if /^\@title\s+(.*)$/;
-	    # index
-	    if (/^\@(..?)index\s+/) {
-		unless ($valid_index{$1}) {
-		    warn "$ERROR Undefined index command: $_";
-		    next;
-		}
-		$id = 'IDX' . ++$idx_num;
-		$index = $1 . 'index';
-		$what = &substitute_style($');
-		$what =~ s/\s+$//;
-		print "# found $index for '$what' id $id\n"
-		    if $debug & $DEBUG_INDEX;
-		eval(<<EOC);
-		if (defined(\$$index\{\$what\})) {
-		    \$$index\{\$what\} .= "$;$docu_doc#$id";
-		} else {
-		    \$$index\{\$what\} = "$docu_doc#$id";
-		}
-EOC
-		#
-		# dirty hack to see if I can put an invisible anchor...
-		#
-		if ($html_element eq 'P' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'LI' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'DT' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'DD' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'ADDRESS' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'B' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'BLOCKQUOTE' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'PRE' ||
-		    $html_element eq 'SAMP') {
-                    push(@lines, &anchor($id, '', $invisible_mark, !$in_pre));
-                } elsif ($html_element eq 'body') {
-		    push(@lines, &debug("<P>\n", __LINE__));
-                    push(@lines, &anchor($id, '', $invisible_mark, !$in_pre));
-		    &html_push('P');
-		} elsif ($html_element eq 'DL' ||
-			 $html_element eq 'UL' ||
-			 $html_element eq 'OL' ) {
-		    $deferred_ref .= &anchor($id, '', $invisible_mark, !$in_pre) . " ";
-		}
-		next;
-	    }
+	    $value{'_shorttitle'} = Unprotect_texi($1), next if /^\@shorttitle\s+(.*)$/;
+	    $value{'_setfilename'}   = Unprotect_texi($1), next if /^\@setfilename\s+(.*)$/;
+	    $value{'_settitle'}      = Unprotect_texi($1), next if /^\@settitle\s+(.*)$/;
+	    $value{'_author'}   .= Unprotect_texi($1)."\n", next if /^\@author\s+(.*)$/;
+	    $value{'_subtitle'} .= Unprotect_texi($1)."\n", next if /^\@subtitle\s+(.*)$/;
+	    $value{'_title'}    .= Unprotect_texi($1)."\n", next if /^\@title\s+(.*)$/;
+
 	    # list item
-	    if (/^\@itemx?\s+/) {
+	    if (/^\s*\@itemx?\s+/) {
 		$what = $';
 		$what =~ s/\s+$//;
 		if ($in_bibliography && $use_bibliography) {
@@ -983,17 +3698,21 @@ EOC
 			$id = 'BIB' . ++$bib_num;
 			$bib2href{$what} = "$docu_doc#$id";
 			print "# found bibliography for '$what' id $id\n"
-			    if $debug & $DEBUG_BIB;
-			$what = &anchor($id, '', $what);
+			    if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_BIB;
+			$what = &t2h_anchor($id, '', $what);
 		    }
-		} elsif ($in_glossary && $use_glossary) {
+		} elsif ($in_glossary && $T2H_USE_GLOSSARY) {
 		    $id = 'GLOSS' . ++$gloss_num;
 		    $entry = $what;
 		    $entry =~ tr/A-Z/a-z/ unless $entry =~ /^[A-Z\s]+$/;
 		    $gloss2href{$entry} = "$docu_doc#$id";
 		    print "# found glossary for '$entry' id $id\n"
-			if $debug & $DEBUG_GLOSS;
-		    $what = &anchor($id, '', $what);
+			if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_GLOSS;
+		    $what = &t2h_anchor($id, '', $what);
+		}
+		elsif ($in_table && ($table_type eq 'f' || $table_type eq 'v'))
+		{
+		  EnterIndexEntry($table_type, $what, $docu_doc, $section, \@lines);
 		}
 		&html_pop_if('P');
 		if ($html_element eq 'DL' || $html_element eq 'DD') {
@@ -1018,7 +3737,7 @@ EOC
 		    push(@lines, &debug("<LI>$what\n", __LINE__));
 		    &html_push('LI') unless $html_element eq 'LI';
 		}
-		push(@lines, &html_debug("\n", __LINE__));
+		push(@lines, &html_debug('', __LINE__));
 		if ($deferred_ref) {
 		    push(@lines, &debug("$deferred_ref\n", __LINE__));
 		    $deferred_ref = '';
@@ -1031,20 +3750,25 @@ EOC
 	}
     }
     # paragraph separator
-    if ($_ eq "\n") {
+    if ($_ eq "\n" && ! $in_pre) {
 	next if $#lines >= 0 && $lines[$#lines] eq "\n";
 	if ($html_element eq 'P') {
-	    push(@lines, "\n");
-	    $_ = &debug("</P>\n", __LINE__);
-	    &html_pop;
+	    push (@lines, &debug("</P><P>\n", __LINE__));
 	}
-    } elsif ($html_element eq 'body' || $html_element eq 'BLOCKQUOTE') {
-	push(@lines, "<P>\n");
-	&html_push('P');
-	$_ = &debug($_, __LINE__);
-    }
+# 	else
+# 	{
+# 	  push(@lines, "<P></P>\n");
+# 	  $_ = &debug("<P></P>\n", __LINE__);
+# 	}
+        elsif ($html_element eq 'body' || $html_element eq 'BLOCKQUOTE' || $html_element eq 'DD' || $html_element eq 'LI') 
+	{
+	  &html_push('P');
+	  push(@lines, &debug("<P>\n", __LINE__));
+	}
+      }
     # otherwise
-    push(@lines, $_);
+    push(@lines, $_) unless $in_titlepage;
+    push(@lines, &debug("</center>\n", __LINE__))  if ($tag eq 'center');
 }
 
 # finish TOC
@@ -1054,7 +3778,327 @@ while ($level < $curlevel) {
     push(@toc_lines, "</UL>\n");
 }
 
-print "# end of pass 1\n" if $verbose;
+print "# end of pass 1\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+
+SetDocumentLanguage('en') unless ($T2H_LANG);
+#+++############################################################################
+#                                                                              #
+# Stuff related to Index generation                                            #
+#                                                                              #
+#---############################################################################
+
+sub EnterIndexEntry
+{
+  my $prefix = shift;
+  my $key = shift;
+  my $docu_doc = shift;
+  my $section = shift;
+  my $lines = shift;
+  local $_;
+
+  warn "$ERROR Undefined index command: $_", next
+    unless (exists ($index_properties->{$prefix}));
+  $key =~ s/\s+$//;
+  $_ = $key;
+  &protect_texi;
+  $key = $_;
+  $_ = &protect_html($_);
+  my $html_key = substitute_style($_);
+  my $id;
+  $key = remove_style($key);
+  $key = remove_things($key);
+  $_ = $key;
+  &unprotect_texi;
+  $key = $_;
+  while (exists $index->{$prefix}->{$key}) {$key .= ' '};
+  if ($lines->[$#lines] =~ /^<!--docid::(.+)::-->$/)
+  {
+    $id = $1;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    $id = 'IDX' . ++$idx_num;
+    push(@$lines, &t2h_anchor($id, '', $T2H_INVISIBLE_MARK, !$in_pre));
+  }
+  $index->{$prefix}->{$key}->{html_key} = $html_key;
+  $index->{$prefix}->{$key}->{section} = $section;
+  $index->{$prefix}->{$key}->{href} = "$docu_doc#$id";
+  print "# found ${prefix}index  for '$key' with id $id\n"
+    if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_INDEX;
+}
+
+sub IndexName2Prefix
+{
+  my $name = shift;
+  my $prefix;
+
+  for $prefix (keys %$index_properties)
+  {
+    return $prefix if ($index_properties->{$prefix}->{name} eq $name);
+  }
+  return undef;
+}
+
+sub GetIndexEntries
+{
+  my $normal = shift;
+  my $code = shift;
+  my ($entries, $prefix, $key) = ({});
+  
+  for $prefix (keys %$normal)
+  {
+    for $key (keys %{$index->{$prefix}})
+    {
+      $entries->{$key} = {%{$index->{$prefix}->{$key}}};
+    }
+  }
+
+  if (defined($code))
+  {
+    for $prefix (keys %$code)
+    {
+      unless (exists $normal->{$keys})
+      {
+	for $key (keys %{$index->{$prefix}})
+	{
+	  $entries->{$key} = {%{$index->{$prefix}->{$key}}};
+	  $entries->{$key}->{html_key} = "<CODE>$entries->{$key}->{html_key}</CODE>";
+	}
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  return $entries;
+}
+
+sub byAlpha
+{
+  if ($a =~ /^[A-Za-z]/)
+  {
+    if ($b =~ /^[A-Za-z]/)
+    {
+      return lc($a) cmp lc($b);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      return 1;
+    }
+  }
+  elsif ($b =~ /^[A-Za-z]/)
+  {
+    return -1;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    return lc($a) cmp lc($b);
+  } 
+}
+
+sub GetIndexPages
+{
+  my $entries = shift;
+  my (@Letters, $key);
+  my ($EntriesByLetter, $Pages, $page) = ({}, [], {});
+  my @keys = sort byAlpha keys %$entries;
+
+  for $key (@keys)
+  {
+    push @{$EntriesByLetter->{uc(substr($key,0, 1))}} , $entries->{$key};
+  }
+  @Letters = sort byAlpha keys %$EntriesByLetter;
+  
+  $T2H_SPLIT_INDEX = 0 unless ($T2H_SPLIT);
+
+  unless ($T2H_SPLIT_INDEX)
+  {
+    $page->{First} = $Letters[0];
+    $page->{Last} = $Letters[$#Letters];
+    $page->{Letters} = \@Letters;
+    $page->{EntriesByLetter} = $EntriesByLetter;
+    push @$Pages, $page;
+    return $Pages;
+  }
+
+  if ($T2H_SPLIT_INDEX =~ /^\d+$/)
+  {
+    my $i = 0;
+    my ($prev_letter, $letter);
+    $page->{First} = $Letters[0];
+    for $letter (@Letters)
+    {
+      if ($i > $T2H_SPLIT_INDEX)
+      {
+	$page->{Last} = $prev_letter;
+	push @$Pages, {%$page};
+	$page->{Letters} = [];
+	$page->{EntriesByLetter} = {};
+	$page->{First} = $letter;
+	$i=0;
+      }
+      push @{$page->{Letters}}, $letter;
+      $page->{EntriesByLetter}->{$letter} = [@{$EntriesByLetter->{$letter}}];
+      $i += scalar(@{$EntriesByLetter->{$letter}});
+      $prev_letter = $letter;
+    }
+    $page->{Last} = $Letters[$#Letters];
+    push @$Pages, {%$page};
+  }
+  return $Pages;
+}
+
+sub GetIndexSummary
+{
+  my $first_page = shift;
+  my $Pages = shift;
+  my $name = shift;
+  my ($page, $letter, $summary, $i, $l1, $l2, $l);
+
+  $i = 0;
+  $summary = '<table><tr><th valign=top>Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td>';
+  
+  for $page ($first_page, @$Pages)
+  {
+    for $letter (@{$page->{Letters}})
+    {
+      $l = t2h_anchor('', "$page->{href}#${name}_$letter", "<b>$letter</b>", 
+		      0, 'style="text-decoration:none"') . "\n &nbsp; \n";
+      
+      if ($letter =~ /^[A-Za-z]/)
+      {
+	$l2 .= $l;
+      }
+      else
+      {
+	$l1 .= $l;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  $summary .= $l1 . "<BR>\n" if ($l1);
+  $summary .= $l2 . '</td></tr></table><br>';
+  return $summary;
+}
+
+sub PrintIndexPage
+{
+  my $lines = shift;
+  my $summary = shift;
+  my $page = shift;
+  my $name = shift;
+
+  push @$lines, $summary;
+
+  push @$lines , <<EOT;
+<P></P>
+<TABLE border=0>
+<TR><TD></TD><TH ALIGN=LEFT>Index Entry</TH><TH ALIGN=LEFT> Section</TH></TR>
+<TR><TD COLSPAN=3> <HR></TD></TR>
+EOT
+
+  for $letter (@{$page->{Letters}})
+  {
+    push @$lines, "<TR><TH><A NAME=\"${name}_$letter\"></A>$letter</TH><TD></TD><TD></TD></TR>\n";
+    for $entry (@{$page->{EntriesByLetter}->{$letter}})
+    {
+      push @$lines, 
+      "<TR><TD></TD><TD valign=top>" . 
+	t2h_anchor('', $entry->{href}, $entry->{html_key}) .
+	  "</TD><TD valign=top>" . 
+	    t2h_anchor('', sec_href($entry->{section}), clean_name($entry->{section})) .
+	      "</TD></TR>\n";
+    }
+    push @$lines, "<TR><TD COLSPAN=3> <HR></TD></TR>\n";
+  }
+  push @$lines, "</TABLE><P></P>";
+  push @$lines, $summary;
+}
+
+sub PrintIndex
+{
+  my $lines = shift;
+  my $name = shift;
+  my $section = shift;
+  $section = 'Top' unless $section;
+  my $prefix = IndexName2Prefix($name);
+
+  warn ("$ERROR printindex: bad index name: $name"), return 
+    unless $prefix;
+
+  if ($index_properties->{$prefix}->{code})
+  {
+    $index_properties->{$prefix}->{from_code}->{$prefix} = 1;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    $index_properties->{$prefix}->{from}->{$prefix}= 1;
+  }
+
+  my $Entries = GetIndexEntries($index_properties->{$prefix}->{from}, 
+				$index_properties->{$prefix}->{from_code});
+  return unless %$Entries;
+
+  if ($T2H_IDX_SUMMARY)
+  {
+    my $key;
+    open(FHIDX, ">$docu_rdir$docu_name" . "_$name.idx")
+      || die "Can't open > $docu_rdir$docu_name" . "_$name.idx for writing: $!\n";
+    print "# writing $name index summary in $docu_rdir$docu_name" . "_$name.idx...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+
+    for $key (sort keys %$Entries)
+    {
+      print FHIDX "$key\t$Entries->{$key}->{href}\n";
+    }
+  }
+
+  my $Pages = GetIndexPages($Entries);
+  my $page;
+  my $first_page = shift @$Pages;
+  my $sec_name = $section;
+  # remove section number
+  $sec_name =~ s/.*? // if $sec_name =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)\./;
+
+  ($first_page->{href} = sec_href($section)) =~ s/\#.*$//;
+  # Update tree structure of document
+  if (@$Pages)
+  {
+    my $sec;
+    my @after;
+
+    while (@sections && $sections[$#sections] ne $section)
+    {
+      unshift @after, pop @sections;
+    }
+
+    for $page (@$Pages)
+    {
+      my $node = ($page->{First} ne $page->{Last} ? 
+		  "$sec_name: $page->{First} -- $page->{Last}" :
+		  "$sec_name: $page->{First}");
+      push @sections, $node;
+      $node2sec{$node} = $node;
+      $sec2node{$node} = $node;
+      $node2up{$node} = $section;
+      $page->{href} = next_doc();
+      $page->{name} = $node;
+      $node2href{$node} = $page->{href};
+      if ($prev_node)
+      {
+	$node2next{$prev_node} = $node;
+	$node2prev{$node} = $prev_node;
+      }
+      $prev_node = $node;
+    }
+    push @sections, @after;
+  }
+
+  my $summary = GetIndexSummary($first_page, $Pages, $name);
+  PrintIndexPage($lines, $summary, $first_page, $name);
+  for $page (@$Pages)
+  {
+    push @$lines, ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter' ? $CHAPTEREND : $SECTIONEND);
+    push @$lines, "<H2 ALIGN=\"Left\">$page->{name}</H2>\n";
+    PrintIndexPage($lines, $summary, $page, $name);
+  }
+}
+
 
 #+++############################################################################
 #                                                                              #
@@ -1078,86 +4122,86 @@ while (@lines) {
     #
     # menu
     #
-    $in_menu = 1, push(@lines2, &debug("<UL>\n", __LINE__)), next if /^\@menu\b/;
-    $in_menu = 0, push(@lines2, &debug("</UL>\n", __LINE__)), next if /^\@end\s+menu\b/;
-    if ($in_menu) {
-	if (/^\*\s+($NODERE)::/o) {
-	    $descr = $';
-	    chop($descr);
-	    &menu_entry($1, $1, $descr);
-	} elsif (/^\*\s+(.+):\s+([^\t,\.\n]+)[\t,\.\n]/) {
-	    $descr = $';
-	    chop($descr);
-	    &menu_entry($1, $2, $descr);
-	} elsif (/^\*/) {
-	    warn "$ERROR Bad menu line: $_";
-	} else { # description continued?
-	    push(@lines2, $_);
-	}
-	next;
+    if (/^\@menu\b/)
+    {
+      $in_menu = 1;
+      $in_menu_listing = 1;
+      push(@lines2, &debug("<BLOCKQUOTE><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=0> \n", __LINE__));
+      next;
     }
-    #
-    # printindex
-    #
-    if (/^\@printindex\s+(\w\w)\b/) {
-	local($index, *ary, @keys, $key, $letter, $last_letter, @refs);
-	if ($predefined_index{$1}) {
-	    $index = $predefined_index{$1} . 'index';
-	} else {
-	    $index = $1 . 'index';
-	}
-	eval("*ary = *$index");
-	@keys = keys(%ary);
-	foreach $key (@keys) {
-	    $_ = $key;
-	    1 while s/<(\w+)>\`(.*)\'<\/\1>/$2/; # remove HTML tags with quotes
-	    1 while s/<(\w+)>(.*)<\/\1>/$2/;     # remove HTML tags
-	    $_ = &unprotect_html($_);
-	    &unprotect_texi;
-	    tr/A-Z/a-z/; # lowercase
-	    $key2alpha{$key} = $_;
-	    print "# index $key sorted as $_\n"
-		if $key ne $_ && $debug & $DEBUG_INDEX;
+    if (/^\@end\s+menu\b/)
+    {
+      if ($in_menu_listing)
+      {
+	push(@lines2, &debug("</TABLE></BLOCKQUOTE>\n", __LINE__));
+      }
+      else
+      {
+	push(@lines2, &debug("</BLOCKQUOTE>\n", __LINE__));
+      }
+      $in_menu = 0;
+      $in_menu_listing = 0;
+      next;
+    }
+    if ($in_menu) 
+    {
+      my ($node, $name, $descr);
+      if (/^\*\s+($NODERE)::/o)
+      {
+	$node = $1;
+	$descr = $';
+      }
+      elsif (/^\*\s+(.+):\s+([^\t,\.\n]+)[\t,\.\n]/)
+      {
+	$name = $1;
+	$node = $2;
+	$descr = $';
+      }
+      elsif (/^\*/) 
+      {
+	warn "$ERROR Bad menu line: $_";
+      }
+      else
+      {
+	if ($in_menu_listing)
+	{
+	  $in_menu_listing = 0;
+	  push(@lines2, &debug("</TABLE>\n", __LINE__));
 	}
-	push(@lines2, "Jump to:\n");
-	$last_letter = undef;
-	foreach $key (sort byalpha @keys) {
-	    $letter = substr($key2alpha{$key}, 0, 1);
-	    $letter = substr($key2alpha{$key}, 0, 2) if $letter eq $;;
-	    if (!defined($last_letter) || $letter ne $last_letter) {
-		push(@lines2, "-\n") if defined($last_letter);
-		push(@lines2, "<A HREF=\"#$index\_$letter\">" . &protect_html($letter) . "</A>\n");
-		$last_letter = $letter;
-	    }
+	# should be like verbatim -- preseve spaces, etc
+	s/ /\&nbsp;/g;
+	$_ .= "<br>\n";
+	push(@lines2, $_);
+      }
+      if ($node)
+      {
+	if (! $in_menu_listing)
+	{
+	  $in_menu_listing = 1;
+	  push(@lines2, &debug("<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=0>\n", __LINE__));
 	}
-	push(@lines2, "<P>\n");
-	$last_letter = undef;
-	foreach $key (sort byalpha @keys) {
-	    $letter = substr($key2alpha{$key}, 0, 1);
-	    $letter = substr($key2alpha{$key}, 0, 2) if $letter eq $;;
-	    if (!defined($last_letter) || $letter ne $last_letter) {
-		push(@lines2, "</DIR>\n") if defined($last_letter);
-		push(@lines2, "<H2><A NAME=\"$index\_$letter\">" . &protect_html($letter) . "</A></H2>\n");
-		push(@lines2, "<DIR>\n");
-		$last_letter = $letter;
-	    }
-	    @refs = ();
-	    foreach (split(/$;/, $ary{$key})) {
-		push(@refs, &anchor('', $_, $key, 0));
-	    }
-	    push(@lines2, "<LI>" . join(", ", @refs) . "\n");
+	# look for continuation
+	while ($lines[0] =~ /^\s+\w+/)
+	{
+	  $descr .= shift(@lines);
 	}
-	push(@lines2, "</DIR>\n") if defined($last_letter);
-	next;
+	&menu_entry($node, $name, $descr);
+      } 
+      next;
     }
     #
+    # printindex
+    #
+    PrintIndex(\@lines2, $2, $1), next
+      if (/^<!--::(.*)::-->\@printindex\s+(\w+)/);
+    #
     # simple style substitutions
     #
     $_ = &substitute_style($_);
     #
     # xref
     #
-    while (/\@(x|px|info|)ref{($XREFRE)(}?)/o) {
+    while (/\@(x|px|info|)ref{([^{}]+)(}?)/) {
 	# note: Texinfo may accept other characters
 	($type, $nodes, $full) = ($1, $2, $3);
 	($before, $after) = ($`, $');
@@ -1167,11 +4211,11 @@ while (@lines) {
 	    next; # while xref
 	}
 	if ($type eq 'x') {
-	    $type = 'See ';
+	    $type = "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'See'} ";
 	} elsif ($type eq 'px') {
-	    $type = 'see ';
+	    $type = "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'see'} ";
 	} elsif ($type eq 'info') {
-	    $type = 'See Info';
+	    $type = "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'See'} Info";
 	} else {
 	    $type = '';
 	}
@@ -1201,24 +4245,50 @@ while (@lines) {
 	$nodes =~ s/\s+/ /g; # remove useless spaces
 	@args = split(/\s*,\s*/, $nodes);
 	$node = $args[0]; # the node is always the first arg
-	&normalise_node($node);
-	$sec = $node2sec{$node};
+	$node = &normalise_node($node);
+	$sec = $args[2] || $args[1] || $node2sec{$node};
+	$href = $node2href{$node};
 	if (@args == 5) { # reference to another manual
 	    $sec = $args[2] || $node;
 	    $man = $args[4] || $args[3];
-	    $_ = "${before}${type}section `$sec' in \@cite{$man}$after";
+	    $_ = "${before}${type}$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'section'} `$sec' in \@cite{$man}$after";
 	} elsif ($type =~ /Info/) { # inforef
 	    warn "$ERROR Wrong number of arguments: $_" unless @args == 3;
 	    ($nn, $_, $in) = @args;
 	    $_ = "${before}${type} file `$in', node `$nn'$after";
-	} elsif ($sec) {
-	    $href = $node2href{$node};
-	    $_ = "${before}${type}section " . &anchor('', $href, $sec) . $after;
-	} else {
+	} elsif ($sec && $href && ! $T2H_SHORT_REF) {
+	    $_  = "${before}${type}";
+	    $_ .= "$T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'section'} " if ${type};
+	    $_ .= &t2h_anchor('', $href, $sec) . $after;
+	} 
+	elsif ($href)
+	{
+	  $_ = "${before}${type} " . 
+	    &t2h_anchor('', $href, $args[2] || $args[1] || $node) . 
+	      $after;
+	}
+	else {
 	    warn "$ERROR Undefined node ($node): $_";
 	    $_ = "$before$;0xref{$nodes}$after";
 	}
     }
+
+    # replace images
+    s[\@image\s*{(.+?)}]
+    {
+     my @args = split (/\s*,\s*/, $1);
+     my $base = $args[0];
+     my $image = 
+       LocateIncludeFile("$base.png") || 
+       LocateIncludeFile("$base.jpg") ||
+       LocateIncludeFile("$base.gif");
+     warn "$ERROR no image file for $base: $_" unless ($image && -e $image);
+     "<IMG SRC=\"$image\" ALT=\"$base\">";
+     ($T2H_CENTER_IMAGE ?
+      "<CENTER><IMG SRC=\"$image\" ALT=\"$base\"></CENTER>" :
+      "<IMG SRC=\"$image\" ALT=\"$base\">");
+    }eg;
+
     #
     # try to guess bibliography references or glossary terms
     #
@@ -1229,7 +4299,7 @@ while (@lines) {
 		($pre, $what, $post) = ($`, $&, $');
 		$href = $bib2href{$what};
 		if (defined($href) && $post !~ /^[^<]*<\/A>/) {
-		    $done .= $pre . &anchor('', $href, $what);
+		    $done .= $pre . &t2h_anchor('', $href, $what);
 		} else {
 		    $done .= "$pre$what";
 		}
@@ -1237,7 +4307,7 @@ while (@lines) {
 	    }
 	    $_ = $done . $_;
 	}
-	if ($use_glossary) {
+	if ($T2H_USE_GLOSSARY) {
 	    $done = '';
 	    while (/\b\w+\b/) {
 		($pre, $what, $post) = ($`, $&, $');
@@ -1245,7 +4315,7 @@ while (@lines) {
 		$entry =~ tr/A-Z/a-z/ unless $entry =~ /^[A-Z\s]+$/;
 		$href = $gloss2href{$entry};
 		if (defined($href) && $post !~ /^[^<]*<\/A>/) {
-		    $done .= $pre . &anchor('', $href, $what);
+		    $done .= $pre . &t2h_anchor('', $href, $what);
 		} else {
 		    $done .= "$pre$what";
 		}
@@ -1257,7 +4327,7 @@ while (@lines) {
     # otherwise
     push(@lines2, $_);
 }
-print "# end of pass 2\n" if $verbose;
+print "# end of pass 2\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
 
 #
 # split style substitutions
@@ -1307,8 +4377,8 @@ while (@lines2) {
     # otherwise
     push(@lines3, $_);
 }
-print "# end of pass 3\n" if $verbose;
-
+print "# end of pass 3\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+	
 #+++############################################################################
 #                                                                              #
 # Pass 4: foot notes, final cleanup                                            #
@@ -1318,7 +4388,7 @@ print "# end of pass 3\n" if $verbose;
 @foot_lines = ();			# footnotes
 @doc_lines = ();			# final document
 $end_of_para = 0;			# true if last line is <P>
-
+	
 while (@lines3) {
     $_ = shift(@lines3);
     #
@@ -1356,10 +4426,10 @@ while (@lines3) {
 	    $docid  = "DOCF$foot_num";
 	    $footid = "FOOT$foot_num";
 	    $foot = "($foot_num)";
-	    push(@foot_lines, "<H3>" . &anchor($footid, "$d#$docid", $foot) . "</H3>\n");
+	    push(@foot_lines, "<H3>" . &t2h_anchor($footid, "$d#$docid", $foot) . "</H3>\n");
 	    $text = "<P>$text" unless $text =~ /^\s*<P>/;
 	    push(@foot_lines, "$text\n");
-	    $_ = $before . &anchor($docid, "$docu_foot#$footid", $foot) . $after;
+	    $_ = $before . &t2h_anchor($docid, "$docu_foot#$footid", $foot) . $after;
 	}
     }
     #
@@ -1373,7 +4443,8 @@ while (@lines3) {
     # otherwise
     push(@doc_lines, $_);
 }
-print "# end of pass 4\n" if $verbose;
+	
+print "# end of pass 4\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
 
 #+++############################################################################
 #                                                                              #
@@ -1381,126 +4452,377 @@ print "# end of pass 4\n" if $verbose;
 #                                                                              #
 #---############################################################################
 
-$header = <<EOT;
-<!-- This HTML file has been created by $THISPROG
-     from $docu on $TODAY -->
-EOT
+$T2H_L2H = &l2h_FinishToLatex if ($T2H_L2H);
+$T2H_L2H = &l2h_ToHtml        if ($T2H_L2H);
+$T2H_L2H = &l2h_InitFromHtml  if ($T2H_L2H);
 
-$full_title = $value{'_title'} || $value{'_settitle'} || "Untitled Document";
-$title = $value{'_settitle'} || $full_title;
-$_ = &substitute_style($full_title);
-&unprotect_texi;
-s/\n$//; # rmv last \n (if any)
-$full_title = "<H1>" . join("</H1>\n<H1>", split(/\n/, $_)) . "</H1>\n";
+# fix node2up, node2prev, node2next, if desired
+if ($has_top_command)
+{
+  for $section (keys %sec2number)
+  {
+    $node = $sec2node{$section};
+    $node2up{$node} = Sec2UpNode($section) unless $node2up{$node};
+    $node2prev{$node} = Sec2PrevNode($section) unless $node2prev{$node};
+    $node2next{$node} = Sec2NextNode($section) unless $node2next{$node};
+  }
+}
 
+# prepare %T2H_THISDOC
+$T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle} = $value{'_title'} || $value{'_settitle'} || "Untitled Document";
+$T2H_THISDOC{title} = $value{'_settitle'} || $T2H_THISDOC{fulltitle};
+$T2H_THISDOC{author} = $value{'_author'};
+$T2H_THISDOC{subtitle} = $value{'_subtitle'};
+$T2H_THISDOC{shorttitle} = $value{'_shorttitle'};
+for $key (keys %T2H_THISDOC)
+{
+  $_ = &substitute_style($T2H_THISDOC{$key});
+  &unprotect_texi;
+  s/\s*$//;
+  $T2H_THISDOC{$key} = $_;
+}
+
+# if no sections, then simply print document as is
+unless (@sections)
+{
+  print "# Writing content into $docu_top_file \n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  open(FILE, "> $docu_top_file") 
+    || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_top_file for writing: $!\n";
+
+  &$T2H_print_page_head(\*FILE);
+  $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@doc_lines;
+  t2h_print_lines(\*FILE);
+  &$T2H_print_foot_navigation(\*FILE);
+  &$T2H_print_page_foot(\*FILE);
+  close(FILE);
+  goto Finish;
+}
+
+# initialize $T2H_HREF, $T2H_NAME
+%T2H_HREF = 
+  (
+   'First' ,   sec_href($sections[0]),
+   'Last',     sec_href($sections[$#sections]),
+   'About',     $docu_about. '#SEC_About',
+  );
+
+# prepare TOC, OVERVIEW, TOP
+$T2H_TOC = \@toc_lines;
+$T2H_OVERVIEW = \@stoc_lines;
+if ($has_top)
+{
+  while (1)
+  {
+    $_ = shift @doc_lines;
+    last if /$TOPEND/;
+    push @$T2H_TOP, $_;
+  }
+  $T2H_HREF{'Top'} = $docu_top . '#SEC_Top';
+}
+else
+{
+  $T2H_HREF{'Top'} = $T2H_HREF{First};
+}
+
+$node2href{Top} = $T2H_HREF{Top};
+$T2H_HREF{Contents} = $docu_toc.'#SEC_Contents' if @toc_lines;
+$T2H_HREF{Overview} = $docu_stoc.'#SEC_OVERVIEW' if @stoc_lines;
+
+# settle on index
+if ($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER)
+{
+  $T2H_HREF{Index} = $node2href{normalise_node($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER)};
+  warn "$ERROR T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER '$T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER' not found\n"
+    unless $T2H_HREF{Index};
+}
+if (! $T2H_HREF{Index} && $first_index_chapter)
+{
+  $T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER = $first_index_chapter;
+  $T2H_HREF{Index} = $node2href{$T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER};
+}
+
+print "# Using '" . clean_name($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER) . "' as index page\n"
+  if ($T2H_VERBOSE && $T2H_HREF{Index});
+
+%T2H_NAME =
+  (
+   'First',   clean_name($sec2node{$sections[0]}),
+   'Last',    clean_name($sec2node{$sections[$#sections]}),
+   'About',    $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'About_Title'},
+   'Contents', $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'ToC_Title'},
+   'Overview', $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'Overview_Title'},
+   'Index' ,   clean_name($T2H_INDEX_CHAPTER),
+   'Top',      clean_name($T2H_TOP_HEADING || $T2H_THISDOC{'title'} || $T2H_THISDOC{'shorttitle'}),
+  );
+
+#############################################################################
+# print frame and frame toc file
 #
-# print ToC
-#
-if (!$monolithic && @toc_lines) {
-    if (open(FILE, "> $docu_toc")) {
-	print "# creating $docu_toc...\n" if $verbose;
-	&print_toplevel_header("$title - Table of Contents");
-	&print_ruler;
-	&print(*toc_lines, FILE);
-	&print_toplevel_footer;
-	close(FILE);
-    } else {
-	warn "$ERROR Can't write to $docu_toc: $!\n";
-    }
+if ( $T2H_FRAMES )
+{
+  open(FILE, "> $docu_frame_file") 
+    || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_frame_file for writing: $!\n";
+  print "# Creating frame in $docu_frame_file ...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  &$T2H_print_frame(\*FILE);
+  close(FILE);
+
+  open(FILE, "> $docu_toc_frame_file") 
+    || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_toc_frame_file for writing: $!\n";
+  print "# Creating toc frame in $docu_frame_file ...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+   &$T2H_print_toc_frame(\*FILE);
+  close(FILE);
 }
 
+
+#############################################################################
+# print Top
 #
-# print footnotes
+open(FILE, "> $docu_top_file") 
+  || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_top_file for writing: $!\n";
+&$T2H_print_page_head(\*FILE) unless ($T2H_SPLIT);
+
+if ($has_top)
+{
+  print "# Creating Top in $docu_top_file ...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  $T2H_THIS_SECTION = $T2H_TOP;
+  $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Top};
+  $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Top};
+  &$T2H_print_Top(\*FILE);
+}
+  
+close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT;
+
+#############################################################################
+# Print sections
 #
-if (!$monolithic && @foot_lines) {
-    if (open(FILE, "> $docu_foot")) {
-	print "# creating $docu_foot...\n" if $verbose;
-	&print_toplevel_header("$title - Footnotes");
-	&print_ruler;
-        &print(*foot_lines, FILE);
-	&print_toplevel_footer;
-	close(FILE);
-    } else {
-	warn "$ERROR Can't write to $docu_foot: $!\n";
-    }
-}
-
-#
-# print document
-#
-if ($split_chapter || $split_node) { # split
-    $doc_num = 0;
-    $last_num = scalar(@sections);
-    $first_doc = &doc_name(1);
-    $last_doc = &doc_name($last_num);
-    while (@sections) {
-	$section = shift(@sections);
-	&next_doc;
-	if (open(FILE, "> $docu_doc")) {
-	    print "# creating $docu_doc...\n" if $verbose;
-	    &print_header("$title - $section");
-	    $prev_doc = ($doc_num == 1 ? undef : &doc_name($doc_num - 1));
-	    $next_doc = ($doc_num == $last_num ? undef : &doc_name($doc_num + 1));
-	    $navigation = "Go to the ";
-	    $navigation .= ($prev_doc ? &anchor('', $first_doc, "first") : "first");
-	    $navigation .= ", ";
-	    $navigation .= ($prev_doc ? &anchor('', $prev_doc, "previous") : "previous");
-	    $navigation .= ", ";
-	    $navigation .= ($next_doc ? &anchor('', $next_doc, "next") : "next");
-	    $navigation .= ", ";
-	    $navigation .= ($next_doc ? &anchor('', $last_doc, "last") : "last");
-	    $navigation .= " section, " . &anchor('', $docu_toc, "table of contents") . ".\n";
-	    print FILE $navigation;
-	    &print_ruler;
-	    # find corresponding lines
-            @tmp_lines = ();
-            while (@doc_lines) {
-		$_ = shift(@doc_lines);
-		last if ($_ eq $SPLITTAG);
-		push(@tmp_lines, $_);
-	    }
-            &print(*tmp_lines, FILE);
-	    &print_ruler;
-	    print FILE $navigation;
-	    &print_footer;
-	    close(FILE);
-	} else {
-	    warn "$ERROR Can't write to $docu_doc: $!\n";
-	}
+$T2H_NODE{Forward} = $sec2node{$sections[0]};
+$T2H_NAME{Forward} = &clean_name($sec2node{$sections[0]});
+$T2H_HREF{Forward} = sec_href($sections[0]);
+$T2H_NODE{This} = 'Top';
+$T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Top};
+$T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Top};
+if ($T2H_SPLIT)
+{
+  print "# writing " . scalar(@sections) . 
+    " sections in $docu_rdir$docu_name"."_[1..$doc_num]"
+	  if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  $previous = ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter' ? $CHAPTEREND : $SECTIONEND);
+  undef $FH;
+  $doc_num = 0;
+}
+else
+{
+  print "# writing " . scalar(@sections) . " sections in $docu_top_file ..." 
+    if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  $FH = \*FILE;
+  $previous = '';
+}
+
+$counter = 0;
+# loop through sections
+while ($section = shift(@sections)) 
+{
+  if ($T2H_SPLIT && ($T2H_SPLIT eq 'section' || $previous eq $CHAPTEREND))
+  { 
+    if ($FH)
+    {
+      #close previous page
+      &$T2H_print_chapter_footer($FH) if $T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter';
+      &$T2H_print_page_foot($FH);
+      close($FH);
+      undef $FH;
     }
-} else { # not split
-    if (open(FILE, "> $docu_doc")) {
-	print "# creating $docu_doc...\n" if $verbose;
-	if ($monolithic || !@toc_lines) {
-	    &print_toplevel_header($title);
-	} else {
-	    &print_header($title);
-	    print FILE $full_title;
-	}
-	if ($monolithic && @toc_lines) {
-	    &print_ruler;
- 	    print FILE "<H1>Table of Contents</H1>\n";
- 	    &print(*toc_lines, FILE);
-	}
-	&print_ruler;
-        &print(*doc_lines, FILE);
-	if ($monolithic && @foot_lines) {
-	    &print_ruler;
- 	    print FILE "<H1>Footnotes</H1>\n";
- 	    &print(*foot_lines, FILE);
-	}
-	if ($monolithic || !@toc_lines) {
-	    &print_toplevel_footer;
-	} else {
-	    &print_footer;
-	}
-	close(FILE);
-    } else {
-	warn "$ERROR Can't write to $docu_doc: $!\n";
+  }
+  $T2H_NAME{Back} = $T2H_NAME{This};
+  $T2H_HREF{Back} = $T2H_HREF{This};
+  $T2H_NODE{Back} = $T2H_NODE{This};
+  $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Forward};
+  $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Forward};
+  $T2H_NODE{This} = $T2H_NODE{Forward};
+  if ($sections[0])
+  {
+    $T2H_NODE{Forward} = $sec2node{$sections[0]};
+    $T2H_NAME{Forward} = &clean_name($T2H_NODE{Forward});
+    $T2H_HREF{Forward} = sec_href($sections[0]);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    undef $T2H_HREF{Forward}, $T2H_NODE{Forward}, $T2H_NAME{Forward};
+  }
+
+  $node = $node2up{$T2H_NODE{This}};
+  $T2H_HREF{Up} = $node2href{$node};
+  if ($T2H_HREF{Up} eq $T2H_HREF{This} || ! $T2H_HREF{Up})
+  {
+    $T2H_NAME{Up} = $T2H_NAME{Top};
+    $T2H_HREF{Up} = $T2H_HREF{Top};
+    $T2H_NODE{Up} = 'Up';
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    $T2H_NAME{Up} = &clean_name($node);
+    $T2H_NODE{Up} = $node;
+  }
+
+  $node = $T2H_NODE{This};
+  $node = $node2prev{$node};
+  $T2H_NAME{Prev} = &clean_name($node);
+  $T2H_HREF{Prev} = $node2href{$node};
+  $T2H_NODE{Prev} = $node;
+
+  $node = $T2H_NODE{This};
+  if ($node2up{$node} && $node2up{$node} ne 'Top'&&
+      ($node2prev{$node} eq $T2H_NODE{Back} || ! $node2prev{$node}))
+  {
+    $node = $node2up{$node};
+    while ($node && $node ne $node2up{$node} && ! $node2prev{$node})
+    {
+      $node = $node2up{$node};
     }
+    $node = $node2prev{$node} 
+      unless $node2up{$node} eq 'Top' || ! $node2up{$node};
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    $node = $node2prev{$node};
+  }
+  $T2H_NAME{FastBack} = &clean_name($node);
+  $T2H_HREF{FastBack} = $node2href{$node};
+  $T2H_NODE{FastBack} = $node;
+  
+  $node = $T2H_NODE{This};
+  $node = $node2next{$node};
+  $T2H_NAME{Next} = &clean_name($node);
+  $T2H_HREF{Next} = $node2href{$node};
+  $T2H_NODE{Next} = $node;
+
+  $node = $T2H_NODE{This};
+  if ($node2up{$node} && $node2up{$node} ne 'Top'&& 
+      ($node2next{$node} eq $T2H_NODE{Forward} || ! $node2next{$node}))
+  {
+    $node = $node2up{$node};
+    while ($node && $node ne $node2up{$node} && ! $node2next{$node})
+    {
+      $node = $node2up{$node};
+    }
+  }
+  $node = $node2next{$node};
+  $T2H_NAME{FastForward} = &clean_name($node);
+  $T2H_HREF{FastForward} = $node2href{$node};
+  $T2H_NODE{FastForward} = $node;
+
+  if (! defined($FH))
+  {
+    my $file = $T2H_HREF{This};
+    $file =~ s/\#.*$//;
+    open(FILE, "> $docu_rdir$file") || 
+      die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_rdir$file for writing: $!\n";
+    $FH = \*FILE;
+    &$T2H_print_page_head($FH);
+    t2h_print_label($FH);
+    &$T2H_print_chapter_header($FH) if $T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter';
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    t2h_print_label($FH);
+  }
+
+  $T2H_THIS_SECTION = [];
+  while (@doc_lines) {
+    $_ = shift(@doc_lines);
+    last if ($_ eq $SECTIONEND || $_ eq $CHAPTEREND);
+    push(@$T2H_THIS_SECTION, $_);
+  }
+  $previous = $_;
+  &$T2H_print_section($FH);
+
+  if ($T2H_VERBOSE)
+  {
+    $counter++;
+    print "." if $counter =~ /00$/;
+  }
+}
+if ($T2H_SPLIT)
+{
+  &$T2H_print_chapter_footer($FH) if $T2H_SPLIT eq 'chapter';
+  &$T2H_print_page_foot($FH);
+  close($FH);
+}
+print "\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+
+#############################################################################
+# Print ToC, Overview, Footnotes
+#
+undef $T2H_HREF{Prev};
+undef $T2H_HREF{Next};
+undef $T2H_HREF{Back};
+undef $T2H_HREF{Forward};
+undef $T2H_HREF{Up};
+
+if (@foot_lines)
+{
+  print "# writing Footnotes in $docu_foot_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  open (FILE, "> $docu_foot_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_foot_file for writing: $!\n"
+      if $T2H_SPLIT;
+  $T2H_HREF{This} = $docu_foot;
+  $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_WORDS->{$T2H_LANG}->{'Footnotes_Title'};
+  $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@foot_lines;
+  &$T2H_print_Footnotes(\*FILE);
+  close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT;
+}
+
+if (@toc_lines)
+{
+  print "# writing Toc in $docu_toc_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  open (FILE, "> $docu_toc_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_toc_file for writing: $!\n"
+      if $T2H_SPLIT;
+  $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Contents};
+  $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Contents};
+  $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@toc_lines;
+  &$T2H_print_Toc(\*FILE);
+  close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT;
+}
+
+if (@stoc_lines)
+{
+  print "# writing Overview in $docu_stoc_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  open (FILE, "> $docu_stoc_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_stoc_file for writing: $!\n"
+      if $T2H_SPLIT;
+  
+  $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{Overview};
+  $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{Overview};
+  $T2H_THIS_SECTION = \@stoc_lines;
+  unshift @$T2H_THIS_SECTION, "<BLOCKQUOTE>\n";
+  push @$T2H_THIS_SECTION, "\n</BLOCKQUOTE>\n";
+  &$T2H_print_Overview(\*FILE);
+  close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT;
+}
+
+if ($about_body = &$T2H_about_body())
+{
+  print "# writing About in $docu_about_file...\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+  open (FILE, "> $docu_about_file") || die "$ERROR: Can't open $docu_about_file for writing: $!\n"
+      if $T2H_SPLIT;
+  
+  $T2H_HREF{This} = $T2H_HREF{About};
+  $T2H_NAME{This} = $T2H_NAME{About};
+  $T2H_THIS_SECTION = [$about_body];
+  &$T2H_print_About(\*FILE);
+  close(FILE) if $T2H_SPLIT;
 }
 
-print "# that's all folks\n" if $verbose;
+unless ($T2H_SPLIT)
+{
+  &$T2H_print_page_foot(\*FILE);
+  close (FILE);
+}
+  
+Finish:
+&l2h_FinishFromHtml if ($T2H_L2H);
+&l2h_Finish if($T2H_L2H);
+print "# that's all folks\n" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
+
+exit(0);
 
 #+++############################################################################
 #                                                                              #
@@ -1508,27 +4830,55 @@ print "# that's all folks\n" if $verbose;
 #                                                                              #
 #---############################################################################
 
+sub LocateIncludeFile
+{
+  my $file = shift;
+  my $dir;
+
+  return $file if (-e $file && -r $file);
+  foreach $dir (@T2H_INCLUDE_DIRS)
+  {
+    return "$dir/$file" if (-e "$dir/$file" && -r "$dir/$file");
+  }
+  return undef;
+}
+
+sub clean_name 
+{
+  local ($_);
+  $_ = &remove_style($_[0]);
+  &unprotect_texi;
+  return $_;
+}
+
 sub update_sec_num {
     local($name, $level) = @_;
+    my $ret;
 
     $level--; # here we start at 0
-    if ($name =~ /^appendix/) {
+    if ($name =~ /^appendix/ || defined(@appendix_sec_num)) {
 	# appendix style
 	if (defined(@appendix_sec_num)) {
 	    &incr_sec_num($level, @appendix_sec_num);
 	} else {
 	    @appendix_sec_num = ('A', 0, 0, 0);
 	}
-	return(join('.', @appendix_sec_num[0..$level]));
+	$ret = join('.', @appendix_sec_num[0..$level]);
     } else {
 	# normal style
-	if (defined(@normal_sec_num)) {
-	    &incr_sec_num($level, @normal_sec_num);
-	} else {
-	    @normal_sec_num = (1, 0, 0, 0);
+	if (defined(@normal_sec_num)) 
+	{
+	  &incr_sec_num($level, @normal_sec_num);
+	} 
+	else 
+	{
+	  @normal_sec_num = (1, 0, 0, 0);
 	}
-	return(join('.', @normal_sec_num[0..$level]));
+	$ret = join('.', @normal_sec_num[0..$level]);
     }
+    
+    $ret .= "." if $level == 0;
+    return $ret;
 }
 
 sub incr_sec_num {
@@ -1540,13 +4890,78 @@ sub incr_sec_num {
     }
 }
 
+sub Sec2UpNode
+{
+  my $sec = shift;
+  my $num = $sec2number{$sec};
+
+  return '' unless $num;
+  return 'Top' unless $num =~ /\.\d+/;
+  $num =~ s/\.[^\.]*$//;
+  $num = $num . '.' unless $num =~ /\./;
+  return $sec2node{$number2sec{$num}};
+}
+
+sub Sec2PrevNode
+{
+  my $sec = shift;
+  my $num = $sec2number{$sec};
+  my ($i, $post);
+  
+  if ($num =~ /(\w+)(\.$|$)/)
+  {
+    $num = $`;
+    $i = $1;
+    $post = $2;
+    if ($i eq 'A')
+    {
+      $i = $normal_sec_num[0];
+    }
+    elsif ($i ne '1')
+    {
+      # unfortunately, -- operator is not magical
+      $i = chr(ord($i) + 1);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      return '';
+    }
+    return $sec2node{$number2sec{$num . $i . $post}}
+  }
+  return '';
+}
+
+sub Sec2NextNode
+{
+  my $sec = shift;
+  my $num = $sec2number{$sec};
+  my $i;
+
+  if ($num =~ /(\w+)(\.$|$)/)
+  {
+    $num = $`;
+    $i = $1;
+    $post = $2;
+    if ($post eq '.' && $i eq $normal_sec_num[0])
+    {
+      $i = 'A';
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      $i++;
+    }
+    return $sec2node{$number2sec{$num . $i . $post}}
+  }
+  return '';
+}
+
 sub check {
     local($_, %seen, %context, $before, $match, $after);
 
     while (<>) {
 	if (/\@(\*|\.|\:|\@|\{|\})/) {
 	    $seen{$&}++;
-	    $context{$&} .= "> $_" if $verbose;
+	    $context{$&} .= "> $_" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
 	    $_ = "$`XX$'";
 	    redo;
 	}
@@ -1554,10 +4969,10 @@ sub check {
 	    ($before, $match, $after) = ($`, $&, $');
 	    if ($before =~ /\b[\w-]+$/ && $after =~ /^[\w-.]*\b/) { # e-mail address
 		$seen{'e-mail address'}++;
-		$context{'e-mail address'} .= "> $_" if $verbose;
+		$context{'e-mail address'} .= "> $_" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
 	    } else {
 		$seen{$match}++;
-		$context{$match} .= "> $_" if $verbose;
+		$context{$match} .= "> $_" if $T2H_VERBOSE;
 	    }
 	    $match =~ s/^\@/X/;
 	    $_ = "$before$match$after";
@@ -1566,7 +4981,7 @@ sub check {
     }
     
     foreach (sort(keys(%seen))) {
-	if ($verbose) {
+	if ($T2H_VERBOSE) {
 	    print "$_\n";
 	    print $context{$_};
 	} else {
@@ -1621,6 +5036,19 @@ sub skip_until {
     die "* Failed to find '$tag' after: " . $lines[$#lines];
 }
 
+# used in pass 1 for l2h use &next_line
+sub string_until {
+    local($tag) = @_;
+    local($_, $string);
+
+    while ($_ = &next_line) {
+	return $string if /^\@end\s+$tag\s*$/;
+#	$_ =~ s/hbox/mbox/g;
+	$string = $string.$_;
+    }
+    die "* Failed to find '$tag' after: " . $lines[$#lines];
+}
+
 #
 # HTML stacking to have a better HTML output
 #
@@ -1664,8 +5092,11 @@ sub html_pop_if {
 
 sub html_debug {
     local($what, $line) = @_;
-    return("<!-- $line @html_stack, $html_element -->$what")
-	if $debug & $DEBUG_HTML;
+    if ($T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_HTML)
+    {
+     $what = "\n" unless $what;
+     return("<!-- $line @html_stack, $html_element -->$what")
+    }	
     return($what);
 }
 
@@ -1673,29 +5104,80 @@ sub html_debug {
 sub debug {
     local($what, $line) = @_;
     return("<!-- $line -->$what")
-	if $debug & $DEBUG_HTML;
+	if $T2H_DEBUG & $DEBUG_HTML;
     return($what);
 }
 
+sub SimpleTexi2Html
+{
+  local $_ = $_[0];
+  &protect_texi;
+  &protect_html;
+  $_ = substitute_style($_);
+  $_[0]  = $_;
+}
+
 sub normalise_node {
-    $_[0] =~ s/\s+/ /g;
-    $_[0] =~ s/ $//;
-    $_[0] =~ s/^ //;
+  local $_ = $_[0];
+  s/\s+/ /g;
+  s/ $//;
+  s/^ //;
+  &protect_texi;
+  &protect_html;
+  $_ = substitute_style($_);
+  $_[0]  = $_;
 }
 
-sub menu_entry {
-    local($entry, $node, $descr) = @_;
-    local($href);
+sub menu_entry 
+{
+  my ($node, $name, $descr) = @_;
+  my ($href, $entry);
+  
+  &normalise_node($node);
+  $href = $node2href{$node};
+  if ($href) 
+  {
+    $descr =~ s/^\s+//;
+    $descr =~ s/\s*$//;
+    $descr = SimpleTexi2Html($descr);
+    if ($T2H_NUMBER_SECTIONS && !$T2H_NODE_NAME_IN_MENU && $node2sec{$node})
+    {
+      $entry = $node2sec{$node};
+      $name = '';
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      &normalise_node($name);
+      $entry = ($name && ($name ne $node || ! $T2H_AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY) 
+		? "$name : $node" : $node);
+    }
 
-    &normalise_node($node);
-    $href = $node2href{$node};
-    if ($href) {
-	$descr =~ s/^\s+//;
-	$descr = ": $descr" if $descr;
-	push(@lines2, "<LI>" . &anchor('', $href, $entry) . "$descr\n");
-    } else {
-	warn "$ERROR Undefined node ($node): $_";
+    if ($T2H_AVOID_MENU_REDUNDANCY && $descr)
+    {
+      my $clean_entry = $entry;
+      $clean_entry =~ s/^.*? // if ($clean_entry =~ /^([A-Z]|\d+)\.[\d\.]* /);
+      $clean_entry =~ s/[^\w]//g;
+      my $clean_descr = $descr;
+      $clean_descr =~ s/[^\w]//g;
+      $descr = '' if ($clean_entry eq $clean_descr)
     }
+    push(@lines2,&debug('<TR><TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="TOP">' . 
+			&t2h_anchor('', $href, $entry) . 
+			'</TD><TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;</TD><TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="TOP">' . 
+			$descr . 
+			"</TD></TR>\n", __LINE__));
+  }
+  elsif ($node =~ /^\(.*\)\w+/)
+  {
+    push(@lines2,&debug('<TR><TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="TOP">' . 
+			$entry . 
+			'</TD><TD ALIGN="left" VALIGN="TOP">' . $descr . 
+			"</TD></TR>\n", __LINE__))
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    warn "$ERROR Undefined node of menu_entry ($node): $_";
+  }
 }
 
 sub do_ctrl { "^$_[0]" }
@@ -1704,19 +5186,51 @@ sub do_email {
     local($addr, $text) = split(/,\s*/, $_[0]);
 
     $text = $addr unless $text;
-    &anchor('', "mailto:$addr", $text);
+    &t2h_anchor('', "mailto:$addr", $text);
+}
+
+sub do_sc 
+{ 
+  # l2h does this much better
+  return &l2h_ToLatex("{\\sc ".&unprotect_html($_[0])."}") if ($T2H_L2H);
+  return "\U$_[0]\E";
 }
 
-sub do_sc { "\U$_[0]\E" }
+sub do_math
+{
+  return &l2h_ToLatex("\$".&unprotect_html($_[0])."\$") if ($T2H_L2H);
+  return "<EM>".$text."</EM>";
+}
 
 sub do_uref {
-    local($url, $text) = split(/,\s*/, $_[0]);
+    local($url, $text, $only_text) = split(/,\s*/, $_[0]);
 
+    $text = $only_text if $only_text;
     $text = $url unless $text;
-    &anchor('', $url, $text);
+    &t2h_anchor('', $url, $text);
+}
+
+sub do_url { &t2h_anchor('', $_[0], $_[0]) }
+
+sub do_acronym
+{
+  return '<FONT SIZE="-1">' . $_[0] . '</FONT>';
 }
 
-sub do_url { &anchor('', $_[0], $_[0]) }
+sub do_accent
+{
+  return "&$_[0]acute;" if $_[1] eq 'H';
+  return "$_[0]." if $_[1] eq 'dotaccent';
+  return "$_[0]*" if $_[1] eq 'ringaccent';
+  return "$_[0]".'[' if $_[1] eq 'tieaccent';
+  return "$_[0]".'(' if $_[1] eq 'u';
+  return "$_[0]_" if $_[1] eq 'ubaraccent';
+  return ".$_[0]" if $_[1] eq 'udotaccent';
+  return "$_[0]&lt;" if $_[1] eq 'v';
+  return "&$_[0]cedil;" if $_[1] eq ',';
+  return "$_[0]" if $_[1] eq 'dotless';
+  return undef;
+}
 
 sub apply_style {
     local($texi_style, $text) = @_;
@@ -1730,7 +5244,7 @@ sub apply_style {
 	}
 	if ($style =~ /^\&/) { # custom
 	    $style = $';
-	    $text = &$style($text);
+	    $text = &$style($text, $texi_style);
 	} elsif ($style) { # good style
 	    $text = "<$style>$text</$style>";
 	} else { # no style
@@ -1744,19 +5258,27 @@ sub apply_style {
 # remove Texinfo styles
 sub remove_style {
     local($_) = @_;
-    s/\@\w+{([^\{\}]+)}/$1/g;
+    1 while(s/\@\w+{([^\{\}]+)}/$1/g);
     return($_);
 }
 
+sub remove_things
+{
+  local ($_) = @_;
+  s|\@(\w+)\{\}|$1|g;
+  return $_;
+}
+
 sub substitute_style {
     local($_) = @_;
     local($changed, $done, $style, $text);
 
+    &simple_substitutions;
     $changed = 1;
     while ($changed) {
 	$changed = 0;
 	$done = '';
-	while (/\@(\w+){([^\{\}]+)}/) {
+	while (/\@(\w+){([^\{\}]+)}/ || /\@(,){([^\{\}]+)}/) {
 	    $text = &apply_style($1, $2);
 	    if ($text) {
 		$_ = "$`$text$'";
@@ -1771,13 +5293,19 @@ sub substitute_style {
     return($_);
 }
 
-sub anchor {
-    local($name, $href, $text, $newline) = @_;
+sub t2h_anchor {
+    local($name, $href, $text, $newline, $extra_attribs) = @_;
     local($result);
 
     $result = "<A";
     $result .= " NAME=\"$name\"" if $name;
-    $result .= " HREF=\"$href\"" if $href;
+    if ($href)
+    {
+      $href =~ s|^$T2H_HREF_DIR_INSTEAD_FILE|./| 
+	if ($T2H_HREF_DIR_INSTEAD_FILE);
+      $result .= ($href =~ /\"/ ? " HREF='$href'"  : " HREF=\"$href\"");
+    }
+    $result .= " $extra_attribs" if $extra_attribs;
     $result .= ">$text</A>";
     $result .= "\n" if $newline;
     return($result);
@@ -1786,104 +5314,46 @@ sub anchor {
 sub pretty_date {
     local(@MoY, $sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst);
 
-    @MoY = ('January', 'Febuary', 'March', 'April', 'May', 'June',
+    @MoY = ('January', 'February', 'March', 'April', 'May', 'June',
 	    'July', 'August', 'September', 'October', 'November', 'December');
     ($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst) = localtime(time);
     $year += ($year < 70) ? 2000 : 1900;
-    return("$mday $MoY[$mon] $year");
+    # obachman: Let's do it as the Americans do
+    return("$MoY[$mon], $mday  $year");
 }
 
-sub doc_name {
+sub doc_href {
     local($num) = @_;
 
-    return("${docu_name}_$num.html");
+    return("${docu_name}_$num.$docu_ext");
+}
+
+sub sec_href
+{
+  return $node2href{$sec2node{$_[0]}};
 }
 
 sub next_doc {
-    $docu_doc = &doc_name(++$doc_num);
+    $docu_doc = &doc_href(++$doc_num);
 }
 
-sub print {
-    local(*lines, $fh) = @_;
+sub t2h_print_lines {
+    my ($fh, $lines) = @_;
     local($_);
-
-    while (@lines) {
-	$_ = shift(@lines);
+    $lines = $T2H_THIS_SECTION unless $lines;
+    my $cnt = 0;
+    for (@$lines) 
+    {
+	$_ = l2h_FromHtml($_) if ($T2H_L2H);
 	if (/^$PROTECTTAG/o) {
 	    $_ = $tag2pro{$_};
 	} else {
 	    &unprotect_texi;
 	}
 	print $fh $_;
+	$cnt += split(/\W*\s+\W*/);
     }
-}
-
-sub print_ruler {
-    print FILE "<P><HR><P>\n";
-}
-
-sub print_header {
-    local($_);
-
-    # clean the title
-    $_ = &remove_style($_[0]);
-    &unprotect_texi;
-    # print the header
-    if ($doctype eq 'html2') {
-	print FILE $html2_doctype;
-    } elsif ($doctype) {
-	print FILE $doctype;
-    }
-    print FILE <<EOT;
-<HTML>
-<HEAD>
-$header
-<TITLE>$_</TITLE>
-</HEAD>
-<BODY>
-EOT
-}
-
-sub print_toplevel_header {
-    local($_);
-
-    &print_header; # pass given arg...
-    print FILE $full_title;
-    if ($value{'_subtitle'}) {
-	$value{'_subtitle'} =~ s/\n+$//;
-	foreach (split(/\n/, $value{'_subtitle'})) {
-	    $_ = &substitute_style($_);
-	    &unprotect_texi;
-	    print FILE "<H2>$_</H2>\n";
-	}
-    }
-    if ($value{'_author'}) {
-	$value{'_author'} =~ s/\n+$//;
-	foreach (split(/\n/, $value{'_author'})) {
-	    $_ = &substitute_style($_);
-	    &unprotect_texi;
-	    s/[\w.-]+\@[\w.-]+/<A HREF="mailto:$&">$&<\/A>/g;
-	    print FILE "<ADDRESS>$_</ADDRESS>\n";
-	}
-    }
-    print FILE "<P>\n";
-}
-
-sub print_footer {
-    print FILE <<EOT;
-</BODY>
-</HTML>
-EOT
-}
-
-sub print_toplevel_footer {
-    &print_ruler;
-    print FILE <<EOT;
-This document was generated on $TODAY using the
-<A HREF=\"$HOMEPAGE\">texi2html</A>
-translator version 1.52.</P>
-EOT
-    &print_footer;
+    return $cnt;
 }
 
 sub protect_texi {
@@ -1901,6 +5371,13 @@ sub protect_html {
     $what =~ s/\&/\&\#38;/g;
     $what =~ s/\</\&\#60;/g;
     $what =~ s/\>/\&\#62;/g;
+    # restore anything in quotes
+    # this fixes my problem where I had:
+    # < IMG SRC="leftarrow.gif" ALT="<--" >  but what if I wanted &#60; in my ALT text ??
+    # maybe byte stuffing or some other technique should be used.
+    $what =~ s/\"([^\&]+)\&\#60;(.*)\"/"$1<$2"/g;
+    $what =~ s/\"([^\&]+)\&\#62;(.*)\"/"$1>$2"/g;
+    $what =~ s/\"([^\&]+)\&\#38;(.*)\"/"$1&$2"/g;
     # but recognize some HTML things
     $what =~ s/\&\#60;\/A\&\#62;/<\/A>/g;	      # </A>
     $what =~ s/\&\#60;A ([^\&]+)\&\#62;/<A $1>/g;     # <A [^&]+>
@@ -1916,6 +5393,13 @@ sub unprotect_texi {
     s/$;4/\'/go;
 }
 
+sub Unprotect_texi 
+{
+  local $_ = shift;
+  &unprotect_texi;
+  return($_);
+}
+
 sub unprotect_html {
     local($what) = @_;
     $what =~ s/\&\#38;/\&/g;
@@ -1924,8 +5408,12 @@ sub unprotect_html {
     return($what);
 }
 
-sub byalpha {
-    $key2alpha{$a} cmp $key2alpha{$b};
+sub t2h_print_label
+{
+    my $fh = shift;
+    my $href = shift || $T2H_HREF{This};
+    $href =~ s/.*#(.*)$/$1/;
+    print $fh qq{<A NAME="$href"></A>\n};
 }
 
 ##############################################################################
@@ -1938,144 +5426,4 @@ sub byalpha {
 .nr nl 0-1		\" fake up transition to first page again
 .nr % 0			\" start at page 1
 '; __END__ ############# From here on it's a standard manual page ############
-.TH TEXI2HTML 1 "01/05/98"
-.AT 3
-.SH NAME
-texi2html \- a Texinfo to HTML converter
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B texi2html [options] file
-.PP
-.B texi2html -check [-verbose] files
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I Texi2html
-converts the given Texinfo file to a set of HTML files. It tries to handle
-most of the Texinfo commands. It creates hypertext links for cross-references,
-footnotes...
-.PP
-It also tries to add links from a reference to its corresponding entry in the
-bibliography (if any). It may also handle a glossary (see the
-.B \-glossary
-option).
-.PP
-.I Texi2html
-creates several files depending on the contents of the Texinfo file and on
-the chosen options (see FILES).
-.PP
-The HTML files created by
-.I texi2html
-are closer to TeX than to Info, that's why
-.I texi2html
-converts @iftex sections and not @ifinfo ones by default. You can reverse
-this with the \-expandinfo option.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP 12
-.B \-check
-Check the given file and give the list of all things that may be Texinfo commands.
-This may be used to check the output of
-.I texi2html
-to find the Texinfo commands that have been left in the HTML file.
-.TP
-.B \-expandinfo
-Expand @ifinfo sections, not @iftex ones.
-.TP
-.B \-glossary
-Use the section named 'Glossary' to build a list of terms and put links in the HTML
-document from each term toward its definition.
-.TP
-.B \-invisible \fIname\fP
-Use \fIname\fP to create invisible destination anchors for index links
-(you can for instance use the invisible.xbm file shipped with this program).
-This is a workaround for a known bug of many WWW browsers, including netscape.
-.TP
-.B \-I \fIdir\fP
-Look also in \fIdir\fP to find included files.
-.TP
-.B \-menu
-Show the Texinfo menus; by default they are ignored.
-.TP
-.B \-monolithic
-Output only one file, including the table of contents and footnotes.
-.TP
-.B \-number
-Number the sections.
-.TP
-.B \-split_chapter
-Split the output into several HTML files (one per main section:
-chapter, appendix...).
-.TP
-.B \-split_node
-Split the output into several HTML files (one per node).
-.TP
-.B \-usage
-Print usage instructions, listing the current available command-line options.
-.TP
-.B \-verbose
-Give a verbose output. Can be used with the
-.B \-check
-option.
-.PP
-.SH FILES
-By default
-.I texi2html
-creates the following files (foo being the name of the Texinfo file):
-.TP 16
-.B foo_toc.html
-The table of contents.
-.TP
-.B foo.html
-The document's contents.
-.TP
-.B foo_foot.html
-The footnotes (if any).
-.PP
-When used with the
-.B \-split
-option, it creates several files (one per chapter or node), named
-.B foo_n.html
-(n being the indice of the chapter or node), instead of the single
-.B foo.html
-file.
-.PP
-When used with the
-.B \-monolithic
-option, it creates only one file:
-.B foo.html
-.SH VARIABLES
-.I texi2html
-predefines the following variables: \fBhtml\fP, \fBtexi2html\fP.
-.SH ADDITIONAL COMMANDS
-.I texi2html
-implements the following non-Texinfo commands (maybe they are in Texinfo now...):
-.TP 16
-.B @ifhtml
-This indicates the start of an HTML section, this section will passed through
-without any modification.
-.TP
-.B @end ifhtml
-This indicates the end of an HTML section.
-.SH VERSION
-This is \fItexi2html\fP version 1.52, 01/05/98.
-.PP
-The latest version of \fItexi2html\fP can be found in WWW, cf. URL
-http://wwwinfo.cern.ch/dis/texi2html/
-.SH AUTHOR
-The main author is Lionel Cons, CERN IT/DIS/OSE, Lionel.Cons@cern.ch.
-Many other people around the net contributed to this program.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-This program is the intellectual property of the European
-Laboratory for Particle Physics (known as CERN). No guarantee whatsoever is
-provided by CERN. No liability whatsoever is accepted for any loss or damage
-of any kind resulting from any defect or inaccuracy in this information or
-code.
-.PP
-CERN, 1211 Geneva 23, Switzerland
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-GNU Texinfo Documentation Format,
-HyperText Markup Language (HTML),
-World Wide Web (WWW).
-.SH BUGS
-This program does not understand all Texinfo commands (yet).
-.PP
-TeX specific commands (normally enclosed in @iftex) will be
-passed unmodified.
-.ex
+.so /usr/local/man/man1/texi2html.1